Tilct's Realm

Hogwarts: Neville’s Insert Chapter 32

Hogwarts: Neville’s Insert Chapter 32

“Be warned, Potter, Longbottom—any more nighttime wanderings, and I will personally ensure you’re expelled. Good day to you.”

With a dramatic swirl of his robes, Snape strode off toward the staffroom, leaving the four of them standing in tense silence.

Once they were outside on the stone steps, Harry turned to the others, his voice low and urgent. “Right, here’s what we’ve got to do. One of us has to keep an eye on Snape—wait outside the staffroom and follow him if he leaves. Hermione, you’d better do that.”

“Why me?” Hermione asked, looking slightly put out.

“It’s obvious,” Ron said with a smirk. “You can pretend to be waiting for Professor Flitwick. You know…” He put on a high, mockingly sweet voice, “‘Oh, Professor Flitwick, I’m so worried, I think I got question fourteen b wrong!’”

“Oh, shut up, Ron,” Hermione snapped, though her cheeks turned slightly pink. “Fine. I’ll do it.”

Neville sighed, running a hand through his hair. “I’ll go with Hermione,” he said reluctantly. He didn’t want to interfere with Dumbledore’s plan—he knew better than that. Dumbledore had already tried to erase his memories once, and Neville wasn’t eager to give him another reason to do so. For now, he would have to play along.

…

Neville and Hermione stood quietly outside the staffroom, Hermione fidgeted nervously, glancing at the closed door in front of them.

“What are we going to do if Professor Snape catches us here?” she whispered, her voice tinged with panic. “What if we slip up and he finds out that we know? What if—”

Neville rolled his eyes, interrupting her frantic ramble. She’s always overthinking, he thought. He leaned against the wall, keeping his voice calm. “Hermione, relax. Let me do the talking, all right?”

Hermione hesitated but eventually nodded, clasping her hands together to stop them from trembling.

After a brief pause, Neville decided to distract her. “So, have you mastered the Shrinking Charm yet?” he asked.

Hermione’s face brightened slightly as the familiar topic of spellwork brought her some comfort. “Yes,” she said with a nod. “I got it down while you were in the hospital. I’ve been working on the Banishing Charm, but I haven’t mastered it yet. I would’ve gotten it by now if we hadn’t been so focused on exams.” She sighed. “I wish I could practice spells during the holidays. It’s so unfair that we’re not allowed.”

Neville nodded sympathetically. “It’s not fair,” he agreed. “But you know it’s for safety reasons.”

Hermione sighed again. “I know, but that doesn’t make it any better,” she said, crossing her arms.

Neville rubbed his chin thoughtfully. “Hmm, maybe…” he began, then looked at her with a small smile. “Maybe you could come over to Longbottom Manor during the break. You could practice a bit there.”

Hermione’s eyes lit up with excitement. Without warning, she threw her arms around Neville in a hug. “That’s a brilliant idea, Neville! That would be amazing!”

Caught off guard, Neville wobbled slightly before regaining his balance. “I can’t make any promises, Hermione,” he said, patting her back awkwardly. “I’d have to ask Gran first and see if she agrees.”

Before Hermione could respond, a low, deliberate cough echoed from beside them. Both of them froze, turning to see Professor Snape standing nearby, his sneer firmly in place.

Hermione quickly let go of Neville and jumped back, her cheeks flushed with embarrassment.

“Twenty points from Gryffindor for inappropriate behavior in the school,” Snape drawled, his tone cold and mocking.

Neville rolled his eyes, 'Sure, Inappropriate?', he thought sarcastically.

Snape’s gaze shifted between the two of them, his sneer deepening. “And what, pray tell, are the two of you doing loitering outside the staffroom?”

Hermione stammered, clearly flustered, but Neville stepped in smoothly. “We’re here looking for Professor Flitwick,” he said evenly. “We wanted to ask him a few questions, so we were waiting for him.”

Snape’s dark eyes narrowed, clearly unconvinced, but he didn’t press further. “Wait here,” he said sharply, his cloak sweeping behind him as he turned and entered the staffroom.

Hermione let out a shaky breath, her hands twisting nervously. Neville gave her a reassuring look but didn’t say anything, keeping his focus on the door.

After what felt like an eternity, Snape returned, followed by a much more cheerful Professor Flitwick. “Here they are, Professor,” Snape said, his tone curt and disdainful.

“Ah, thank you, Severus,” Flitwick said, his tiny frame barely reaching Snape’s elbow. He gave the Potions Master a polite nod.

Snape nodded curtly, sneering at Neville one last time before sweeping away down the corridor. His robes billowed dramatically as he disappeared from sight. Hermione watched him go with a worried look, then turned to Neville.

Professor Flitwick’s cheerful voice broke the tension. “Ah, Mr. Longbottom, Miss Granger! I must admit I was surprised when Professor Snape informed me there were students waiting for me outside the staffroom. I thought you two would be outside enjoying the sun like the rest of the students.”

Neville stepped forward, smiling sheepishly and rubbing the back of his head. “Sorry for disturbing you, Professor. We just wanted to ask you a few questions before the summer break.”

Flitwick’s eyes sparkled, and he nodded enthusiastically. “Ah, I see! Eager to learn as much as you can before the break. That’s a commendable attitude! Well then, tell me, Mr. Longbottom, Miss Granger, what can I help you with?”

Neville hesitated for a moment before speaking. “Well, Professor, I’ve been trying to learn the Protego spell—the Shield Charm—but I can’t seem to get it right. When I cast it, all I get is a translucent white sheen, but it fades almost immediately.”

Flitwick tilted his head, a look of understanding crossing his face. “Ah, the Shield Charm! A very advanced spell indeed, Mr. Longbottom. May I ask why you’re so keen on mastering it? Does it have anything to do with… what happened in the forest?” His voice softened as he mentioned the forest, his gaze turning slightly sad.

Neville felt Hermione squeeze his hand. He nodded. “It’s partly because of that, Professor,” he admitted. “Though I started practicing it before the… incident.” He made air quotes at the word, his voice laced with an edge of dry humor. “But yes, I can’t help but think that if I’d been able to cast it properly, maybe the curse wouldn’t have hit me.”

What Neville didn’t say was that he wasn’t entirely sure Protego could block the Unforgivable Curses. The Killing Curse was definitely unstoppable, but there wasn’t much reliable information on the other two. He couldn’t outright ask Flitwick if the Shield Charm would work on them—that would raise too many questions, and Neville didn’t want Dumbledore finding out his memory charm hadn’t worked. Still, even if Protego couldn’t block Unforgivables, it would be useful against other spells.

Flitwick nodded solemnly. “I’m sorry you had to go through what you did, Mr. Longbottom. But it’s admirable that you’re taking the initiative to learn spells to protect yourself.” He paused, his tone becoming more instructive. “You should know, however, that the Shield Charm might not protect you from every dark curse. There are some spells, particularly more sinister ones, that Protego won’t block.”

Hermione glanced at Neville, her brow furrowed, but she didn’t interrupt.

“That said,” Flitwick continued, his voice brightening, “I think I might know why you’re having difficulty producing a full shield. It’s similar to the Summoning Charm—it’s a spell we teach in your fifth year for good reason. Your magical core might not be strong enough yet to sustain it fully. However,” he added, his tone becoming encouraging, “the fact that you can already produce a white sheen is very impressive. That tells me you might have the potential to cast it, though it may only hold against weaker spells for now. With more practice, I believe you can get there.”

Neville felt a flicker of pride at Flitwick’s words. “Thank you, Professor. I’ll keep practicing.”

“Good, good!” Flitwick said with a wide smile. “Now, why don’t you show me what you’ve got so far? A demonstration would help me see where the issue lies.”

Neville nodded, stepping back slightly and raising his wand. He focused his thoughts and called out, “Protego!” while making the proper wand movement. A white, shimmering plume of magic emerged from the tip of his wand and began to spread, but it faded quickly, dissipating into the air before it could fully form.

Professor Flitwick nodded approvingly. “Good, good, Mr. Longbottom. Your wand movement was precise, and your intent was clear. As I mentioned, you have just enough magical energy to attempt the spell, but only just. With a bit more practice, the shield will fully form. And when it does, it will look like this.”

Flitwick raised his own wand and, with a quick, fluid motion, cast the Shield Charm. “Protego!” A glowing, transparent shield materialized from the tip of his wand, its surface shimmering faintly like a bubble in the sunlight. He held it for a moment, allowing Neville and Hermione to observe it closely before letting the spell dissipate with a small flick of his wrist.

Neville nodded, his eyes reflecting determination. “I see. Thank you for showing us, Professor,” he said sincerely.

Flitwick smiled warmly. “You’re most welcome, Mr. Longbottom. You’re progressing well—keep practicing, and I’m confident you’ll master it in time.” He paused, then added, “Now, is there anything else you’d need help with?”

Neville hesitated, considering for a moment, but eventually shook his head. “No, Professor, that’s all I wanted to ask.”

Flitwick turned to Hermione. “And you, Miss Granger? Is there anything you need?”

Hermione quickly shook her head. “No, Professor. Thank you.”

“Very well then,” Flitwick said, his smile widening. “You should both get going and enjoy the sunshine while it lasts.”

With a final nod of thanks, Neville and Hermione parted ways with Flitwick and began briskly walking down the corridor. They followed the same path Snape had taken earlier, their footsteps echoing softly against the stone walls. As they reached the end of the corridor, Hermione stopped abruptly, glancing around in both directions.

“We’ve lost him, Neville!” she said frantically. “Professor Snape’s gone—where could he have gone?”

Neville shrugged, unconcerned. “I don’t know. He’s probably long gone by now.”

Hermione bit her lip, her eyes darting nervously down the empty hallway. “What should we do? Harry and Ron are going to be furious with us.”

Neville rolled his eyes. “There’s no point looking for him,” he said. “Snape’s not going just to stroll back this way. Let’s head back to the third floor and see if Harry and Ron are still there.”

Hermione nodded reluctantly, and they hurried off toward the third floor. When they arrived, the corridor near the trapdoor was eerily silent and completely empty—there was no sign of Harry or Ron.

“They’re not here,” Hermione said worriedly, scanning the area. “Where could they be? They said they’d stand guard here.”

Neville shrugged again, glancing around but finding nothing unusual. “Maybe they went back to the common room,” he suggested. “They might’ve decided waiting here wasn’t worth it.”

Hermione frowned, clearly not satisfied with that answer. “But they wouldn’t just leave without telling us…”

Neville sighed. “They’ll turn up, Hermione. Let’s just head back and see if we can find them.”

Hermione hesitated, glancing once more down the empty corridor, before nodding. “All right,” she said quietly. Together, they turned and began making their way back toward Gryffindor Tower

They made their way back to the Gryffindor common room in silence. As they stepped through the portrait hole, they immediately spotted Harry and Ron sitting by the fireplace. The warm glow of the flames highlighted their tense expressions as they looked up.

Harry’s eyes narrowed. “What are you two doing here? Where’s Snape?”

Neville shrugged. “We lost him.”

“You lost him?” Ron exclaimed, his voice rising. “How could you just lose him? Weren’t you supposed to be tailing him?”

“we're sorry, Harry!” Hermione said quickly, looking distressed. “Snape came out and asked us what we were doing, so we said we were waiting for Professor Flitwick. He went to fetch him, and by the time we were done talking with Flitwick, Snape was gone. We don’t know where he went.”

Neville, looking annoyed, crossed his arms. “What did you expect, Harry? We’re not ninjas who can just blend into the shadows and go unnoticed by someone like Snape. If you wanted us to pull that off, you should’ve at least lent us the Invisibility Cloak.”

Harry frowned, but before he could respond, Neville added, “What are you two doing here anyway? Weren’t you both supposed to be on the third floor?”

Ron scowled. “We were almost caught by Professor Sprout. She shooed us away and told us to get back to the common room.”

“Well, that’s it then, isn’t it?” Harry said, his tone sharp with frustration. He stood abruptly, pacing in front of the fireplace. “I’m going out there tonight, and I’m going to try to get to the Stone first.”

“You’re mad!” Ron said, staring at him like he’d grown a second head.

“You can’t!” Hermione said, her voice a mix of panic and disbelief. “You’ll be expelled!”

“SO WHAT?” Harry shouted, his voice echoing through the nearly empty common room. “Don’t you understand? If Snape gets hold of the Stone, Voldemort’s coming back! Haven’t you heard what it was like when he was trying to take over? There won’t be any Hogwarts to get expelled from! He’ll flatten it—or turn it into a school for the Dark Arts! Losing points doesn’t matter anymore, can’t you see?

“Do you think he’ll leave you and your families alone if Gryffindor wins the House Cup? If I get caught before I can get to the Stone, well... I’ll just have to go back to the Dursleys and wait for Voldemort to find me there. It’s only dying a bit later than I would’ve anyway because I’m never going over to the Dark Side! I’m going through that trapdoor tonight, and nothing you three say is going to stop me! Voldemort killed my parents, remember?”

He glared at them, his chest heaving with frustration.

Neville rolled his eyes, crossing his arms. He fought the urge to snort aloud at Harry’s dramatic declaration. 'The Stone’s probably a fake,' he thought, 'and even if it’s real, the Elixir of Life doesn’t bring people back from the dead. It just extends their life while leaving their bodies frail and weak.'

“You’re right, Harry,” Hermione said quietly, her voice almost trembling. Her agreement surprised harry, who blinked at her.

“I’ll use the Invisibility Cloak,” Harry said quickly, seizing on the moment. “It’s just lucky I got it back.”

“But will it cover all four of us?” Ron asked, frowning.

“All—all four of us?” Harry asked, his eyes widening.

Neville snorted, his tone dry. “You’d get yourself killed if we let you go alone.”

“Oh, come off it,” said Ron, rolling his eyes. “You don’t think we’d let you go alone, do you?”

“Of course not,” Hermione added briskly, her usual practical tone returning. “How do you think you’d get to the Stone without us? I’d better go and look through my books—there might be something useful.”

Harry hesitated, his determination faltering slightly. “But if we get caught, you three will be expelled, too,” he said, looking at them with concern.

Neville shook his head, annoyed. ‘Yeah, like Dumbledore’s going to expel you,’ rolling his eyes. ‘I’m afraid you’re the center of his plans, Harry, so don’t worry about that, And as for us, he probably wants his golden boy to have a few friends who can help.’

Neville sighed, leaning back against the armchair and rubbing his temple. “Anyway, Hogwarts isn’t the only magical school in the world. If we get expelled, we’ll just have to apply somewhere else. I’ve heard there’s a school in France.”

Ron looked at Neville like he’d grown a second head. “You’re joking,” he said flatly.

Neville shrugged. “I’m not. It’s called Beauxbatons. There’s another one in Eastern Europe somewhere—Durmstrang, I think? Hogwarts isn’t the be-all and end-all of magical education, you know.”

Hermione looked thoughtful, but Harry still looked unconvinced. “We’re not getting expelled,” she said firmly. “We’re going to stop Snape, or whoever it is, from getting the Stone.”

Neville sighed again, running a hand through his hair. ‘This is going to end badly,’ he thought. “Fine,” he said aloud,

Kaito Akaden Chapter 150

Kaito Akaden Chapter 150

After a moment, Hotaru glanced at Kaito hesitantly. "I don’t mean to pry, but… what was that back there with Jiraiya-sama? You seemed really angry at him, Kai-kun."

Kaito shrugged as if it didn’t matter, though the edge in his voice said otherwise. "Oh, that? It’s nothing. I just caught him spying on you guys the other day."

Hotaru blinked in surprise. "Spying?"

"Yeah," Kaito said, taking a bite of his dango. "And then there’s the other thing. He’s supposed to be Naruto’s godfather, but he hasn’t visited Naruto. Not even once. If Mom and I weren’t around, I can’t shake the feeling Naruto would’ve been abandoned by him—and worse, the Third might’ve brainwashed him into being Konoha’s weapon. You know what I mean?"

Hotaru’s expression softened, her steps slowing. "Oh," she said quietly, her voice barely above a whisper. She didn’t know what to say after hearing that, so she simply walked beside him in silence.

The two continued their way back to the Hyuga compound, the mood much quieter now, the cheerful bustle of the village fading into the background.

…

Kaito sat on the porch of his family’s house early in the morning, fastening the straps of his sandals. Karin stood beside him, already wearing her own. She wore black pants, a red long-sleeved shirt, and her usual glasses. Her eyes were full of curiosity, and she kept glancing at Kaito as if she had something on her mind.

“So, Kai-nii,” Karin said, breaking the silence.

Kaito hummed and looked at Karin. “Yeah?” he asked as he stood up and adjusted the straps of his bag.

“How long will you be gone on this mission?” she asked, kicking some dirt off to the side.

Kaito let out a small sigh. “I’m not sure, Karin. It might be a week, or it might be a few months. It really depends on how things go,” he explained, adjusting the strap of his bag. “Hopefully quick, ya know.”

He then asked, “By the way, how’s your Water Nature Transformation training coming along?”

Karin’s face twisted with frustration. “I still can’t do it,” she admitted. “Turning my chakra into water… I just can’t get the hang of it yet.”

Kaito offered her a reassuring smile and gently ruffled her hair. “Don’t worry. It takes time. Nature transformations aren’t usually taught until someone becomes a genin. You’re working on it earlier than most, so it’ll naturally be hard. I’m sure you’ll get it soon, Karin.”

Karin’s cheeks turned a little pink at his encouragement, but she looked grateful. Kaito took a bite of a half-finished sandwich from one of his seals. He was about to say something else when they heard Naruto’s voice coming from inside the house. The door slid open, and Naruto walked out looking annoyed. He wore his usual orange-and-blue outfit and rubbed the back of his neck.

“Mom, why do I have to go to the Academy today?” Naruto whined, stepping onto the porch with a deep frown. “It’s so boring. Iruka-sensei isn’t teaching us anything new, ya know. I learn more at home anyway.”

Behind him, Kushina emerged and locked the door to the house. She wore a simple white T-shirt and a long skirt with red and black patterns, a small handbag over her shoulder. She gave Naruto a stern look. “You’re going, and that’s final, Naru-chan,” she said, her tone leaving no room for argument. “Even if it’s not super challenging, you still need to have a normal life, make friends, and learn the basics, ya know. Look at Karin-chan. She’s not complaining, is she?”

Naruto scrunched up his nose. “She doesn’t get bored listening to those boring lectures.”

Kushina pressed her lips together and set one hand on her hip. “If you’re not feeling challenged at the Academy, then don’t worry. I’ll just make your afternoon training sessions harder from now on.”

Naruto’s eyes went wide with alarm at the thought. He swallowed hard. “T-that’s fine,” he mumbled, seeing the gleam in Kushina’s eyes.

Kushina nodded with satisfaction. “Good. Then let’s get going.”

She motioned for them all to set out. Karin, Kaito, and Naruto followed her down the path from the house, heading toward the Academy.

As they made their way through the village streets, they soon came across Hotaru walking side by side with Neji and Hinata.

Naruto perked up the moment he saw them. “Yo, Hinata! Neji! Hotaru-nee! How’re you doing?” he called out, waving with his usual big grin.

Hotaru, Hinata, and Neji turned around. Hotaru’s eyes lit up, and she returned the wave. “Good morning, Lady Kushina, Kai-kun, Naruto-kun, Karin-chan,” she said politely.

Kushina smiled back, greeting them all. “Morning, you three.”

Hinata gave a small wave, her cheeks tinged pink. “G-Good morning,” she said softly.

Neji gave a polite nod. “Good morning, Lady Kushina, Kaito-san, Naruto, Karin.”

“Yo,” Kaito said, giving them a lazy wave while munching on the last of his sandwich.

Soon, their group merged with Hotaru, Neji, and Hinata, walking together toward the Academy.

Kushina began talking quietly with Hotaru about something, though the occasional giggle from his mother made Kaito raise an eyebrow at them.

Meanwhile, Naruto pestered Neji about a sparring match, and Karin chatted quietly with Hinata about Academy life. As they walked, Kaito noticed that Hinata kept sneaking glances his way, her cheeks pink. But every time he caught her, she would turn bright red and look away.

Finally, he couldn’t hold back a teasing grin. “Hey, Hinata-chan. You need help with anything?” he asked, raising a brow, genuinely curious.

Hinata’s face turned an even deeper shade of red. She blurted, “G-good morning, Kaito-senpai,” then quickly ducked behind Karin, too shy to say more.

Kaito shrugged, amused, and went back to finishing his food. “Guess that’s all I’m getting, huh?” he muttered, though he didn’t seem upset.

Soon, they reached the Academy’s entrance. The schoolyard was filled with students chatting and laughing before class. Naruto, Karin, Neji, and Hinata each said their goodbyes and ran off to join the rest of the kids. The adults stayed outside for a moment, watching them file into the building.

Leaving the Academy grounds, Kushina followed Kaito and Hotaru toward the village gates. The morning sun was climbing higher, and the streets were getting busier with villagers shopping or heading to work.

They arrived at Konoha’s main gates and spotted Kakashi leaning against a tree. His lower face was covered by his mask, and he wore his standard shinobi gear. He held a small orange book in one hand but wasn’t really reading it. He looked up as they approached. Seeing Kushina, he quickly hid his Icha Icha novel, not wanting her to beat him up for reading it.

As they neared, Kushina waved enthusiastically. “Good, you’re early today.”

Kakashi scratched the back of his head and laughed nervously. “I took your warning seriously,” he said, sweating a little.

Kushina grinned, took out a sealing scroll, and handed it to him. “Here you go, Kakashi. I packed lunches for all three of you—plus some snacks. You’ll probably need them on a long trip. Make sure you all eat well, and don’t skip meals.” She looked at all of them in turn.

Kakashi took the bag gratefully. “Thanks, Kushina-nee.”

Kaito raised a hand. “Yo,” he greeted casually, bumping fists with Kakashi in a laid-back way.

Kakashi returned the gesture. “Yo,” he replied, his eye curving in what might have been a smile. “Ready for this mission?”

Hotaru bowed politely to Kakashi, though her cheeks were a bit pink. “Good morning, Captain Kakashi,” she said. “I’m looking forward to working with you.”

Kakashi waved a hand dismissively. “No need to be so formal, Hotaru. Just Kakashi is fine.”

Hotaru nodded. “Right. Kakashi-senpai.”

Grinning mischievously, Kushina sidled closer to Kakashi and teased, “Just don’t go around breaking some poor girl’s heart in the Land of Water, ya know?”

Kakashi rubbed the back of his neck, letting out a sheepish laugh. “I’ll keep that in mind.”

Kushina then turned to Kaito and Hotaru with a playful smile. “And Kakashi, make sure these two don’t do anything… funny while they’re on the mission, okay?” She winked.

“Mom,” Kaito groaned, scratching his head awkwardly, while Hotaru turned bright red, clearly embarrassed. “M-Ma’am!” Hotaru stammered.

Just then, a new voice rang out. “Are you already teasing them again so early in the morning, Kushina?”

They all turned to see Tsunade and Shizune walking up. Tsunade wore her Hokage robes, though she looked more relaxed than usual. Shizune walked behind her, holding Tonton in her arms.

Kushina pouted. “Tsuna-nee, you’re no fun, ya know. Plus, I won’t be able to see them for a while, so I’ll take my chance, ya know.” Then, raising an eyebrow, she asked, “What are you doing here anyway? Come to see them off?”

Tsunade grinned. “Any excuse to get away from my paperwork for a minute,” she said, stepping closer to the group. Kaito saluted her lazily.

“Good morning, Lady Tsunade. Good morning, Shizune-san,” Kaito greeted.

Hotaru bowed. “Good morning, Lady Hokage.”

Shizune waved politely. “Good morning, everyone.”

Kushina hugged both Kaito and Hotaru and said, “Stay safe out there, both of you, and come back as soon as possible, ya know.” Then she glanced at Kakashi. “You too, Kakashi.”

All three of them nodded. Kaito grinned. “Yeah, we’ll be back in no time, ya know.”

They walked toward the village’s main gates. Suddenly, a loud poof of white smoke burst in front of them, startling a few villagers. Kaito’s hand twitched, and he rubbed the bridge of his nose, thinking, Ugh. I can already tell who this is.

As the smoke cleared, Jiraiya appeared, striking a dramatic pose atop a human-sized toad. The toad itself seemed bored. Jiraiya raised a hand and shouted, “Listen up and take a good look! Behold the legendary ninja—Jiraiya, the Toad Sage!”

He hopped a few times in a showy manner before striking a final pose, expecting applause. But the rest of the group only stared at him with deadpan expressions. Somewhere in the distance, a cricket chirped, making the moment even more awkward.

Unfazed, Jiraiya jumped off the toad and landed in front of them. The toad vanished in another puff of smoke. Before Jiraiya could say anything else, Kushina grabbed his ear, yanking him closer with surprising force.

“Where have you been, you old perv?!” Kushina shouted, making Jiraiya cringe. “Why haven’t you visited Naruto yet? You’re his godfather, remember? And what could possibly be so important that you’d skip meeting your godson?”

Jiraiya cowered under her fiery glare. “O-ouch, okay, okay! I’m sorry!” he whined, trying to pry her hand away. “I was going to—I just thought I’d wait until Naruto was older. Then I’d train him—”

Kushina smacked him on the head. “That’s not good enough. You’re meeting him today. Got that? You’ve been in the village for over a week, and you still haven’t said hi to him.” Her eyes blazed with annoyance.

Tsunade sighed, rubbing the bridge of her nose. She glanced at Kakashi, Kaito, and Hotaru. “Alright, you three,” she said, ignoring Jiraiya’s scuffle with Kushina for the moment. “You know your mission details. Good luck. And please try to keep a low profile in the Land of Water.”

All three answered in unison, “Hai, Hokage-sama!”

They turned to leave, stepping onto the path that stretched beyond Konoha’s gates. But Jiraiya suddenly yelled, “Wait, hold on!” He managed to slip out of Kushina’s grip for a second. “I’m going with them,” he declared, puffing out his chest.

Everyone paused, turning to stare at him. Kaito snorted. “There’s no need. You’ll just slow us down, old man,” he said bluntly. “Plus, you’re terrible at keeping a low profile. If you come along, you’ll probably end up causing the Fourth Shinobi War by spying on the Mizukage’s wife or the Daimyō’s daughter or something.”

Jiraiya face-planted onto the road in comedic despair. “Has my reputation really gotten that bad?” he mumbled into the dirt.

Tsunade folded her arms. “Jiraiya, why do you even want to go with them?”

Jiraiya jumped up, dusting himself off. “Because I can’t let these youngsters handle such a dangerous mission on their own! I, the Toad Sage of Mount Myōboku—” He launched into a long-winded monologue about his skills, his honor, and how he needed to protect the village. But halfway through his speech, he finally glanced back at Kaito, Kakashi, and Hotaru… and noticed they were gone.

Jiraiya blinked, looking bewildered. “H-hey, where’d they go?”

Kushina pointed down the road. “They left a while ago,” she said dryly.

“Wha—? Why didn’t anyone stop them?” Jiraiya asked, confused.

Tsunade gave him a flat look, tapping her foot. “Because I agree with Kaito. I can’t send you to the Land of Water. You might cause an international crisis with your peeping. We’re trying to keep the peace, remember?”

Jiraiya looked crestfallen. But before he could argue further, Kushina grabbed him by the ear again, pulling him in close. “And you’re not running off, either,” she growled. “You’re going to meet Naruto today, like I said.”

Jiraiya yelped in pain, stumbling as Kushina dragged him along. “O-ow, Kushina, let go! Fine, fine—I’ll meet him, I promise!”

Tsunade shook her head, mildly amused, and motioned for Shizune to follow her back to the Hokage Tower. The morning bustle of Konoha continued around them as Kushina marched off with Jiraiya in tow, ignoring his protests. Villagers who passed by gave them curious looks but didn’t dare to intervene. Everyone knew Kushina had a fiery temper, and Jiraiya was… well, Jiraiya.

Hogwarts: Neville’s Insert Chapter 31

Hogwarts: Neville’s Insert Chapter 31

Hermione frowned. “Well, like I said, as long as Dumbledore’s here, surely the Stone’s safe. He’s the only one You-Know-Who was ever afraid of.”

At that moment, Neville remembered something else: his wand. He glanced at the small table beside the bed, frowning when he didn’t see it. “My wand,” he asked, worry creeping into his voice. “Where’s my wand?”

Hermione brightened. “Oh! I almost forgot.” She reached into the pocket of her robes and pulled out Neville’s wand, extending it toward him. “Harry picked it up after you dropped it in the forest. He gave it to me yesterday. I kept it safe.”

Harry nodded. “It was lying on the ground, near where you got hit by that curse,” he said. “Didn’t want it left there.”

Relieved, Neville took it from Hermione’s hand, feeling a gentle hum of familiar magic tingle against his palm. He let out a small sigh. “Thanks, you two,” he said, giving them both a grateful nod. “I thought I might have lost it forever.”

….

Neville, Hermione, Harry, and Ron stepped out of the castle and onto the sunny grounds. The warmth of the late spring sun and the light breeze made the end-of-term atmosphere feel almost festive. Students crowded the pathways, their voices loud and carefree as they made their way to the lake or other favorite spots to enjoy the afternoon.

Neville had his bag slung over his shoulder, his right hand gripping the strap while his left rested casually in his pocket as they descended the stone stairs.

“That was far easier than I thought it would be,” Hermione said, walking beside him. Her voice was light with relief as she clutched a stack of exam papers. “I needn’t have learned about the 1637 Werewolf Code of Conduct or the uprising of Elfric the Eager.”

Neville chuckled softly. “Even if you had known, you’d still have memorized it, Hermione.”

Hermione ignored the remark, flipping through the exam sheets in her hands. She always liked to review their answers after the fact, double-checking what they’d gotten right—or wrong. Neville didn’t mind; it was just Hermione being Hermione.

The group wandered down to the lake, where the water sparkled under the bright sunlight. Finding a shady spot beneath a large tree, they all flopped down on the grass. Neville let out a long sigh as he leaned back against the trunk, stretching his legs out in front of him.

“Well,” he said, “I’m just glad it’s done and over. Exams, everything.”

It had been a week since the incident in the Forbidden Forest. Neville had been discharged from the hospital wing two days afterward, though some lingering effects of the curse still remained. His fingers twitched occasionally, and Madam Pomfrey had reassured him it was normal and would fade in a few days.

Hagrid had visited him during his stay in the hospital wing, apologizing profusely for what had occurred. “I’m sorry, Neville,” he’d said, his voice thick with guilt. “I should’ve kept yeh outta there. Should’ve made sure nothin’ happened ter yeh.” He’d brought Neville a small potted plant as a gift, one that thrived in low light and smelled faintly of peppermint.

The school, of course, was abuzz with rumors about what had happened in the forest, though the specifics remained vague. The most popular story was that Neville had fainted after seeing something terrifying, and Neville didn’t bother correcting them.

What bothered Neville most, though, was something more subtle. When checking on him, Madam Pomfrey had referred to the curse that hit him as a “dark curse.” When Neville had asked her directly which curse had been used on him, she had only told him that it was a “dark curse,” without naming it.

When he’d asked Harry, he’d gotten a similar answer. “Firenze said it was a dark curse,” Harry told him, looking uncertain. “He didn’t call it anything specific.”

It was as though everyone had forgotten—or been made to forget—the exact nature of the curse. Neville’s suspicions turned to Dumbledore. Of course, he thought grimly, Dumbledore wouldn’t want anyone digging too deeply into what happened. A Cruciatus Curse hitting a student would lead to an investigation, and that would lead back to him and his decision to hide the Sorcerer’s Stone in Hogwarts. It wasn’t difficult to imagine the Headmaster quietly memory-charming everyone involved to protect the school—and himself.

Meanwhile, Harry had been plagued by nightmares ever since the forest encounter. Neville had noticed the dark circles under his eyes and how he would frequently rub his forehead. When Neville asked about it, Harry confided that his scar had been hurting more often since the night they saw the hooded figure.

On a brighter note, McGonagall’s demeanor had softened toward him and Harry. She was no longer as sharp or demanding as she had been after they were caught wandering the corridors after curfew. Neville suspected guilt weighed on her—it was she who had assigned them that detention, after all. Even if it had been Dumbledore’s idea, McGonagall clearly felt responsible, and her kindness now seemed an attempt to make amends.

Neville shook the thought from his mind. There was no point in dwelling on it now. He glanced around at his friends. Ron was lying on his back, staring up at the sky and talking lazily about their summer plans. Harry was skipping stones across the lake, and Hermione, of course, was still going through their exam papers, muttering about missed questions.

“No more studying,” Ron sighed happily, tilting his face up to the sun. “You could look more cheerful, Harry. We’ve got a week before we find out how badly we’ve done—no need to worry yet.”

Harry threw another stone into the lake and then sat cross-legged beside Ron, rubbing his forehead again. His expression darkened as he muttered, “I wish I knew what this means. My scar keeps hurting—it’s happened before, but never as often as this.”

“Go to Madam Pomfrey,” Hermione suggested, her tone brisk.

“I’m not ill,” Harry snapped, shaking his head. “I think it’s a warning. It means danger’s coming.”

Ron groaned again, flopping onto his back. “Can we just have one day without talking about curses, dark magic, or stones?” He waved a hand dismissively. “Relax, Harry. Hermione’s right—the Stone’s safe as long as Dumbledore’s around. Anyway, we’ve never had any proof Snape figured out how to get past Fluffy. He nearly had his leg ripped off once—he’s not going to try again anytime soon. And Neville will play Quidditch for England before Hagrid lets Dumbledore down.”

Neville, plucking a few blades of grass, rolled them between his fingers. “I’m not so sure about that,” he said casually. “Hagrid does have a loose mouth. After all, he’s the one who gave us most of the information about the Stone so far.”

He shrugged, glancing sidelong at Harry.

Harry’s eyes widened as the implications of Neville’s words hit him. Suddenly, he leapt to his feet, his face pale.

“Where’re you going?” Ron asked sleepily, squinting up at Harry.

“I’ve just thought of something,” Harry said, his voice urgent. “We’ve got to go and see Hagrid. Now.” Without waiting for a response, he took off running.

Neville groaned, pushing himself to his feet. “Oh, here we go again,” he muttered, jogging after Harry. Hermione and Ron scrambled to follow, trying to keep up with Harry’s frantic pace.

“Why?” panted Hermione, struggling to match his speed.

“Don’t you think it’s a bit odd,” Harry said, scrambling up the grassy slope, “that what Hagrid wants more than anything in the world is a dragon, and then a stranger turns up who just happens to have an egg in his pocket? How many people walk around with dragon eggs when it’s against wizarding law? Lucky they found Hagrid, don’t you think? Why didn’t I see it before?”

“What are you talking about?” Ron asked, completely baffled.

Neville sighed and cut in, his tone dry. “What Harry’s saying is that Hagrid getting the dragon egg wasn’t a coincidence. That stranger probably used it to get Hagrid to talk. And Hagrid might’ve already let slip how to get past Fluffy.”

Ron’s eyes widened as he turned to Neville. “You already knew Hagrid might’ve let something slip about Fluffy? Why didn’t you tell us?”

Neville raised an eyebrow at him. “Of course I didn’t tell you. You’d have freaked out—just like you’re doing now. Besides,” he added with a shrug, “I’ve been saying it all along—the Stone is probably a fake.”

Ron opened his mouth to retort, but Harry wasn’t listening. He was already sprinting toward Hagrid’s hut, the others doing their best to keep up.

As they crossed the grounds, the forest loomed in the distance, its dark edges contrasting with the bright sunlight. Hagrid was sitting in an armchair outside his house, his trousers and sleeves rolled up as he shelled peas into a large bowl.

“Hullo,” Hagrid greeted them with a smile, looking up from his work. “Finished yer exams? Got time fer a drink?”

“Yeah, sure thing, Hagrid,” Neville said casually, but Harry cut him off, his urgency overriding any sense of politeness.

“No, we’re in a hurry. Hagrid, I’ve got to ask you something,” Harry said, stepping closer. “You know that night you won Norbert? What did the stranger you were playing cards with look like?”

Hagrid frowned, thinking. “Dunno,” he said with a shrug. “He wouldn’ take his cloak off.” He noticed the stunned looks on their faces and raised his eyebrows. “It’s not that unusual. Yeh get a lot o’ funny folk in the Hog’s Head—that’s the pub down in the village. Mighta bin a dragon dealer, mightn’t he? I never saw his face; he kept his hood up the whole time.”

Harry sank down next to Hagrid’s bowl of peas, his expression tense. “What did you talk to him about, Hagrid? Did you mention Hogwarts at all?”

Hagrid frowned again, clearly trying to recall. “Mighta come up,” he said slowly. “Yeah… he asked what I did, an’ I told him I was gamekeeper here. He asked a bit about the sorta creatures I look after… so I told him… an’ I said what I’d always really wanted was a dragon. Then… I can’ remember too well, ’cause he kept buyin’ me drinks… Let’s see… yeah, then he said he had the dragon egg an’ we could play cards fer it if I wanted. But he had ter be sure I could handle it, he didn’ want it ter go ter any old home. So I told him, after Fluffy, a dragon would be easy.”

Harry froze. “And did he—did he seem interested in Fluffy?” he asked, struggling to keep his voice steady.

“Well—yeah—how many three-headed dogs d’yeh meet, even around Hogwarts?” Hagrid replied, looking confused at the question. “So I told him, Fluffy’s a piece o’ cake if yeh know how to calm him down. Jus’ play him a bit o’ music, an’ he’ll go straight off ter sleep—”

Hagrid suddenly froze, his face pale as realization dawned on him. “I shouldn’ta told yeh that!” he blurted out, looking horrified. “Forget I said it! Hey—where’re yeh goin’?”

But Harry was already running back toward the castle, his face set with determination. Neville groaned and pushed himself up, muttering, “Always running,” as he jogged after Harry, with Hermione and Ron close behind.

None of them spoke as they raced into the Entrance Hall, the cool, dim interior a sharp contrast to the sunny grounds they’d just left. Harry skidded to a stop and turned to the others, his voice urgent. “We’ve got to go to Dumbledore. Hagrid told that stranger how to get past Fluffy, and it was either Snape or Voldemort under that cloak. It must’ve been easy, once they’d gotten Hagrid drunk. I just hope Dumbledore believes us. Firenze might back us up—if Bane doesn’t stop him.”

Harry looked around, his urgency growing. “Where’s Dumbledore’s office?”

Hermione’s gaze flicked to Neville. “Neville, you’ve been to Dumbledore’s office, haven’t you?”

Neville sighed, nodding reluctantly. “Yeah. It’s on the seventh floor behind the gargoyle statue,” he said, already bracing himself for the inevitable sprint up seven flights of stairs.

“Then come on!” Harry said, taking off toward the nearest staircase.

Neville groaned, muttering under his breath as he jogged after Harry. “I should’ve stayed by the lake.” But before they could make it far, a sharp voice rang out across the hall.

“What are you four doing inside?” It was Professor McGonagall, balancing a large pile of books in her arms.

“We want to see Professor Dumbledore,” Hermione said bravely, stepping forward.

“See Professor Dumbledore?” Professor McGonagall repeated, her tone laced with suspicion. “Why?”

Harry swallowed hard. Now what? “It’s… sort of secret,” he stammered, immediately regretting his choice of words.

Professor McGonagall’s expression turned colder. “Professor Dumbledore left ten minutes ago,” she said curtly. “He received an urgent owl from the Ministry of Magic and flew off for London at once.”

“He’s gone?” Harry asked frantically. “Now?”

“Professor Dumbledore is a very important wizard, Mr. Potter,” she said sharply. “He has many demands on his time—”

“But this is important,” Ron interrupted, trying to reason with her.

Neville remained at the back of the group, staying silent as he watched the exchange unfold.

“Something you have to say is more important than the Ministry of Magic, Potter?” McGonagall said, her tone clipped and her expression stern.

Harry, throwing caution to the wind, blurted, “Professor—it’s about the—”

But before he could finish, Neville stepped forward and cut him off. “Harry would like to know if he could stay at Hogwarts for the holiday, Professor.”

Harry turned to Neville, his eyes wide with shock, but Neville ignored him and pressed on. “You see, Professor, Harry’s relatives aren’t exactly kind to him. So, he wanted to know if the Headmaster would allow him to stay for the summer break.”

Ron and Hermione looked just as stunned as Harry, but they held their tongues.

Whatever McGonagall had been expecting, it wasn’t that. Her stern expression softened, her lips pressing together in a thoughtful line. “I see,” she said after a pause. “Normally, students aren’t allowed to stay in the castle during the summer holiday, but there have been exceptions made before. Professor Dumbledore will be back tomorrow. I’ll speak with him when he returns and see if something can be arranged.”

Harry tried to protest, starting with, “But Professor—”

Neville cut him off again. “Thank you, Professor. We really appreciate your help.”

McGonagall’s eyes narrowed slightly as she looked between them, her suspicion returning. “If that’s all, I suggest you all go back outside and enjoy the sunshine,” she said, shooing them off with a wave of her hand before heading down the corridor with her books.

Once she was out of earshot, Harry spun toward Neville, furious. “What was that?” he whisper-shouted. “We could’ve told her about the Stone, about Hagrid letting slip how to get past Fluffy—”

Neville met Harry’s glare with a calm, steady gaze. “And you really think she’d just believe you?” he asked, raising an eyebrow. “You think it’s that simple?”

Harry opened his mouth, but Neville continued before he could argue. “McGonagall just started being less cold toward us after the whole Norbert incident. You want to throw that progress away so soon? You think she’ll listen to first-years rambling about the Stone? How are you going to explain how we even know about it in the first place, huh? Say that Hagrid told us? Then wouldn’t Hagrid get into trouble for that?”

Neville already knew that telling McGonagall about the Stone wouldn’t do any good, since it was all part of Dumbledore’s plan. Aware of what was likely to happen, he didn’t want to be on bad terms with McGonagall. He still hoped to get some tips on Transfiguration for next year’s curriculum—and he wasn’t going to let Harry ruin that for him.

Harry faltered, his anger fading into uncertainty. Hermione and Ron exchanged glances but said nothing, letting Neville’s words sink in.

After a tense pause, Harry sighed. “Fine. But we’re running out of time. What are we supposed to do now? Snape’s going through the trapdoor tonight. He’s found out everything he needs, and now he’s got Dumbledore out of the way. He sent that note—I bet the Ministry of Magic is going to get a real shock when Dumbledore turns up.”

Neville rolled his eyes but said nothing, thinking to himself, 'Yeah, right. If he wanted to go to the Ministry, it would only have taken a few seconds with the Floo. The old bastard is probably still in the castle.'

“But what can we—” Hermione started, but her words caught in her throat as Harry and Ron froze, their eyes widening. Neville turned to see what had startled them.

Snape was standing there, his dark robes billowing slightly, his expression unreadable. “Good afternoon,” he said smoothly, his voice dripping with sarcasm.

They stared at him, frozen like deer caught in wandlight.

“You shouldn’t be inside on a day like this,” Snape added, a twisted smile tugging at the corners of his mouth. “People might think you’re up to something.”

“We were—” Harry began, scrambling for an excuse but clearly at a loss for words.

“You’d best be more careful,” Snape interrupted. “Hanging around like this gives the wrong impression. And Gryffindor can’t afford to lose any more points, can it?”

Neville thought, 'Yeah, he isn't helping himself right now. his just making himself look like the one after the Stone.'  Then he wondered, 'Is he in on Dumbledore’s plans as well? That would explain why Snape is taunting us right now.'

Harry flushed, his face turning as red as a Gryffindor banner. The group turned to head outside, but Snape’s voice stopped them in their tracks.

“Be warned, Potter, Longbottom—any more nighttime wanderings, and I will personally ensure you’re expelled. Good day to you.”

With a dramatic swirl of his robes, Snape strode off toward the staffroom, leaving the four of them standing in tense silence.

Once they were outside on the stone steps, Harry turned to the others, his voice low and urgent. “Right, here’s what we’ve got to do. One of us has to keep an eye on Snape—wait outside the staffroom and follow him if he leaves. Hermione, you’d better do that.”

“Why me?” Hermione asked, looking slightly put out.

“It’s obvious,” Ron said with a smirk. “You can pretend to be waiting for Professor Flitwick. You know…” He put on a high, mockingly sweet voice, “‘Oh, Professor Flitwick, I’m so worried, I think I got question fourteen b wrong!’”

“Oh, shut up, Ron,” Hermione snapped, though her cheeks turned slightly pink. “Fine. I’ll do it.”

Neville sighed, running a hand through his hair. “I’ll go with Hermione,” he said reluctantly. He didn’t want to interfere with Dumbledore’s plan—he knew better than that. Dumbledore had already tried to erase his memories once, and Neville wasn’t eager to give him another reason to do so. For now, he would have to play along.

Kaito Akaden Chapter 149

Kaito Akaden Chapter 149

Gamamaru nodded again. “Hmm, ah yes, there is such a seal. I used it a long time ago. It should be in the archives if I remember correctly.” With that, he went back to sleep.

Fukasaku sighed, watching as the elder fell asleep just like that. “Well, lad, let’s go to the archives.”

…

Kaito snapped out of his thoughts as he landed next to the window of the Hokage’s office. He knocked on the window and opened it, poking his head inside. “You called for me, Lady Tsunade?”

Inside the office, Tsunade sat behind her desk, looking annoyed as Kaito entered through the window. “Can’t you use the door like a normal person?”

Kaito shrugged. “Well, it’s too much hassle. And who said I’m a normal person?” He glanced at the other occupants of the room.

…..

Kaito stepped into the office through the window and froze for a moment. Leaning casually against the wall near the window was Kakashi, dressed in his usual jonin attire from the Shippuden days. His signature orange Icha Icha book was open in one hand, his eyes lazily scanning the pages.

Looking up, Kakashi gave a small wave and said, "Yo," his visible eye creasing into a friendly smile.

Kaito nodded back and smiled. "Been a while, Kakashi." His gaze briefly lingered on the jonin's outfit, and a thought crossed his mind. So Tsunade took him out of the Anbu like I asked her to. Good.

Kaito turned his attention to the other person in the room—a tall man standing with his arms crossed and a grin plastered across his face. It was Jiraiya, casually positioned near Tsunade's desk.

"Hey there, kid!" Jiraiya greeted with a cheerful wave. "I heard you met the Great Elder Toad Sage."

Ignoring Jiraiya’s enthusiasm, Kaito shifted his focus to Tsunade, who was sitting at her desk buried in paperwork. His tone carried a trace of annoyance as he asked, "What's he doing here?"

Jiraiya’s grin faltered, and he faceplanted onto the floor with a loud thud. Getting up with a defeated sigh, he exclaimed, "Oh, come on, kid! I already said I was sorry! Cut me some slack!"

Kakashi raised an eyebrow at their interaction but remained silent, turning a page in his book.

Tsunade, now looking up from her work, gave Kaito a curious look. "You met with the Grand Elder of Mount Myoboku?"

Kaito shrugged nonchalantly. "I needed their help on a seal I’m working on. Speaking of which..." Reaching into his pouch, he pulled out a scroll and handed it to her. "Here."

Tsunade took the scroll, her brow furrowed slightly in confusion. "What’s this?"

Pointing to the scroll, Kaito explained, "It’s got ten copies of a variation of the seal I’m working on. It mimics my healing bite ability—not as powerful, though. It can heal minor wounds if my calculations are right. Haven’t tested it on a person yet, but I thought it might be useful for missions. If it’s mass-produced, it could reduce casualties."

Tsunade’s curiosity deepened as she unsealed the scroll, examining the intricate designs. "It mimics your healing bite, huh? That could be really useful. Does it only work with your chakra? And how does it activate?"

Kaito shook his head. "No, anyone can charge it up. It’s reusable, too—you just have to recharge the seal after each use. You place it on the person, activate it, and it works. From my tests on a fish, it heals wounds, but I haven’t tried it on anything fatal. Like I said, it’s not as strong as my ability—it’s more of a watered-down version. Figured you’d want to test it out."

Tsunade nodded thoughtfully, rolling the scroll back up. "Even a watered-down version could save lives on missions."

Jiraiya, who had been craning his neck to peer over Tsunade’s shoulder, finally spoke up. "Hey, is this the same seal you showed Pa and Ma?"

Kaito crossed his arms, ignoring Jiraiya entirely. He looked at Tsunade with clear annoyance. "So, why did you call me? I was busy working on something important," he said, his tone making it clear that Jiraiya’s presence wasn’t helping his mood.

Without looking up, Tsunade replied, still examining the seal scroll in her hands. "We’re waiting on your other teammate so I can debrief you."

Kaito sighed, already guessing where this was heading. Another mission, he thought, the frustration settling in his chest.

Jiraiya let out a long sigh, clearly disappointed at being ignored. "Look, kid," he said, his voice softer now. "I know I haven’t been there for you, Kushina, or Naruto. But there’s a reason. I’ve been tracking Orochimaru, and while doing so, I’ve come across rumors about a group—"

Kaito cut him off sharply. "They’re called the Akatsuki. Orochimaru was one of them, and they’re after the Tailed Beasts. Is that all?" His tone was lazy, dismissive even.

The nonchalant way Kaito talked about such dangerous information caught everyone’s attention. But Kaito wasn’t worried. He and his mother had reinforced Tsunade’s office with powerful privacy seals when she took office, ensuring no information could leak.

Kakashi’s visible eye turned serious. With a snap, he shut his book and looked directly at Kaito. "And... the masked man?" he asked, his voice low.

Kaito gave a small nod, glancing at Kakashi out of the corner of his eye. "Yeah."

Jiraiya’s jaw dropped. He stammered, "What—how do you… What?"

Tsunade let out a tired sigh and shot an annoyed look at Jiraiya. "We already know about the Akatsuki, Jiraiya. In fact, we’ve known for a while now. And yes, we also know Orochimaru was one of them. This is old news." She smirked slightly. "Did you think you were the only one with spies?"

Jiraiya gaped at her, stunned into silence for once. He opened his mouth to say something but couldn’t form the words.

Before the awkward silence could stretch, a knock came at the door. Tsunade straightened in her chair. "Come in," she called.

The door opened, and a young kunoichi with dark hair stepped inside. "Good afternoon, Lady Tsunade," Hotaru said with a polite bow. Her gaze flicked to Kaito, and she nodded. He gave her a brief nod in return.

Tsunade placed the scroll aside and clasped her hands together, leaning forward on her desk. "Right. Now that you’re all here," she began, her eyes scanning the room, "the three of you will be forming a three-man cell." She gestured toward Kakashi. "I’ve pulled Kakashi out of the Anbu to lead this team. You’ll be reporting directly to me."

Tsunade’s gaze sharpened as she focused on Kaito, Hotaru, and then Kakashi. "I’ll be placing you as team captain, Kakashi. Any objections?"

Kaito shrugged. "Yeah, I don’t mind."

Hotaru smiled politely and gave a small nod. "No objections from me, Lady Tsunade."

Tsunade nodded in approval. "Good. Now that’s out of the way…" She grabbed a scroll from her desk and tossed it toward Kakashi. He caught it effortlessly, immediately unfurling it to read. "I have a mission for the three of you."

Kakashi’s brow furrowed as his eye scanned the contents of the scroll. "Kiri?" he asked, glancing at Tsunade.

Tsunade leaned back in her chair, her expression serious. "Kiri’s been quiet for the past few months. Before that, they were harassing our borders, but now? Nothing. It’s too quiet. I want you three to head there and investigate what’s going on."

Kaito’s face didn’t betray any emotion, but his mind was already racing. Has the Bloodline Purge in Kiri already started? he wondered.

Jiraiya, who had finally composed himself after the earlier exchange, suddenly burst out, "Tsunade, you can’t be serious! You’re sending kids into Kiri? I get it if you’re sending Kakashi, but the other two are barely twelve!"

Kaito rolled his eyes and smirked. "One of those ‘kids’ almost killed you. If you hadn’t gone running back to your adoptive parent for help, it might’ve been a different story."

Jiraiya turned toward Kaito, clearly annoyed. "Kid, if I’d been serious, you wouldn’t have even injured me. And let me tell you, you wouldn’t stand a chance if I went into Sage Mode."

Tsunade groaned, rubbing her temples in frustration. "Enough, Jiraiya! These two are the best we’ve got. Kakashi is an experienced Anbu operative. They’ll learn from him. Besides," she added with a smirk, "Kaito knows the Hiraishin. If things get too intense, they can just teleport out."

Jiraiya opened his mouth to argue but froze when he noticed Kaito’s eyes were closed, his breathing steady and focused. The room grew tense as everyone watched Kaito, unsure of what he was doing. A minute later, he opened his eyes—and the air shifted.

Black sage markings now decorated Kaito’s face, and a faint, slimy substance was seeping from his skin. He looked directly at Jiraiya and said in a calm but pointed tone, "You’re not the only one who can use Senjutsu."

Kaito had been refining his Senjutsu every day for the past few weeks with Katsuyu’s guidance. His progress was impressive, but his limit was still short—two minutes of Sage Mode before he reverted back to his base form. It wasn’t perfect yet, but it was getting there.

Tsunade stared at him, visibly stunned. She hadn’t expected the brat to master it so quickly. "How the hell…?" she muttered under her breath.

Hotaru, on the other hand, was in complete awe. She knew how difficult Senjutsu was from the little Kaito had told her, and seeing him actually pull it off left her speechless.

Kakashi’s gaze lingered on Kaito, his expression unreadable. But then he murmured softly, almost to himself, "Sensei…"

“That’s… Sage Mode,” Jiraiya muttered, his face a mix of shock, irritation, and reluctant admiration. He crossed his arms and gave Kaito a grumpy look. "You learned Senjutsu from Katsuyu, didn’t you?"

Kaito released the nature energy he had gathered, the markings fading from his face. He shrugged, completely ignoring Jiraiya’s question. Instead, he turned to Tsunade. "So, about the mission. When do we leave?"

Tsunade blinked, snapping out of her thoughts. She cleared her throat, regaining her composure. "Right," she said, taking control of the conversation again. "Kakashi’s your captain, so I’ll let him handle the details. But I suggest you leave first thing tomorrow morning. Use today to prepare, gather what you need, and remember—stay discreet once you cross the sea."

Kakashi nodded. "Hai," he said simply, bowing slightly. "We’ll take our leave, Lady Tsunade."

Hotaru bowed as well, her tone polite. "Hai, Lady Tsunade."

Kaito followed them out of the Hokage’s office, his hands stuffed into his pockets. "So," he said casually as they walked, "meet at the main gate at 8?"

Kakashi nodded. "Yeah, sure. I’ll see you both there." He was about to leave when Kaito grabbed his arm to stop him.

"Hold up, Kakashi," Kaito said. "Mom’s been looking for you. She said she wanted to see you and asked me to bring you home if I ran into you."

Kakashi sighed heavily, his shoulders slumping a bit. "Can it wait?" he asked, clearly not thrilled at the idea.

Kaito smirked. "I could always bring her to you, you know."

Kakashi groaned and gave a small nod. "Fine. I’ll join you for dinner tonight," he muttered before disappearing in a blur, body-flickering away.

Kaito turned to Hotaru and tilted his head. "So," he said, "want to grab something to eat?"

Hotaru nodded with a smile. "Sure."

The two walked out of the Hokage building together and stopped by a dango stand, buying a few skewers before strolling down the busy streets of Konoha. The warm afternoon air was filled with the chatter of villagers and the occasional laughter of kids playing.

After a moment, Hotaru glanced at Kaito hesitantly. "I don’t mean to pry, but… what was that back there with Jiraiya-sama? You seemed really angry at him, Kai-kun."

Kaito shrugged as if it didn’t matter, though the edge in his voice said otherwise. "Oh, that? It’s nothing. I just caught him spying on you guys the other day."

Hotaru blinked in surprise. "Spying?"

"Yeah," Kaito said, taking a bite of his dango. "And then there’s the other thing. He’s supposed to be Naruto’s godfather, but he hasn’t visited Naruto. Not even once. If Mom and I weren’t around, I can’t shake the feeling Naruto would’ve been abandoned by him—and worse, the Third might’ve brainwashed him into being Konoha’s weapon. You know what I mean?"

Hotaru’s expression softened, her steps slowing. "Oh," she said quietly, her voice barely above a whisper. She didn’t know what to say after hearing that, so she simply walked beside him in silence.

The two continued their way back to the Hyuga compound, the mood much quieter now, the cheerful bustle of the village fading into the background.

Hogwarts: Neville’s Insert Chapter 30

Hogwarts: Neville’s InsertChapter 30

Hermione stood still, tears slipping down her cheeks. Ron stepped forward, placing a comforting hand on her shoulder. “He’ll be all right,” Ron muttered, though he looked shaken too. “He’s tough, Hermione.”

Taking a shaky breath, Hermione nodded and brushed away her tears. She slowly sank down onto the couch by the fire. “I’m sorry,” she whispered. “I just can’t believe this happened.”

“That’s not all,” Harry said, lowering his voice. “Firenze told me that the hooded man was Voldemort.”

Ron flinched. “Don’t say his name out loud, mate!”

Harry ignored him. “Don’t you get it? Snape is after the Stone for Voldemort. He attacked that unicorn to drink its blood…” Harry’s chest tightened at the memory.

Ron let out a low whistle, looking pale. “Blimey. So You-Know-Who is still alive, and Snape is after the Stone to help him?”

Harry nodded. “If Snape manages to steal the Stone, then…” He trailed off uneasily.

Hermione wiped her eyes, staring into the flickering flames. “But…Dumbledore is still here, right? He won’t let You-Know-Who get the Stone. Voldemort’s afraid of Dumbledore.”

….

Neville stirred in his bed, eyes flickering open to the muted light filtering through the edges of the drawn curtains around him. He blinked once, confusion flooding his mind. For a moment, he didn’t know where he was or why everything felt so achy. Then the memories came rushing back: the Forbidden Forest, the dead unicorn, Quirrell, and the searing pain of the Cruciatus Curse. Neville let out a shaky breath. He tried to sit up too quickly and groaned, his muscles protesting.

“Ugh,” he muttered under his breath, clenching his teeth as a throb pulsed down his legs and through his shoulders. His whole body felt like it had been trampled by a herd of hippogriffs. Neville let his head fall back onto the pillow, panting slightly from the effort. Curtains surrounded his bed, giving him a bit of privacy in what he realized was clearly the Hogwarts hospital wing. He could make out the sounds of students chatting beyond the room’s walls, though it was faint and muffled.

He swallowed, finding his throat dry and raw. The last thing he remembered was screaming at the top of his lungs when that curse hit. Neville shuddered at the memory of the agonizing pain that had ripped through his body. “Bloody hell,” he thought. “That bastard Quirrell used the torture curse on me. I’ll make sure he pays for that one day…”

His fingers dug into the bedsheets, and he stared up at the ceiling. That curse—he knew all about it from what had happened to his parents. They’d been tortured for hours by Death Eaters. It was the very reason they’d lost their minds and ended up in St. Mungo’s. Neville’s stomach twisted angrily at the thought. Quirrell had used that same Unforgivable Curse on him without hesitation, and if things had gone on any longer, who knew what sort of damage Neville would have suffered?

With a grunt, Neville tried again to sit up, although more carefully this time. Even that slight movement made him wince, and his arms shook from the effort. His vision wavered for a moment, and he needed a second to let everything settle.

He heard the swish of curtains being pulled back, followed by the soft click of shoes on the stone floor. Madam Pomfrey stepped inside his little enclosed space, her expression one of practiced sternness laced with genuine concern.

“Oh, you’re awake,” she said, in a brisk but not unkind voice. “Careful there, Mr. Longbottom, don’t go trying to hop out of bed just yet. You’ve had quite the night.” She set a tray of potions down on the small table beside him. “Drink this,” she said, handing him a goblet. “It’ll help with the soreness.”

Neville nodded, taking the goblet in unsteady hands. His fingers trembled, and it took all his concentration not to spill the potion. Slowly, he raised it to his mouth and sipped. The taste was bitter, and he had to fight the urge to gag. Still, he forced it down. Almost at once, a faint warmth spread through his limbs, easing the tight ache in his muscles.

Madam Pomfrey pressed her lips together as she watched him drink. Then she gave a small, exasperated sigh. “Honestly,” she muttered, shaking her head. “A detention that sends students into the Forbidden Forest in the middle of the night? Quite unthinkable. And now we have a student who’s been hit by the torture curse—of all curses. I sometimes wonder what’s become of Hogwarts these days.”

Neville swallowed the rest of the potion, feeling it settle uneasily in his stomach. “Thank you,” he rasped, grimacing at how weak his voice sounded. He cleared his throat, which stung horribly.

Madam Pomfrey nodded, carefully taking the goblet from him. “Lie back,” she said, gently guiding him down onto the pillows. “You’re lucky, Mr. Longbottom. The curse didn’t last very long. Still, you’ll be sore for a few days at least.” She placed a cool hand on his forehead, checking for fever. “Any lingering pain?” she asked, eyeing him closely. “Headaches? Spells of dizziness?”

Neville gave a tiny nod. “Yeah,” he said, his voice scratchy. “Everything hurts. Feels like I’ve been knocked about by a troll. And my throat—” He winced, remembering the screams he’d let out in the forest. “It’s so sore,” he croaked. “I can barely talk.”

Madam Pomfrey offered him a sympathetic look. “That’s quite normal, given the state you were in last night. Your body’s been through a shock, and your throat will feel raw from all that screaming.” She flicked her wand in a small, neat motion, conjuring a glass of water. “Here, sip this. Try not to speak too much if you can help it. It’ll only make your throat worse.”

Neville took the glass and sipped carefully. The cool water felt heavenly as it trickled down his throat, soothing some of the rawness. He let out a slow breath. His fingers twitched without him wanting them to, and he frowned at the sudden involuntary movement.

Noticing his twitching hand, Madam Pomfrey nodded in understanding. “Side effect of the curse,” she said briskly. “You’ll have a few shakes here and there, especially after such a painful experience. But it will pass in a few days. Lucky for you, it ended quickly. If you’d been under that curse for much longer, it might have been too much for your mind to bear.”

Neville’s stomach tightened at that reminder. A bitter taste touched his tongue that had nothing to do with the potion. “That’s…that’s what happened to my mum and dad,” he thought grimly. He clenched his fist, trying to steady the tremors. “They had it for hours,” he muttered under his breath, though he wasn’t sure Madam Pomfrey even heard him. A flush of anger rose in his chest. Quirrell was the cause of all this, or perhaps Voldemort—whoever was controlling him. Neville vowed quietly that he wouldn’t forget or forgive.

Before he could dwell on it any longer, the curtain was tugged aside again, and this time the tall figure of Albus Dumbledore stepped in. The Headmaster’s eyes, so often twinkling and kind, were solemn as he looked down at Neville. “Good morning, Mr. Longbottom,” he said, his voice carrying that gentle note so many found comforting. “I’m glad to see you awake.” He glanced at Madam Pomfrey. “How is our patient faring?”

Madam Pomfrey set her hands on her hips. “He’ll need rest and potions,” she said, giving the Headmaster a pointed look. “Though I can’t imagine how this happened in the first place. A detention in the Forbidden Forest—ridiculous. And now this. What in Merlin’s name is the world coming to?” She picked up some salve from the tray. “But yes, he’s recovering.”

Dumbledore nodded, his expression grave. “Very good.” He turned his attention back to Neville. “Tell me, my boy, do you recall much of what happened last night?”

Neville stared as he left, annoyance building in his chest. 'Of course, Dumbledore was going to pretend he didn’t know,' Neville inhaled slowly and thought, 'then I will spell it out for you.'

“It was Professor Quirrell,” Neville said, each word scratching at his throat. “He used the curse on me.” He met Dumbledore’s eyes, refusing to look away. “He was the one hunting the unicorn. I saw his face in the forest.”

Neville heard Madam Pomfrey let out a startled gasp. She stopped fussing over him and snapped her head around to stare at Dumbledore. “Professor Quirrell?” she repeated, her voice trembling. “But that’s… that’s unthinkable. Are you sure, Mr. Longbottom?”

Neville gave a single, pained nod. “I’m sure. I know his voice. He cast the spell on me and Harry. He’s the one who… who was drinking the unicorn’s blood.”

A heavy silence fell around the bed for a few moments. Madam Pomfrey’s lips parted in disbelief, and Dumbledore’s expression darkened ever so slightly. The Headmaster’s eyes shifted, and Neville could’ve sworn he saw something flicker—a calculation, maybe. Then Dumbledore released a slow sigh.

“That is troubling news indeed,” Dumbledore said quietly. “Poppy… perhaps we should exercise caution before—”

Madam Pomfrey’s shock quickly turned to outrage. “Caution? Headmaster, if Mr. Longbottom is telling the truth, we have someone in the castle who’s willing to use that foul curse on children! I’ll inform the Aurors immediately. This is unthinkable—”

Neville watched her move to the edge of the curtains, thinking, “Yes, get the Aurors. Have them arrest Quirrell.” But the next instant, Madam Pomfrey seemed to freeze in place, her expression going blank. She stood there as though she’d forgotten what she was doing. Neville blinked, feeling a strange fog settle over his own mind. He tried to hold on to his thoughts, but for a moment, his head felt heavy, and he couldn’t quite recall why Madam Pomfrey was leaving.

He frowned, fighting the sudden wave of confusion. Then he spotted Dumbledore slipping something back into his long sleeve with a smooth movement. A wand, no doubt. The old wizard’s voice cut through the haze. “That was very unfortunate, Mr. Longbottom,” he said softly. “Be assured, such a thing will not happen again.” He paused, eyes shifting to Madam Pomfrey. “I think you’ll be quite safe now. I wish you a speedy recovery.”

Neville’s thoughts slowly cleared as Dumbledore’s words anchored him. He realized with a surge of dread what had just happened. Dumbledore had cast a spell—on Madam Pomfrey, and likely on him too, if only to muddy their memories or confuse them. That old man had effectively prevented Pomfrey from contacting the Aurors. Dumbledore gave him one last kind smile, as if nothing odd had happened, and turned back to Madam Pomfrey, who blinked and seemed to snap out of her trance.

Dumbledore gave him a kindly smile. “I’ll let you rest, my boy. I wish you a speedy recovery.” He bowed his head toward Madam Pomfrey. “I’ll leave him in your capable hands, Poppy.”

Neville’s jaw tightened, and he glared up at the back of Dumbledore’s head in mute anger.

“Yes, Professor,” she said, sounding slightly flustered, “I’ll see to it that Mr. Longbottom rests. He’ll be right as rain in a few days.”

“Wonderful,” Dumbledore said, with a small nod that made his half-moon glasses slide down his crooked nose. He pushed them back up. “Thank you, Madam Pomfrey. I’ll leave him in your capable hands.” With that, he turned and slipped out through the curtains, his robes swishing softly behind him.

Madam Pomfrey blinked again, then shook her head. “Yes, well,” she mumbled to herself, her voice somewhat distant. She turned to Neville, patted his shoulder gently, and said, “Make sure you rest, Mr. Longbottom. You’ll have another dose of your potion at lunch. No visitors until then, all right?” She gave him a small, polite smile and stepped away, drawing the curtains behind her.

Neville lay there, furious, his mind racing. He couldn’t believe what he’d just witnessed. “That old git actually wiped part of our memories,” he thought, feeling a chill run through him. “And probably Confunded us as well so we’d forget what I said about Quirrell.” Neville’s mouth went dry.

He closed his eyes, letting a flood of anger wash over him. He was sure that Dumbledore was controlling events, planning everything with Harry at the center. “He doesn’t want me derailing his grand scheme,” Neville thought bitterly. “Well, we’ll see about that.”

He was still fuming quietly when he heard voices outside the curtain—familiar ones. He recognized Hermione first, her tone full of worry and insistence. “…please, Madam Pomfrey, we won’t stay long. We just want to see how he’s doing.”

A sigh from Madam Pomfrey. “Oh, very well, Miss Granger. But only for half an hour, mind you, and keep your voices down. Mr. Longbottom needs rest.”

Neville heard Hermione’s excited “Thank you!” and then the curtains were pulled aside, letting in fresh light. Hermione Granger’s bushy hair and wide, worried eyes appeared first. The moment she spotted Neville, she practically ran over, flinging her arms around his shoulders in a tight hug.

“Oh, Neville,” she said, her voice trembling with emotion. “We were so worried! Are you all right?”

“Ow—” Neville hissed, though gently. He couldn’t help the small yelp that escaped him at the sudden pressure on his sore body. Still, he mustered a weak smile. “Hi, Hermione,” he managed, patting her back. “I’m… all right.”

Hermione pulled away, flushing slightly. “Sorry, I didn’t mean to squeeze you,” she stammered. “I’m just so happy to see you awake. I’m sorry we didn’t come to see you sooner. We weren’t allowed to leave the common room until this morning. The professors have been coming around the castle, and all classes are canceled for the day.”

“Calm down, Hermione,” Neville interrupted gently, raising a hand to cover her mouth. “I’m fine, and I just woke up a few minutes ago, so no big deal.”

Hermione blushed and nodded, and Neville took his hand away from her mouth.

Ron Weasley and Harry Potter, who had come with Hermione, finally spoke.

“Blimey, mate,” Ron went on, “you gave us a fright.”

Harry nodded, stepping closer. “Glad you’re awake, Neville. You had us all worried. How are you feeling?”

Neville took a moment to breathe, then forced a small grin. “I’m fine,” he answered hoarsely. “Madam Pomfrey says I’ll be up and about in a few days. I just need to take it easy.”

Ron grimaced. “Harry said that you were under the Cruciatus Curse. Flaming hell, that’s an Unforgivable. Anyone using that should be chucked into Azkaban… or worse.”

Hermione hovered worriedly by his side, fiddling with the hem of her robes. “I can’t imagine how painful that curse must’ve been.” Her eyes glistened, but she kept her composure.

Neville said, “Yeah, it was the worst, but I’m just glad I wasn’t under it for too long. Speaking of which, what happened after I was hit by the curse?” he asked, looking at Harry.

Harry recounted what had happened. “You and I were both on the ground, and I was trying to get to you, but my scar felt like it was splitting my head apart. Then a centaur showed up—Firenze. He chased off the hooded man. He saved our lives, really. Took us back to Hagrid, who hurried us to the castle. You were already unconscious.”

Neville nodded slowly, as if this was new information. Of course, he remembered a decent chunk of it, but he had to keep up appearances. “So… they didn’t catch the hooded person, then?”

Harry shook his head, then leaned in and spoke in a low voice. “Nah, he fled when Firenze showed up, but Firenze reckoned it was… well… Voldemort.”

Ron flinched. “Mate, don’t say his name.”

Hermione pursed her lips. “Ron, don’t be silly—Voldemort’s just a name.”

Ron shot her a quick glare. “Yeah, but I don’t fancy hearing it any more than I have to.”

Neville feigned confusion, though he was quite aware of the situation. “So you lot think it was… Voldemort?” he asked in a low voice.

Harry nodded, a grim look settling on his face. “Firenze told me that unicorn’s blood can keep someone alive, even if they’re half-dead. He said it’s a cursed life, but if you only need a bit more time to get something else—the Stone—it can give you eternal life.”

Neville watched Harry, seeing the anger and worry flicker in his eyes. He decided to keep quiet about Quirrell in front of the others for now. After all, Dumbledore had just tried to wipe that revelation away. And from the look in Harry’s eyes, Harry already had his own suspicions—mostly aimed at Snape, no doubt. Let him hold onto that, Neville thought. No sense in fighting Dumbledore’s grand scheme just yet.

Hermione frowned. “Well, like I said, as long as Dumbledore’s here, surely the Stone’s safe. He’s the only one You-Know-Who was ever afraid of.”

At that moment, Neville remembered something else: his wand. He glanced at the small table beside the bed, frowning when he didn’t see it. “My wand,” he asked, worry creeping into his voice. “Where’s my wand?”

Hermione brightened. “Oh! I almost forgot.” She reached into the pocket of her robes and pulled out Neville’s wand, extending it toward him. “Harry picked it up after you dropped it in the forest. He gave it to me yesterday. I kept it safe.”

Harry nodded. “It was lying on the ground, near where you got hit by that curse,” he said. “Didn’t want it left there.”

Relieved, Neville took it from Hermione’s hand, feeling a gentle hum of familiar magic tingle against his palm. He let out a small sigh. “Thanks, you two,” he said, giving them both a grateful nod. “I thought I might have lost it forever.”

Kaito Akaden Chapter 148

Kaito Akaden Chapter 148

Hotaru paused just before leaving and gave Kaito a warm hug. “Goodnight, Kaito,” she said softly before hurrying off to join her mother and sisters.

As the group dispersed, Kushina turned to Naruto, Karin, and Kaito with a wide grin. “So, are you three hungry? Because I sure am, ya know!”

Naruto pumped his fist in the air. “Ichiraku Ramen!”

Karin nodded, smiling. “Ramen sounds perfect.”

Kushina mirrored Naruto’s enthusiasm, punching the air. “Then let’s get going!” she said, her voice full of energy.

Kaito sighed, rubbing the back of his neck. “Of course, ramen…” he muttered, but he followed them without complaint.

As they made their way toward Ichiraku Ramen, Kaito’s attention drifted to the Hokage Monument. Tsunade’s face had recently been added, but his eyes lingered on his father’s—the Fourth Hokage. He slowed his steps slightly, staring at the carved stone. One day, Dad…

Kushina noticed him lagging behind and called out, “Hey, Kaito-kun! Hurry up, ya know!” Her voice snapped him out of his thoughts.

Kaito gave a small smile and jogged to catch up with them, shaking his head at his mother’s boundless energy.

…

Kaito sat cross-legged in the middle of his room, a scroll in his hands as he studied it intently. Four shadow clones were each going through the scrolls scattered around. The room was quiet, except for the occasional rustle of parchment as Kaito focused on his work.

His concentration broke when he heard a knock at the door, followed by it sliding open. Kaito glanced over his shoulder to see who it was.

Kushina stepped inside, holding a ladle in one hand. She was dressed in casual attire, with an apron over it. “Oh, what are you working on, Kai-kun?” she asked, glancing at the clones and the scrolls scattered around. “You’ve been cooped up in here for the past few days, ya know!”

Kaito shrugged, trying to sound nonchalant. “Nothing much, just a new seal I’m working on, ya know.”

Kushina’s eyes lit up with excitement. “A new seal? Let me see! I can help, ya know!” she said eagerly, stepping closer and reaching for one of the scrolls.

Reacting quickly, Kaito snatched the scroll away before she could grab it. “Sorry, Mom. It’s a surprise,” he said with a sheepish smile. He didn’t want her to know about the seal he was working on—she had already made it clear she didn’t want him wasting his time trying to find a cure for her. She was content with how things were, but Kaito wasn’t.

Kushina pouted dramatically, crossing her arms. “Mou, Kai-kun won’t even show me his work anymore,” she whined, pretending to wipe away fake tears. “You used to love when I helped you with seals!”

Kaito sighed, rubbing the back of his neck. “Is there something you wanted, Mom?” he asked, standing up to face her.

Dropping her fake crying act, Kushina smiled and said, “Oh, right! An ANBU came by. Tsuna-nee wants to see you in her office.” She stepped aside to let him leave the room.

Kaito groaned softly, running a hand through his hair. “She probably wants to send me on another mission…” he muttered, grabbing his things as he walked out.

Kushina laughed as she reached out, pulling Kaito in with one arm and ruffling his hair playfully. “Oh, don’t be so grumpy, Kai-kun! How are you going to be Hokage if you complain about going on missions?” she teased, giggling.

Kaito grumbled, crossing his arms. “I never said I wanted to be Hokage,” he muttered under his breath.

He sighed, pulling away from her grip to straighten his clothes. As he did, he paused, sniffing the air. “What’s that smell?” he asked, his brow furrowing.

Kushina’s giggles stopped abruptly, and her face paled. “Oh no! My curry!” she exclaimed, dashing toward the kitchen in a panic.

Kaito followed behind her, sighing as he walked into the kitchen. He found his mom frantically trying to salvage the curry, stirring the pot with desperate intensity. But the smell of burnt food was unmistakable, and her efforts proved futile. With a defeated sigh, Kushina opened the window to let the smoke escape, then slumped to the ground.

“My curry…” she muttered, pouting as she stared at the charred pot.

Kaito shook his head, leaning against the doorframe. “I’m heading out, Mom. Want me to grab something on the way back?” he offered, his tone calm.

Kushina looked up at him, her pout quickly replaced by determination. “It’s alright, Kai-kun. I’ll just make it again, ya know!” she said, standing up with renewed energy.

Kaito nodded. “Alright, then. I’ll be back later.” With that, he turned and left the house.

Once outside, he leapt onto a tree branch and began making his way toward the heart of the village, the rooftops and trees blurring past him. As he ran, Kaito’s thoughts drifted back to the past few days.

…

Kaito sat shirtless in the backyard of the Uzumaki residence, next to the pond and surrounded by the lush greenery of his mother’s garden. Lady Katsuyu rested on his shoulder, her calm voice guiding him through the process.

It had been a day since his fight with Jiraiya, and now Kaito was training with Katsuyu to sense and gather nature energy. They were training here instead of Shikkotsu Forest because Kaito couldn’t afford to use shadow clones for guarding his mother and Naruto while focusing on senjutsu. The intense concentration required for nature energy training made it too dangerous—losing control could mean death. So, Kaito trained in his mother’s garden, ensuring his family was safe inside the house.

Faded black markings began to appear on Kaito’s face, while patches of slime formed on his body. His expression, however, was strained as he struggled to maintain balance.

“Very good, Kai-kun,” Katsuyu said softly. “Maintain the balance. Keep calm.”

Kaito took a deep breath, his face gradually relaxing. The markings around his eyes darkened and solidified, while the slime on his skin receded. After a few more moments of focused breathing, he opened his eyes and stood up.

“Congratulations, Kai-kun,” Katsuyu said with pride in her voice. “You’ve finally managed to enter Sage Mode.”

Kaito looked at his reflection in the pond and noticed the markings on his face. They resembled the pattern Hashirama Senju had when entering Sage Mode. He flexed his hands, marveling at the sensation coursing through his body. “This… this is incredible. I feel stronger. My senses…” He trailed off, looking toward the village gates. “I can sense everyone in the village.”

He wasn’t exaggerating. His sensory range, which was already 25 kilometers with his Kagura Mind’s Eye, now spanned well over 100 kilometers. And he hadn’t even entered Sensory Mode yet.

Katsuyu’s calm voice broke his thoughts. “Hai, that is one of the benefits of Sage Mode—heightened senses and enhanced strength.”

Kaito nodded but frowned slightly, looking at the small patches of slime still clinging to his skin. “But it’s not perfect yet,” he said. “I still haven’t completely stabilized it.”

“You’ve made great progress, Kai-kun,” Katsuyu assured him. “You’ve balanced nature energy and your chakra. Now it’s just a matter of fine-tuning it.”

Kaito nodded respectfully. “Thank you, Lady Katsuyu.”

Katsuyu tilted slightly on his shoulder. “Now, Kai-kun, try using your jutsu. Test it with senjutsu-enhanced chakra.”

Nodding, Kaito held out his right hand, palm facing up. Chakra began to swirl and coalesce in his palm, forming a spinning blue sphere—the Rasengan. As he observed the jutsu, his eyes widened slightly.

“It’s denser than my regular Rasengan,” he said, marveling at the difference. “It feels as strong—if not stronger—than my nature transformation Rasengans.”

Satisfied, Kaito let the Rasengan dissipate; the violently rotating ball of chakra faded from his hand. Looking at the far end of the garden, he moved at his top speed, using pure body movement without chakra enhancement. In an instant, he reappeared at the far end of the garden.

Coming to a stop, Kaito thought to himself, That was at least three times my previous speed. And my reflexes… they’ve heightened to the point where it’s easy to adjust to the boost.

Kaito began running through a set of taijutsu katas at full speed. His movements were fluid and precise, his body responding effortlessly to the enhanced energy coursing through him. When he finished, he stood upright, exhaling deeply. “Everything feels so much easier,” he muttered, his voice filled with awe.

Just then, he felt a subtle tug on his chakra—it was the Hiraishin marker he had given to Lord Fukasaku the day before.

Kaito glanced at Katsuyu. “Lady Katsuyu, I have to leave. I can feel the marker I gave to Fukasaku-sama. He’s summoning me to Mount Myōboku. Would you like to come along?”

Kaito created a shadow clone, which immediately released its gathered nature energy, reverting to its base form. While the clone did that, Kaito grabbed his shirt from where it lay on the ground and slipped it on quickly, preparing to leave.

Katsuyu tilted her head slightly. “To Mount Myōboku? Hmm… sure, Kai-kun. I’ll come along.”

Kaito nodded back, focusing as he activated the Hiraishin seal. In an instant, he and Lady Katsuyu teleported to Mount Myōboku, arriving in a small house above his tri-pronged kunai.

The moment they arrived, Kaito’s body convulsed as he lost control of the abundant nature chakra surrounding him. He fell to one knee, parts of his body becoming slimy and partially liquefied.

Katsuyu reacted immediately, siphoning off the excess nature chakra from Kaito’s body. “Are you alright, Kai-kun?” she asked as his body slowly returned to normal.

Kaito nodded, his breathing labored, beads of sweat rolling down his face. Out of Sage Mode now, he gasped, “Yeah, I’m fine… I was just overwhelmed. I didn’t expect there to be this much nature energy in one place, ya know.”

Katsuyu gave a slight nod. “Hai, that’s understandable. Mount Myōboku, like Shikkotsu Forest, is teeming with nature energy.”

From across the room, Fukasaku observed the scene, his eyes sharp. “So, you were using senjutsu?” he asked.

Kaito glanced at him and nodded. “Yeah, I just managed to enter Sage Mode a few minutes ago,” he said, scratching the back of his head. “But I guess I’m not fully attuned to nature energy yet. I’m glad I brought Lady Katsuyu with me—if she hadn’t been here, I might’ve been in real trouble.”

Katsuyu slithered slightly forward, still perched on Kaito’s shoulder. “I apologize for intruding, Lord Fukasaku,” she said politely.

Fukasaku chuckled warmly. “Ah, Katsuyu-girl, it’s good to see you. And no apologies needed—you’re always welcome at Mount Myōboku.”

He turned his attention back to Kaito, his expression one of approval. “You’ve made great progress, lad. Entering Sage Mode is no small feat.”

Before Kaito could respond, Shima walked in, wiping her hands on an apron. “Ah, there you are, lad! I just finished cooking. Come eat!”

Kaito froze, his face paling at the offer. He immediately recalled what the toads of Mount Myōboku usually ate—bugs—and his stomach churned at the thought. Scratching the back of his head awkwardly, he said, “Uh… Thank you, Lady Shima, but I’ll have to politely decline your offer. You see, I don’t eat bugs, and, well… eating them would be disrespectful to Lady Katsuyu here.” He gestured toward Katsuyu on his shoulder.

Ma, noticing Katsuyu for the first time, smiled warmly. “Ah, Katsuyu! It’s good to see you again. A shame, though—I made more than usual when Pa said you were coming.” She sighed, looking at the pot of food. “Well, I suppose I’ll just give it to the other tadpoles.”

Katsuyu inclined her head slightly. “Good to see you as well, Lady Shima. I hope you’re doing well.”

Kaito, eager to escape the conversation about eating bugs, turned to Fukasaku. “Fukasaku-sama, why did you call for me? Has the Great Elder agreed to meet with me?” He wasn’t expecting a quick answer—it had only been a day since his request.

Fukasaku nodded. “Yes. We spoke to him, and he said he had been expecting you.”

Kaito tilted his head, confused. “Expecting me? What does that mean?”

Fukasaku shrugged. “That’s all he said before going back to sleep. Come on, lad. I’ll take you to him.”

They made their way to a temple-like structure. Inside, a massive old toad sat in a large tub of water, his body partially submerged. His eyes were closed, and he appeared to be asleep.

Kaito stared at him in awe, thinking, So that’s Gamamaru, huh? He wasn’t sure if the toad was truly asleep or just meditating, but the steady rise and fall of his chest suggested slumber.

When they approached, Kaito stood in front of the Grand Elder, waiting respectfully. Fukasaku hopped off Kaito’s shoulder and stepped forward. “Grand Elder! Wake up! I’ve brought Kaito Uzumaki, as you asked.”

Gamamaru stirred slightly, his eyes cracking open in confusion. “What…?” he murmured groggily.

Pa sighed, his tone patient. “I’ve brought Kaito Uzumaki, as you requested, Gamamaru-sama. Katsuyu of Shikkotsu Forest is also here.”

Kaito bowed deeply. “It’s an honor to meet you, Great Elder.”

Katsuyu also spoke respectfully. “An honor, Great Elder Gamamaru.”

The elder toad looked at Kaito, even though his eyes were still closed. “Ah yes, Uzumaki Kaito. Oh, of course, of course. Katsuyu, it’s always a pleasure having you here,” he said, then fell silent again.

Sweatdropping, Fukasaku spoke once more. “Grand Elder, you called them here, remember? You said you had been expecting the lad.”

“Hmm, yes I did...... what was it? Is it that… hmm…” Finally, he continued, “Ah yes, I have had a dream about you. You who will guide the future. I have seen you fighting foes stronger than you, ones that will threaten the world, many of them with ocular powers.”

Kaito thought to himself,' What is he talking about? Is he saying that I’m changing the future? That makes sense—I don’t exist in the original timeline, and I’ve already changed Naruto’s fate, as well as the Uchiha clan’s. Is he talking about Madara or the Ōtsutsuki's?'

Pa, looking shocked, stepped forward. “Great Elder, are you saying that Kaito is the child of prophecy that Jiraiya has been looking for? The one who would bring an era of change?” He looked stunned, glancing between Kaito and the elder.

Katsuyu looked confused. “The child of prophecy?”

Kaito stayed quiet, already knowing it referred to Naruto.

Gamamaru hummed thoughtfully. “Hmm, no, but he will be the one to guide him and play a big role.”

Fukasaku nodded. “I see. Then, Great Elder, what about the seal that Kaito asked about? Is there something like the seal he described?”

Gamamaru nodded again. “Hmm, ah yes, there is such a seal. I used it a long time ago. It should be in the archives if I remember correctly.” With that, he went back to sleep.

Fukasaku sighed, watching as the elder fell asleep just like that. “Well, lad, let’s go to the archives.”

…

Kaito snapped out of his thoughts as he landed next to the window of the Hokage’s office. He knocked on the window and opened it, poking his head inside. “You called for me, Lady Tsunade?”

Inside the office, Tsunade sat behind her desk, looking annoyed as Kaito entered through the window. “Can’t you use the door like a normal person?”

Kaito shrugged. “Well, it’s too much hassle. And who said I’m a normal person?” He glanced at the other occupants of the room.

Hogwarts: Neville’s Insert Chapter 29

Hogwarts: Neville’s Insert Chapter 29

But the hooded figure flicked his wand effortlessly, deflecting the Diffindo to the side. The spell struck a tree behind him, slicing it cleanly in half and The top half crashed to the ground with a deafening thud.

The figure snarled, raising its wand. “Crucio!” he spat, a jet of white light streaking toward them.

Neville reacted instinctively, shoving Harry to the side while diving in the opposite direction. The curse missed them both, hitting the ground with a burst of sparks. Scrambling to his feet, Neville raised his wand again. “Diffi—”

The curse hit him before he could finish.

Neville’s world exploded in a blinding white light as pain engulfed him, sharp and excruciating. His wand slipped from his grasp as his knees buckled, and he collapsed to the ground, screaming.

“AAAAAARRRRGGGGHHHHHH!” he cried, his body writhing uncontrollably. The pain was all-consuming.

Through the haze, he could faintly hear Harry calling his name, but the pain was too overwhelming to process anything else. All he could think was one desperate ‘Make it stop.’

…

Neville’s agonized scream cut through the forest like a knife. Harry, still on the ground where Neville had pushed him to dodge the curse, tried to scramble to his feet. The pain in his forehead was unbearable. Harry called out, “Neville!” upon seeing his friend screaming while the hooded figure held him under the curse.

Neville writhed under the effects of the curse, screaming at the top of his lungs in agony. All Neville could think was, ‘Make the pain go away...’

Harry tried to move closer to Neville to help his friend when he heard a sudden rush of hooves pounding against the forest floor. A shape burst into the clearing, moving so fast it was hard to tell what it was at first. Then he saw a horse’s body with a human torso—it was a centaur. Harry recognized it because Hermione had once told them about the centaurs that lived in the Forbidden Forest.

The centaur galloped straight toward the hooded figure. Hooves struck the ground, sending up clumps of dirt and leaves. The hooded figure jerked his wand around, trying to fend off this new threat.

As soon as the curse holding Neville was released, Neville’s eyes shut tight, and his body went limp.

“Back away!” the centaur shouted, his voice echoing in the dark.

The centaur slammed his hooves down, the force shaking the ground and loosening the hooded figure’s stance. Before the hooded figure could fire another spell, the centaur reared up, forcing the attacker to retreat a few steps.

Harry pushed himself upright, his scar still throbbing, and stumbled to Neville’s side. He grabbed Neville under the arms and picked up Neville’s wand from the ground, hauling him away from the immediate danger.

The centaur threw a quick glance over his shoulder at them. “You must leave,” he said urgently. “It’s not safe here—especially not for either of you.”

The hooded figure snarled, regaining his footing. He whipped his wand out. “Avada—”

“No!” the centaur roared. He lashed out with his front legs, striking the figure’s arm so hard that the aim went wild. A burst of green light blasted a nearby tree, sending splinters flying.

Harry tugged Neville with him as the hooded figure snarled again. The sound made Harry’s blood run cold. He looked ready to try the curse once more, but the centaur stomped the ground and tossed his head angrily. Realizing he was outmatched in close combat, the hooded figure spun around and bolted into the trees, vanishing like a dark shadow.

Suddenly, the forest fell quiet, except for Neville and Harry’s ragged breathing and the centaur’s heavy panting.

Harry, feeling sweat drip down his face, croaked, “H-he’s gone?” to no one in particular.

The centaur turned to them. “Are you two hurt?” Without waiting for an answer, he knelt down, looking from Harry’s scar to Neville’s trembling form. “I saw the unicorn,” he said softly, motioning to the lifeless white creature in the clearing, “and I sensed something dark was here. I’m sorry I didn’t get here sooner.”

Harry said, “Thank you… for saving us.”

“Is Neville—will he be okay?” Harry asked, looking at the limp Neville.

Firenze placed a hand on Neville’s chest, as though checking for his heartbeat. “He was hit by a dark curse,” Firenze said softly. “It did not last long, so he should recover. But we need to get him help as soon as possible.” He turned his gaze to Harry, his expression serious. “We must get you both out of here.”

“My name is Firenze,” the centaur said briskly. “I wish we had time for introductions, but we must leave. That dark wizard could return at any moment.” He lifted Neville and placed him on his back, then gestured for Harry to get on as well.

Firenze gestured toward a narrow path that led out of the clearing. “Come with me. I’ll take you to Hagrid. He’s been searching for the unicorn as well.”

Harry asked, “Who—or what—was that?”

“Firenze!” Bane thundered. “What are you doing? You have a human on your back! Have you no shame? Are you a common mule?”

“Do you realize who this is?” said Firenze. “This is the Potter boy. The quicker he leaves this forest, the better.”

“What have you been telling him?” growled Bane. “Remember, Firenze, we are sworn not to set ourselves against the heavens. Have we not read what is to come in the movements of the planets?”

Ronan pawed the ground nervously. “I’m sure Firenze thought he was acting for the best,” he said in his gloomy voice.

Bane kicked his back legs in anger. “For the best! What is that to do with us? Centaurs are concerned with what has been foretold! It is not our business to run around like donkeys after stray humans in our forest!”

Firenze suddenly reared onto his hind legs in anger, so that Harry had to grab his shoulders to stay on. “Do you not see that unicorn?” Firenze bellowed at Bane. “Do you not understand why it was killed? Or have the planets not let you in on that secret? I set myself against what is lurking in this forest, Bane—yes, with humans alongside me if I must.”

And Firenze whisked around; with Harry clutching on as best he could, they plunged off into the trees, leaving Ronan and Bane behind them. Harry had no clue what was going on.

Harry shot Bane and Ronan a nervous glance, but they made no move to stop him. They only glowered as Firenze headed off, carrying Neville with steady care.

“Why’s Bane so angry?” Harry asked. “What was that thing you saved me from, anyway?”

Firenze slowed to a walk and warned Harry to keep his head bowed in case of low-hanging branches, but he did not answer the question. They made their way through the trees in silence for so long that Harry thought Firenze didn’t want to talk to him anymore. They were passing through a particularly dense patch of trees when Firenze suddenly stopped.

“Harry Potter, do you know what unicorn blood is used for?”

“No,” said Harry, startled by the odd question. “We’ve only used the horn and tail hair in Potions.”

“That is because it is a monstrous thing to slay a unicorn,” said Firenze. “Only one who has nothing to lose, and everything to gain, would commit such a crime. The blood of a unicorn will keep you alive, even if you are an inch from death, but at a terrible price. You have slain something pure and defenseless to save yourself, and you will have but a half-life, a cursed life, from the moment the blood touches your lips.”

Harry stared at the back of Firenze’s head, which was dappled silver in the moonlight. “But who’d be that desperate?” he wondered aloud. “If you’re going to be cursed forever, death’s better, isn’t it?”

“It is,” Firenze agreed, “unless all you need is to stay alive long enough to drink something else—something that will bring you back to full strength and power—something that will mean you can never die. Mr. Potter, do you know what is hidden in the school at this very moment?”

“The Sorcerer’s Stone! Of course—the Elixir of Life! But I don’t understand who—” Harry’s eyes widened as he said it.

“Can you think of nobody who has waited many years to return to power, who has clung to life, awaiting their chance?”

Harry’s eyes widened in realization. He swallowed hard, then looked at Neville and back at Firenze. “Do you mean,” Harry croaked, “that was Voldemort?”

Firenze nodded, and they soon found Hagrid. Alongside him stood Malfoy, arms wrapped around himself as though he were freezing, eyes wide with alarm. The moment Hagrid saw Neville draped over Firenze’s back, he let out a shocked cry.

“What in the—? Neville!” Hagrid rushed forward, taking the limp boy into his own arms with surprising gentleness. Malfoy stared, pale-faced, at Neville’s still form. He opened his mouth like he wanted to make a snide remark but thought better of it.

Firenze looked at Hagrid, nodding once. “He was hit by a Dark curse,” the centaur explained. “I believe it was the Cruciatus Curse. Hurry and get him to your hospital wing.”

Hagrid nodded, his eyes on Neville’s slack face. “I’ll get him there quick,” he said, voice thick with worry. He turned to Harry. “Harry, yeh all right?”

Harry’s scar still throbbed, but he managed a nod. “I’m okay. Just worried about Neville.”

“We can’t stand here all night,” Hagrid muttered, adjusting Neville in his arms. “C’mon, Malfoy, we’re goin’ back.”

Malfoy, still looking unsettled, followed without complaint. Harry glanced back at Firenze, feeling an odd sense of gratitude. “Thank you,” he managed. The centaur gave a small bow of his head. Then, with a last warning look into the darkness, he turned and galloped back into the deeper parts of the forest.

They hurried across the grounds toward the castle. Hagrid led the way, Malfoy trailing behind him, while Harry jogged to keep pace. Neville hung limp in Hagrid’s arms.

The second they entered the main doors, their footsteps echoed on the stone floor. Filch’s lamp glowed near the entrance, but he merely stared wide-eyed at the sight of Neville, clearly thrown off. Hagrid brushed past without stopping, heading straight for the hospital wing.

Hagrid burst into the room, shouting, “Madam Pomfrey!”

Madam Pomfrey almost leapt out of her seat when the doors banged open. “What on earth—?” she began, but then she saw Neville’s slack form and her face took on a look of professional urgency. “Put him on that bed, now!”

Hagrid laid Neville down, stepping back to let Madam Pomfrey work. She immediately began checking Neville’s pulse, breathing, and any sign of further damage. While she did, she said, “Hagrid, use the Floo in my office to contact Professor McGonagall and the Headmaster while I tend to Mr. Longbottom.”

Hagrid nodded. “Yes, ma’am,” he said, then rushed off to Madam Pomfrey’s office, leaving Harry and Malfoy standing by, watching.

Malfoy, regaining some of his nerve, asked, “So what happened, Potter? Did Longbottom trip and hit his head again?” He mocked, though he clearly looked shaken.

Harry scowled at Malfoy. “If you have to know, he was hit by a curse. Firenze the centaur saved us.”

Malfoy opened his mouth to ask something more, but just then they heard hurried footsteps. Turning to look, they saw Professor McGonagall—dressed in her nightclothes and a long robe—walking briskly toward them. Hagrid followed, worry etched on his face.

“What has happened?” McGonagall demanded, her gaze flicking from Neville’s pale face to Hagrid, Malfoy, and Harry.

Hagrid removed his moleskin cap, twisting it nervously. “Attacked in the forest. Cruciatus Curse,” he said in a low voice. “That’s what the centaur said.”

McGonagall blanched. “What? How could it be—” Just then, another person arrived: Dumbledore. Hearing Hagrid, he said in a serious tone, “Are you sure about that, Hagrid?”

Madam Pomfrey nodded grimly. “Yes, I can confirm that. There are signs of the curse on his nervous system,” she said, waving her wand over Neville with a gentle swirl of light. “It’s not permanent—he wasn’t under it for very long—but it will leave lingering effects. He’ll need rest and potions for the pain.”

Harry breathed a small sigh of relief. “He’ll be okay?” he asked Madam Pomfrey.

Madam Pomfrey nodded firmly. “Yes. But he’s out cold right now and likely won’t wake until morning. You can come see him tomorrow.”

McGonagall asked, “But who could have done that?”

Dumbledore nodded gravely. “We will have to lock down the castle and search it. I will assemble the rest of the professors. Minerva, would you mind escorting Mr. Potter and Mr. Malfoy back to their common rooms?”

McGonagall nodded and looked at Harry and Malfoy, her lips pressed into a thin line. “You two,” she said sternly, “back to your common rooms at once. You heard the Headmaster.”

With that, she pointed to the door. Malfoy looked relieved to be dismissed and quickly slipped out, eager to put distance between himself and the hospital wing. Harry cast one last, worried glance at Neville, who lay still on the bed, then trudged after McGonagall.

The walk through the corridors felt longer than usual. McGonagall said little, except to remind Harry to remain in the tower. At the entrance to the Gryffindor common room, she gave him a curt nod.

“In you go,” she said, “and do not leave until the morning, understood?”

“Yes, Professor,” Harry mumbled. He gave her a small nod back. As soon as the portrait swung open, he slipped inside.

Ron and Hermione were waiting near the fireplace. Ron shot to his feet when Harry appeared, and Hermione’s eyes went wide as she rushed forward.

“Harry!” Hermione exclaimed. “What happened? What did Filch have you and Neville do?" She glanced around, expecting Neville to be right behind him. "where’s Neville?”

 Ron, looking confused, asked, “Yeah, mate—where is Neville?”

Harry sighed and said, “He’s in the hospital, Hermione.” Running a hand through his hair, he took Neville’s wand from his pocket and handed it to Hermione. “Here. It’s Neville’s wand.”

Hermione’s eyes widened with worry. She clutched the wand to her chest. “What? Why? What happened? Why is Neville in the hospital wing?”

Harry said, “Calm down, Hermione. Neville is fine. Madam Pomfrey said he’ll be out for the rest of the night, but he’ll be okay.”

“As to why he’s in the hospital—well, we were attacked,” he added, his words tumbling out in a rush. “Filch took us to Hagrid for our detention, and we were sent into the Forbidden Forest.”

Ron exclaimed, “The forest?”

Harry nodded. “Yeah, something’s been killing unicorns, and Hagrid took us to find out what was doing it.”

He let out a long breath. “We split up. Malfoy went with Hagrid, and Neville and I followed another trail.”

Harry continued, “We found the unicorn—and we also found what was hunting it. A hooded person. We couldn’t see his face clearly. Neville signaled for me to back away, but we tripped, and the hooded figure noticed us. He attacked us, and Neville was hit by a curse. We were only saved by Firenze, a centaur. He said it was the Cruciatus Curse.”

Hermione gasped, tears filling her eyes. “Oh no,” she whispered, voice trembling. “Neville…is he…” She couldn’t finish her sentence and looked as though she might bolt straight out the portrait hole.

Ron said, “Blimey, mate. He was hit by the Cruciatus?”

Harry asked, “Yeah—do you know what it does?” looking confused by Ron’s alarm.

Ron went pale. “Mate, that’s one of the three Unforgivable Curses. It’s the worst torture curse there is. A one-way ticket to Azkaban if you use it.”

Harry felt his stomach twist with dread.

Hermione still looked on the brink of tears. “We have to go see him!” she demanded, voice shaking, and started toward the portrait hole, but Harry gently grabbed her arm.

“We can’t,” Harry said, shaking his head. “Dumbledore’s locked the castle down while the professors search for whoever did this. We’re not allowed to leave the common room.”

Hermione looked torn between anger and heartbreak. “But—but Neville—”

“I know,” Harry said quietly, “but McGonagall told me we have to stay here. Madam Pomfrey said we can visit him tomorrow. We’d just cause trouble if we went now.”

Hermione stood still, tears slipping down her cheeks. Ron stepped forward, placing a comforting hand on her shoulder. “He’ll be all right,” Ron muttered, though he looked shaken too. “He’s tough, Hermione.”

Taking a shaky breath, Hermione nodded and brushed away her tears. She slowly sank down onto the couch by the fire. “I’m sorry,” she whispered. “I just can’t believe this happened.”

“That’s not all,” Harry said, lowering his voice. “Firenze told me that the hooded man was Voldemort.”

Ron flinched. “Don’t say his name out loud, mate!”

Harry ignored him. “Don’t you get it? Snape is after the Stone for Voldemort. He attacked that unicorn to drink its blood…” Harry’s chest tightened at the memory.

Ron let out a low whistle, looking pale. “Blimey. So You-Know-Who is still alive, and Snape is after the Stone to help him?”

Harry nodded. “If Snape manages to steal the Stone, then…” He trailed off uneasily.

Hermione wiped her eyes, staring into the flickering flames. “But…Dumbledore is still here, right? He won’t let You-Know-Who get the Stone. Voldemort’s afraid of Dumbledore.”

Kaito Akaden Chapter 147

Kaito Akaden Chapter 147

Ma rolled her eyes, then whacked Jiraiya on the head again. “See what you did? Now he’s not our summoner, all because of your foolishness!”

Jiraiya groaned, rubbing his sore head once more. “Give me a break, Ma. It’s not like I forced him away from the toads. I just—” He cut himself off with a sigh.

Pa turned to Kaito. “So, lad, is there anything we can do to make this easier on you so you don’t have to… finish off Jiraiya boy? He did train your father, after all.”

Ma folded her arms, her large eyes fixed on Kaito. “Yes, if there’s something we can do, let us know. As for Jiraiya, I’ll make sure he learns his lesson when we get back to Mount Myoboku.”

Kaito took a long breath, picking his words carefully. Part of him still burned with anger, but another part realized this might be the best chance he’d get to ask for something else he needed. “Yes,” he said at last, “there is something I need help with. I think you two might be able to assist me.”

….

Pa leaned forward, his voice steady and reassuring. “Well, tell us, my boy. If it’s something we can help with, we’ll do what we can.”

Ma gave a small nod, her tone gentle. “Aye, lad, don’t keep us in the dark. Let us know.”

Kaito hesitated for a moment, then nodded firmly. “I need your help with a seal I’m working on.”

Pa tilted his head, clearly puzzled. “A seal, you say?”

“Yeah,” Kaito replied, fidgeting with his pouch. “You know how Mom was the Nine-Tails’ jinchūriki before… you know…” His voice trailed off as he pulled out a sealing scroll, unrolling it slowly on the ground.

Pa’s eyes narrowed slightly, his confusion growing. “Go on, boy.”

Kaito glanced at them, then down at the scroll in his hands. “She only survived that night because I awakened one of the Uzumaki clan’s kekkei genkai,” he said quietly. “It’s called Heal Bite. It lets me heal anyone who bites me, using my chakra.”

Jiraiya, still on the ground nursing his shoulder, looked up sharply. “So that’s how she survived,” he muttered, pushing himself up to his feet. “I always thought it was because she was an Uzumaki…”

Kaito shot him a glare, his voice sharp. “Well, maybe you would’ve known if you’d visited once.”

Jiraiya flinched at the remark, wincing. “I didn’t mean—”

Kaito cut him off, ignoring the apology. He crouched and began spreading the scroll flat on the ground, his focus returning to the task at hand. “As I was saying,” he continued, “she survived because of my kekkei genkai, but she wasn’t fully healed. The Nine-Tails was forcefully extracted, and later, she got stabbed by its claw.” He paused for a moment, “She had this massive wound on her abdomen. I managed to save her from dying that day, but I was just a kid. I didn’t have enough chakra to heal her completely.”

Pa rubbed his chin thoughtfully, the weight of the story settling in. “I take it she’s been having trouble molding her chakra ever since? Damaged chakra coils, maybe?”

Kaito nodded, shifting his gaze to Fukasaku. “Exactly. After we got discharged from the hospital, I tried to heal her again. But…” He ran a hand through his hair, his frustration clear. “She refused. She said it was too dangerous.”

“Why?” Ma asked softly, her brows knitting with concern.

Kaito let out a long sigh, his voice heavy. “Because that day, when I didn’t have enough chakra to save her, out of my desperation. I used some of my life force to heal her.”

“She doesn’t want me risking my life for her again,” Kaito continued, staring at the scroll like it held all the answers. “Since then, I’ve been searching for a way to heal her properly. But so far, nothing’s worked. I even tracked down Lady Tsunade, hoping she could help. But even with her skills, it was beyond her expertise. All she could do was create some pain-relieving medication to help Mom cope with her chronic pain.”

Hearing Kaito’s explanation, Ma nodded thoughtfully. “So, you’re hoping we can help her, aye? I’m sorry, lad, but we don’t have any techniques advanced enough to heal damaged chakra coils. I’m not sure if there’s anything out there that can.” She shook her head sadly.

Kaito nodded, understanding. “I figured as much,” He shook his head and continued. “But... while talking to Lady Tsunade, I learned something important: you can’t really fix damaged chakra coils with medical ninjutsu alone.”

He turned to Fukasaku and Shima. “But what if you could make the body repair the damaged chakra coils itself?”

Pa’s brows furrowed in thought. “Make the body repair itself, you say?”

Kaito nodded. “Exactly. My kekkei genkai, Heal Bite—it works because my chakra has an incredibly high level of vitality. It forces the person being healed to accelerate their own natural healing using that vitality. But…” He frowned. “It takes a huge amount of chakra to heal someone completely.”

He took out the scroll and walked over to Fukasaku, handing it to him. “I want to replicate that effect using seals. I’ve been designing one that could do the same thing. To put it simply, this seal would revert the body’s condition back to its prime state.”

Fukasaku took the scroll and unrolled it, examining it carefully. His expression grew thoughtful as he glanced at Kaito. “I see. If you use your chakra, it might just work.”

Kaito nodded again. “It could, but there’s a catch. We can use regular chakra, sure, but it only works on minor wounds. My Heal Bite ability, on the other hand, requires someone to bite me directly for it to work. My normal chakra doesn’t have the same effect. If I want this seal to repair Mom’s chakra coils, I’ll need something with more life energy than regular chakra.”

He paused, locking eyes with Fukasaku. “That’s when I thought of nature energy. It’s entirely made up of life force, so it should be even more potent than my Heal Bite ability. That’s why I signed the contract with the slug summons—to learn senjutsu and complete the seal.”

Jiraiya, who had been quietly listening until now, jolted in surprise. “Wait, hold on,” he said, his eyes wide. “You’re learning senjutsu?”

Kaito nodded, though the irritation in his eyes was clear. “Yes,” he said, his tone clipped. “But I haven’t made much progress. I’ve been too busy the last six months.” He grumbled under his breath, “Lady Tsunade’s a slave driver. She keeps sending me on missions back to back. I barely have time to breathe.”

Pa chuckled lightly but quickly shifted to a more serious tone. “So, you’re asking us to help charge the seal with nature energy?”

Kaito sighed, running a hand through his hair. “It’s not that straightforward,” he said. “The seal works with normal chakra right now, sure. But I don’t think it’ll work the same way with nature energy. From what I’ve learned, nature energy is extremely volatile.”

Fukasaku nodded in agreement. “You’re right about that. If handled incorrectly, it can be very dangerous.”

“Exactly,” Kaito said, gesturing toward the scroll. “That’s why I need your help. I need to design a filter or a regulator for the seal—something that can stabilize the nature energy so it doesn’t harm the person it’s supposed to heal.” He paused, frustration flickering across his face. “I tried asking Lady Katsuyu for help, but she said she wasn’t well-versed in seals. That’s why I’m here. The toads of Mount Myōboku have been practicing senjutsu for centuries. Do you know any way to make something like that work with seals?”

Fukasaku stroked his chin thoughtfully but didn’t respond immediately. Kaito’s mind wandered for a moment, recalling where he’d gotten the idea for this seal in the first place.

He remembered vaguely when Hagoromo fought against Kaguya. Kaguya was mind-controlling Hamura, Hagoromo had to kill his brother with a Chidori look alike. and then Hamura had been revived using a seal given to Hagoromo by the Great Toad Sage. Kaito wasn’t sure if that was canon or just a filler episode, but it planted the idea in his head. ‘If that seal could revive someone from death using nature energy, then surely it could heal Mom’s chakra coils.’

‘And if it didn’t work?’ Kaito’s jaw tightened. ‘If this fails, there’s always the Rinnegan.’ The thought was grim, but he wouldn’t hesitate. ‘If I have to, I’ll storm Amegakure and take the Rinnegan from Nagato myself.’

Pa finally spoke, breaking Kaito’s thoughts. “Sorry, lad,” he said, shaking his head. “I haven’t heard of anything quite like the seal you’re making. I’d have to search the archives and see if there’s something we’ve missed.”

Ma, who had been peering over Pa’s shoulder at the scroll, chimed in. “But if anyone would know, it’d be the Great Toad Sage,” she said confidently. “That old geezer’s been alive for who knows how long, and he was always known for his work with seals.”

Kaito sighed, running a hand through his hair, but nodded. “Is there a way for me to talk to the Great Elder? Or at least permission to look through the archives?”

Pa nodded slowly. “We can arrange an audience with the Great Elder, but it won’t be immediate. You see, he’s really old, and he’s…”

Ma cut in, waving a hand dismissively. “He’s a bit senile and sleeps all the time. But don’t worry, lad. When he wakes up, we can arrange for you to meet him.”

Pa chuckled lightly and added, “As for the archives, I’ll have to ask the Great Elder for permission. But I doubt he’d mind you looking through them.”

Relief washed over Kaito’s face, and he bowed deeply. “Thank you, Lord Fukasaku, Lady Shima. This means a lot to me.”

Pa smiled kindly. “No need to thank us, lad.”

Ma gave a wistful sigh. “Yeah, you’re Minato-chan’s son, after all. It’s just a shame you’re not our summoner.” She shook her head in mock disappointment before shooting a sharp glare at Jiraiya. “Unlike someone.”

Jiraiya flinched under her gaze, mumbling, “I-I didn’t do anything…”

Kaito straightened, scratching the back of his head sheepishly. “Sorry about that,” he said. “I was desperate, and the slug contract was the closest one I could get at the time.”

Pa waved it off with a chuckle. “It’s alright, lad.”

Kaito reached into his pouch and pulled out a tri-pronged kunai, handing it to Fukasaku. “This has my Hiraishin seal on it. If you channel chakra into the handle, I’ll teleport to it. That way, you can contact me when the Great Elder wakes up.”

Pa examined the kunai and nodded. “Aye, that’ll make things much easier.”

Kaito nodded back, stepping away. “I should get going. Mom’s probably worried about me.” He bowed again, deeply. “Thank you again, Lord Fukasaku, Lady Shima.”

As he stood up, his expression darkened, and he shot a glare at Jiraiya. “You got lucky this time. But if I ever catch you peeping on my mom or anyone close to me again, I swear I’ll kill you.” Without waiting for a response, Kaito vanished in a flash of light.

Jiraiya flinched, his hand instinctively going to his injured shoulder. He sighed heavily, shaking his head. “That kid’s got his mother’s temper…”

Ma’s sharp glare made him stiffen. “You better take care of that wound, Jiraiya-boy. And you better not let me hear about you peeping again. Ever.”

“Yes, ma’am,” Jiraiya muttered, nodding quickly.

With a shared look, both Pa and Ma dispelled themselves, leaving Jiraiya alone in the clearing. He glanced around at the empty space and sighed, shoulders slumping. “Well, that didn’t go as planned…” Still clutching his arm, he turned and trudged off to get his shoulder treated.

…..

Kaito appeared back in the men’s side of the hot springs locker room. He let out a long sigh, rolling his shoulders to shake off the tension. Stripping off his clothes, he wrapped a towel around his waist and headed to the showers. The hot water cascaded over him, washing away the grime of the day. Once he was clean, he made his way to the hot spring, easing into the steaming water with a relieved sigh. The heat worked its magic, relaxing his sore muscles.

After about 20 minutes, Kaito stepped out of the men’s side, fully dressed and feeling slightly more at ease. As he exited, he was greeted by an unexpected group: his mother, Kushina, along with Hotaru, Tsunade, and Shizune.

Hotaru gave him a shy wave, her face bright red. Kaito guessed that his mother had been teasing her about him while they were in the bath. He also noticed that Shizune’s face was just as red. Mom probably teased her about boys too, he thought with a sigh.

As soon as Kushina spotted him, her mischievous grin widened. “So, Kai-kun,” she teased, her voice sing-song, “did you get a nice peek at Hotaru-chan?”

Kaito groaned, rubbing the bridge of his nose. “You already know the answer, Mom.”

“Oh, so you did, huh?” Kushina smirked, putting her hands on her hips. “What a naughty boy.”

He sighed again, deciding it wasn’t worth the effort to argue.

Eventually, they parted ways. Tsunade and Shizune headed back to the Hokage’s office, while Kaito, Kushina, and Hotaru made their way toward the academy. It was about time for the students to be let out for the day.

As they arrived at the academy gates, the sound of children’s chatter filled the air. Kaito’s eyes landed on a familiar figure leaning against a tree with his arms crossed and eyes closed. It was Itachi, dressed in his ANBU uniform. As if sensing their presence, Itachi opened his eyes and glanced in their direction.

Hotaru spotted him almost instantly and beamed. “Itachi-kun! It’s been a while! How have you been?” she called out, her voice filled with excitement as they walked toward him.

Itachi gave a small nod and a faint smile. “I’m well, Hotaru. It’s good to see you, too.” His gaze shifted to Kushina, and he dipped his head respectfully. “Good evening, Lady Kushina.”

Kushina smiled warmly at Itachi and ruffled his hair playfully. “My, you’ve grown since the last time I saw you, Itachi-kun! At this rate, you three will all be taller than me!” She feigned a pout of annoyance, crossing her arms dramatically. Then her expression softened as she looked around. “Speaking of family, where’s your mother, Itachi-kun? She’s not here?”

Itachi shook his head. “No, I’m here alone.”

Kaito grinned and walked up to Itachi, their fists bumping in their usual greeting. “Sup, Itachi.”

Itachi gave a small nod in return, a faint smile tugging at his lips. “Kaito.”

Just then, Hitomi arrived, walking toward them with little Hanabi in tow. The two-year-old toddled beside her, holding onto her mother’s hand. Spotting the group, Hitomi smiled brightly. “Hello, everyone!” She gave Hotaru a warm hug. “You’re back, Hotaru-chan!”

Hanabi, curious about the scene, wobbled slightly as she looked up at the group. Kushina’s eyes lit up when she saw the little girl. “Oh my goodness, Hanabi-chan! Aren’t you the cutest little thing?” She squealed and scooped Hanabi into her arms, nuzzling her cheek to the giggling child’s. “I could just eat you up, ya know!” she teased, making exaggerated munching sounds as Hanabi laughed.

Kaito greeted Hitomi politely. “Lady Hitomi, it’s good to see you again.”

Itachi inclined his head slightly. “Lady Hitomi.”

Hitomi smiled warmly at the two young men. “Kai-kun, Itachi-kun, it’s always nice to see you both together.” Then her smile turned mischievous as she stepped closer to Hotaru and Kaito, her voice teasing. “So… have you two started dating yet, or what?”

Hotaru’s face turned a deep shade of red, and she pushed her mother away with a flustered, “M-Mom! Stop it!”

Kaito scratched the back of his head, his expression awkward as he tried to smile. “Uh…”

Their reactions only made Itachi smirk, his amusement evident in the slight curve of his lips.

Before anyone could say more, Naruto burst out of the academy gates with his friends—Shikamaru, Chōji, Karin, Hinata, and Ino. Not far behind, Sasuke walked out as well, trailed by a group of giggling girls.

Naruto was the first to notice the group and immediately ran over, his excitement barely contained. “Nii-chan! You’re back!” he shouted, grinning widely.

Karin followed behind him at a more relaxed pace but was still smiling brightly. “Kaito-nii, when did you get back?”

Hinata, after greeting her mother and elder sister with a hug, before she turned shyly to Kaito. “G-Good evening, Kaito-sempai,” she said, her face turning pink.

Kaito smiled warmly and ruffled the hair of Naruto, Karin, and Hinata in one smooth motion. “Hey there, you guys,” he said with a chuckle.

Hinata’s blush deepened, and she shyly looked down, her fingers fidgeting with the hem of her sleeve.

Just then, Neji approached the group, bowing slightly as he greeted them. “Lady Hitomi, Lady Hotaru, Lady Kushina, Kaito.”

Kushina smiled warmly at him. “It’s nice to see you too, Neji-kun!”

Kaito gave him a nod. “Good to see you, Neji.”

Meanwhile, Sasuke made his way over to Itachi, clearly aware his older brother was waiting for him. Kushina, ever the playful one, noticed and couldn’t resist teasing. “My, my, Sasuke-kun, you’ve got quite the fan club trailing after you, huh?”

Sasuke’s cheeks tinted red, and he grumbled, “Nii-san, let’s go,” avoiding her gaze as he walked over to Itachi.

Itachi, always composed, gave Kushina a polite smile. “We’ll take our leave now, Lady Kushina, Lady Hitomi, Hotaru, Kaito.”

Kushina nodded, smiling warmly. “Come visit sometime, Itachi-kun! It’s been too long, ya know!”

Itachi nodded again before turning to leave, Sasuke following close behind, still muttering under his breath.

As they left, Hitomi glanced at the sky and sighed softly. “Well, it’s getting late. We should head home too, Kushina.”

Kushina nodded, shifting little Hanabi back into Hitomi’s arms. “Yeah, I suppose we should. See you tomorrow, Hitomi. And don’t forget—bring Hanabi-chan over next time, ya know!”

Hitomi laughed gently. “Of course. See you tomorrow.” She waved as she walked away with Hotaru, Hanabi, and the Hyūga branch bodyguards.

Hotaru paused just before leaving and gave Kaito a warm hug. “Goodnight, Kaito,” she said softly before hurrying off to join her mother and sisters.

As the group dispersed, Kushina turned to Naruto, Karin, and Kaito with a wide grin. “So, are you three hungry? Because I sure am, ya know!”

Naruto pumped his fist in the air. “Ichiraku Ramen!”

Karin nodded, smiling. “Ramen sounds perfect.”

Kushina mirrored Naruto’s enthusiasm, punching the air. “Then let’s get going!” she said, her voice full of energy.

Kaito sighed, rubbing the back of his neck. “Of course, ramen…” he muttered, but he followed them without complaint.

As they made their way toward Ichiraku Ramen, Kaito’s attention drifted to the Hokage Monument. Tsunade’s face had recently been added, but his eyes lingered on his father’s—the Fourth Hokage. He slowed his steps slightly, staring at the carved stone. One day, Dad…

Kushina noticed him lagging behind and called out, “Hey, Kaito-kun! Hurry up, ya know!” Her voice snapped him out of his thoughts.

Kaito gave a small smile and jogged to catch up with them, shaking his head at his mother’s boundless energy.

Kaito Akaden Chapter 146

Kaito Akaden Chapter 146

Kaito body-flickered aside, narrowly avoiding the massive weapon. The toad hopped backward to create distance, but Kaito chased it. When he caught up to the massive toad, he launched chakra chains from his back, binding Gamaken’s arm and the sasumata—but he hadn’t anchored the chains to the ground, allowing the huge toad to yank him along. Realizing his error, Kaito released the chains and somersaulted onto another tree. He created a shadow clone, and together they used more chakra chains—this time anchoring them to the ground—to restrain Gamaken again, successfully pinning him.

“Gamaken-san,” Kaito shouted, “I have no quarrel with you. Please leave. I’m only after that perverted old man on your head.”

“I’m sorry,” the toad replied. “But I promised to protect him. I can’t break my word.”

Kaito scowled, preparing to bite his thumb. ‘I might have to summon Katsuyu myself…’

Just then, Jiraiya spoke up from atop Gamaken. “It’s alright, Gamaken—you can leave.”

The giant toad sighed in relief. “If you insist…” He dispelled himself in a huge cloud of white smoke that filled the area.

Kaito immediately sensed Jiraiya’s chakra rising, becoming much larger than before.
…

Kaito thought, 'That old man… He’s gone into Sage Mode, hasn’t he? His chakra feels like it tripled in size.'

He stood on the tree branch, his crimson hair fluttering lightly in the breeze as he waited for the white smoke to clear. He could feel the surge of Jiraiya’s chakra—much larger and denser than before.

Narrowing his eyes, Kaito remained on alert for any sudden moves. Kaito thought, 'I need to be careful. I don’t know exactly how big a boost his imperfect Sage Mode gives him.'

“Jiraiya boy,” croaked Ma in an annoyed tone, “you’d better have a good reason for summoning us! You know I was in the middle of cooking! You always pick the worst possible times to call us.” She folded her small arms, a ladle still dripping sauce in one hand. “I even left the stove on. If my house burns down, you’re gonna regret it!”

Pa sighed at his partner. “Now, now, Ma. Calm down. I’m sure Jiraiya boy wouldn’t summon us unless he really needed us… right, Jiraiya boy?”

Jiraiya was busy clutching his wounded shoulder, where blood slowly dripped through his fingers. He let out a nervous laugh that sounded more like a painful wheeze. “Er… right. Sorry, Ma. Sorry, Pa. You see, I’ve… gotten myself into a pickle.”

Ma gave him a sour look. “A pickle, huh? You’re all banged up and bleeding. The enemy must be pretty serious if you had to drag us into this.”

Jiraiya glanced at his shoulder, wincing. “It’s, uh, not exactly an enemy in the usual sense.”

Pa frowned, looking at the blood running over Jiraiya’s hand. “Are you sure? That wound looks nasty. I could’ve sworn you’d only call us if you were truly cornered.”

Jiraiya cleared his throat and tried to put on a casual grin, though the pain made it difficult. “I, uh, sort of… it’s just that this isn’t some typical missing-nin or anything.”

Ma huffed, glancing around the smoky clearing. “Well, are you gonna explain, or keep stalling? My stew’s gonna be ruined by the time I get home!”

As the smoke fully cleared, Kaito came into view, standing calmly on a tree branch and looking at them.

‘So I was right,’ Kaito thought, noticing the deeper lines around Jiraiya’s eyes and the orange pigmentation that often came with Sage Mode. ‘He’s in Sage Mode… I didn’t think he needed them to enter it. I thought he only used them against Pain to help maintain Sage Mode for a longer time.’

Kaito, seeing Jiraiya’s shoulder, noted that it had stopped bleeding. He thought, And his injury… It must be the passive healing and durability buff that Sage Mode gives.

Down below, Ma finally noticed Kaito. She squinted in his direction. “Where’s the enemy, Jiraiya boy? I only see some kid standing up there.”

Jiraiya forced another laugh. “Er, that’s the kid I was telling you about, Ma. He’s the one who gave me this wound.”

There was a brief pause. Then Ma’s eyes widened in annoyance. “You summoned us to fight a child?!”

Pa, the older male toad perched on Jiraiya’s other shoulder, raised a webbed hand. “Let him explain, Ma. The boy might be stronger than he looks. Jiraiya’s injured, too. But, Jiraiya boy, why are you even fighting some young lad from Konoha?”

Ma tilted her head at Kaito. “He does look kinda familiar… Maybe I’ve seen him somewhere before. Jiraiya, what exactly happened to get you injured like that?” She narrowed her eyes, looking from the wound in Jiraiya’s shoulder to Kaito on the branch.

Wincing, Jiraiya mumbled, “It was a misunderstanding, okay? The kid wants to kill me, but I tried to leave. He wasn’t having it. I, uh… need you both to distract him a bit so I can slip away.”

Pa looked puzzled. “If that’s all you wanted—to run away—why didn’t you just use reverse summoning to get back to Mount Myoboku?”

“Reverse summoning…?” Jiraiya blinked, looking like a lightbulb had just turned on in his head. “I, uh… didn’t think of that.”

Hearing that, Kaito couldn’t hold in his anger any longer. He raised his voice from the tree branch. “A misunderstanding? A misunderstanding?!” His eyes blazed as he repeated the words. “You never visited us once after my dad died! You called yourself Naruto’s godfather—something you asked to be! But you never showed up for him, not even once. You never checked on him, never looked after him. If my mom and I hadn’t survived the Nine-Tails attack, you would’ve left Naruto all alone. You would’ve abandoned him!”

Kaito remembered how, in another timeline, Jiraiya basically abandoned Naruto, who ended up living by himself, becoming the village outcast, and being manipulated by Hiruzen. That was one of the reasons why he disliked Jiraiya.

“And then you show up,” Kaito shouted, “and the first thing you did was go to the hot springs to spy on my mom and her friends?! You call that a misunderstanding?”

Jiraiya’s shoulders sagged. “It’s not like that, kid…”

Kaito ignored him and turned his attention to the two toad sages. “Fukasaku-sama, Lady Shima, I’ve got no quarrel with either of you,” he said, doing his best to be respectful. “Please leave him to me. I only want Jiraiya. I’m going to teach him a lesson he won’t forget.”

Kaito reached into his pouch and pulled out six tri-pronged kunai, then threw them around. As he threw them, they multiplied into hundreds, scattering all over the clearing.

Jiraiya, seeing this, tensed and thought, 'That kunai… The kid knows Hiraishin. This is bad, and his face turned serious.'

At this, Ma’s mouth fell open. She clutched the ladle tighter, glaring at Jiraiya. “You did what?! Jiraiya boy, didn’t we teach you any manners? You’re peeping on women again?”

Jiraiya’s face turned red. He tried to cover it by coughing into his hand. “It’s not like that—I… I didn’t know it was her!”

A loud whack! echoed through the clearing as Ma produced a gigantic wok pan from thin air and slammed it over Jiraiya’s head. “That’s no excuse, ya big idiot!”

“Argh!” Jiraiya stumbled, clutching his head. Blood still oozed from his shoulder, but now he was wincing more from Ma’s blow than from the wound. “Ma, cut it out…!”

“It serves you right,” she snapped. “Can’t believe we taught you all those ninjutsu, only for you to stoop to peeping.”

While Ma continued scolding Jiraiya, Pa turned to Kaito with a curious look. “Lad, how do you know our names? I don’t think we’ve met before.”

Kaito blinked, not expecting this to happen, then said, “Um… My dad learned Senjutsu from you. He told me about you both.”

Pa’s eyes widened. “Your dad was our student… Wait a minute.” He took a closer look, his wrinkled face softening with realization. “You must be Minato’s older son… Kaito. Yes, that’s it. You have his face, only with your mother’s hair color.”

Ma, hearing this, seemed to switch her scowl from Jiraiya to concern for Kaito. “Oh, so you’re Minato’s tadpole,” she said, her voice losing some of its harshness. Then she glared back at Jiraiya. “That’s disgraceful! You spied on Minato-chan’s wife—your own student’s wife! You deserve every bruise you get!”

She whacked him over the head again, this time with enough force to knock him to the ground. Jiraiya fell with a loud thud, sending dust billowing around him. Both Ma and Pa hopped away to land a short distance in front of him. They looked down at Jiraiya as if unsure whether to be disappointed or furious.

“Ow! I’m sorry! I’m sorry!” Jiraiya yelped from the ground, rolling onto his back. “I wasn’t there to—look, I didn’t know it was Kushina—”

Pa shook his head. “I’m really disappointed in you, Jiraiya boy. You’ve crossed the line this time.”

Ma grabbed Jiraiya by the ear, twisting it until he yowled in pain. “Apologize to the lad right now. We thought we taught you proper manners, but it looks like you forgot them.”

“S-sorry, kid!” Jiraiya managed to say, his voice strained by the pull on his ear. “I won’t do it again, I promise!”

Up in the branches, Kaito watched with an odd mix of surprise and confusion. He felt like he was seeing a comedy show. Ma and Pa didn’t seem to be on Jiraiya’s side at all; if anything, they were more annoyed with him than willing to help him fight.

Kaito thought, 'Here I thought I could test myself against him in Sage Mode.' He couldn’t help feeling a bit let down. Part of him had wanted to see how he stacked up against Sage Jiraiya.

From what he knew, base Jiraiya was relative to Orochimaru and was stronger than old man Hiruzen during the Konoha Crush. Not to mention Orochimaru had been holding back in that fight. Sage Jiraiya would be on a whole different level, probably above prime Hiruzen and War Arc Hiruzen. Kaito had been curious to compare his current strength to that power.

Kaito sighed, raising his voice again. “Lady Shima, Lord Fukasaku, let me handle this. I promise I’ll make sure he doesn’t peep on anyone ever again once I’m done with him.” To make his point, he took out a kunai, letting it shine in the last rays of the evening sun. He didn’t plan to kill Jiraiya, but he wanted to make sure the Sannin felt some real fear.

Ma sized Kaito up. She seemed about ready to let him proceed, but then Jiraiya—who had reverted to his normal form, no longer maintaining Sage Mode—jumped to his feet in desperation.

“Come on, kid, I said I’m sorry! Cut me some slack,” Jiraiya pleaded. “I promise I won’t do it again! Just this once, let’s forget all about it. I’ll even let you sign the Toad Summoning Contract, like your father did. You’d get along great with Gamabunta, Gamahiro, and the others, I’m sure. It’s a good deal, right?”

Kaito hopped down from the branch, landing lightly on his feet. He tucked his kunai away. “No thanks,” he said coolly. “I’m already a summoner with the Shikkotsu Forest.”

Jiraiya’s eyes went wide with shock. “Wait. Tsunade let you sign the slug contract?”

Pa piped up, “Well, that’s a shame. You would have been a good toad summoner like Minato. It would’ve been nice to train you in Senjutsu the same way we trained your father.”

Ma rolled her eyes, then whacked Jiraiya on the head again. “See what you did? Now he’s not our summoner, all because of your foolishness!”

Jiraiya groaned, rubbing his sore head once more. “Give me a break, Ma. It’s not like I forced him away from the toads. I just—” He cut himself off with a sigh.

Pa turned to Kaito. “So, lad, is there anything we can do to make this easier on you so you don’t have to… finish off Jiraiya boy? He did train your father, after all.”

Ma folded her arms, her large eyes fixed on Kaito. “Yes, if there’s something we can do, let us know. As for Jiraiya, I’ll make sure he learns his lesson when we get back to Mount Myoboku.”

Kaito took a long breath, picking his words carefully. Part of him still burned with anger, but another part realized this might be the best chance he’d get to ask for something else he needed. “Yes,” he said at last, “there is something I need help with. I think you two might be able to assist me.”

Hogwarts: Neville’s Insert Chapter 28

Hogwarts: Neville’s Insert Chapter 28

Neville shrugged, setting the note back on the table. “Well, I was wondering when it might be,” he said casually before taking another bite of his sandwich. it had been over a month and they still havent been assigned thier detention yet neville thought. As he chewed, Neville couldn’t help but think, ‘Dumbledore was probably waiting for Quirrell to go after the unicorns. It made sense in a way.’

Hermione leaned over and plucked the note from Neville’s hands, reading it quickly. “Detention at eleven o’clock at night? That seems late, even for Filch,” she said, her tone tinged with concern.

Neville shrugged again, unbothered. “Filch probably thinks it’ll scare us more if it’s dark,” he replied, taking another bite of his sandwich. “Can’t imagine it’ll be anything good, though.”

Hermione’s frown deepened as she passed the note back to Neville. “Well, you’ll need to be careful,” she said, her tone serious. “Filch is bound to make it as awful as possible.”

“Not like we have a choice,” Harry muttered, folding his note back into a square and stuffing it into his pocket.

…

Neville and Harry sat by the fireplace in the Gryffindor common room, the warm glow of the flames casting flickering shadows across the walls. The room was nearly empty, save for the four of them—Neville, Harry, Hermione, and Ron.

Ron leaned back in his chair, trying to sound reassuring. “Don’t worry, mate. Filch’ll probably just have you two cleaning or something. Fred and George always end up scrubbing the trophy cabinet when they’re in trouble.”

Harry frowned, staring into the fire. “Then why do it at eleven?” he asked, his tone edged with frustration. “Honestly, I don’t care what it is as long as it’s over quickly.”

Hermione was unusually quiet, biting her lip as if debating something. Finally, she spoke. “Maybe…” She trailed off, clearly uncertain. The late hour didn’t make sense to her either, and her eyes darted nervously between Harry and Neville.

Neville already knew the answer, though he kept it to himself. The forest, he thought grimly. 'Dumbledore’s waited until now because Quirrell needs to drink unicorn blood to keep Voldemort alive.' The thought made his stomach churn. Dumbledore’s manipulations were as intricate as they were infuriating, and Neville didn’t like how much the Headmaster controlled events from the shadows.

Sighing, Neville glanced up at the clock. It was nearing eleven. He stood, brushing his robes. “Well, we’d better get going,” he said, his voice heavy with resignation.

Harry stood as well, stuffing his hands into his pockets. “Yeah. The sooner we’re done with it, the better,” he muttered, already dreading whatever awaited them.

“Be careful, you two,” Hermione said, following them to the portrait hole. Her brow furrowed with worry as she added, “Ron and I will wait for you to come back.”

Neville sighed, his face softening slightly. “Yeah, yeah. Thanks. Bye, guys.” He turned toward the entrance, bracing himself for what was to come.

“Good luck,” Ron added, waving them off.

Harry and Neville made their way down the staircases to the Entrance Hall. As they descended the final staircase, they spotted Filch and Malfoy,

Malfoy was glaring at them as Neville and Harry approached, his arms crossed and his expression full of disdain. Filch, meanwhile, gave them a creepy smile as he raised his lamp,

“Good, you’re here on time,” Filch said gruffly. “Come on, follow me.” Without waiting for a response, he turned and began leading them across the castle grounds.

As they walked, Filch launched into one of his usual tirades. “I bet you’ll think twice about breaking a school rule again, won’t you, eh?” he sneered, leering at them over his shoulder. “Oh yes... hard work and pain are the best teachers, if you ask me. It’s just a pity they let the old punishments die out. Hang you by your wrists from the ceiling for a few days—that’d teach you proper. I’ve still got the chains in my office, kept ‘em well-oiled, just in case they’re ever needed again. Right, off we go, and don’t think of running off now. It’ll be worse for you if you do.”

Neville rolled his eyes, tired of Filch’s attempts at intimidation. “Oh, that sounds like fun,” he said, his voice dripping with sarcasm. “Might just break some more school rules to try it out.”

Filch stopped abruptly, spinning around to glare at Neville. “Think you’re smart, do you?” he snapped. “I’ve seen plenty like you, boy. Let’s see if you’re still running that mouth after tonight.”

Neville yawned exaggeratedly. “Yeah, yeah, sure. Can we just get on with it?” he replied flatly. His patience was already worn thin, and the prospect of meeting Quirrellmort in the forest was far more pressing than Filch’s bluster.

Harry and Malfoy exchanged uneasy glances, clearly unsure how to react to Neville’s nonchalance. Filch grumbled under his breath but turned back around and continued leading them down the path.

The small group eventually reached Hagrid’s hut, its warm glow standing out in the darkness. A distant shout rang out: “Is that you, Filch? Hurry up, I want ter get started!”

Harry let out an audible sigh of relief at the sound of Hagrid’s voice, his shoulders relaxing slightly. Filch, on the other hand, scowled. “I suppose you think you’ll be enjoying yourself with that oaf?” he snarled at Harry. “Well, think again, boy. It’s into the forest you’re going, and I’ll be surprised if you all come out in one piece.”

At this, both Harry and Malfoy stiffened. Malfoy stopped dead in his tracks, his usual confidence evaporating. Neville could see Harry glance nervously at the dark line of trees in the distance, his face pale in the lamplight.

“The forest?” Malfoy repeated, his usual smugness replaced with a tremor of fear. “We can’t go in there at night—there’s all sorts of things in there—werewolves, I heard!”

“That’s your problem, isn’t it?” Filch said, his voice cracking with malicious glee. “Should’ve thought about those werewolves before you got yourself in trouble, shouldn’t you?”

Neville sighed heavily, rubbing his temples. ‘Honestly, that’s the dumbest thing I’ve heard all day,’ he thought. “People affected by lycanthropy only turn into werewolves on a full moon,” he said aloud, pointing up at the sky where a half-moon gleamed faintly through the clouds. “And it isn’t one, is it? Besides,” he added dryly, “do you really think any sane person would let werewolves roam freely near a castle full of teenagers? That’d be a disaster waiting to happen.”

then thought to himself, ‘Though, with how reckless Dumbledore is, who knows? He might just do that.’

Malfoy’s pale face turned slightly red, but he didn’t retort. Harry stifled a laugh beside him, and even Filch’s glee faltered momentarily at Neville’s bluntness.

From the shadows, Hagrid emerged, striding toward them with Fang at his heels. The boarhound’s tail wagged lazily, and Hagrid himself carried a massive crossbow, with a quiver of arrows slung over his broad shoulder. “Abou’ time,” Hagrid said gruffly. “I bin waitin’ fer half an hour already. All right, Harry? Neville?”

“I wouldn’t get too friendly with them, Hagrid,” Filch interjected coldly. “They’re here to be punished, after all.”

“That’s why yer late, is it?” Hagrid said, frowning as he turned his gaze to Filch. “Bin lecturin’ them, eh? ’Snot your place ter do that. Yeh’ve done yer bit—I’ll take over from here.”

Filch scowled but didn’t argue. “I’ll be back at dawn,” he said nastily, turning on his heel. As he stalked back toward the castle, his lamp bobbed in the darkness like a distant will-o’-the-wisp. “For what’s left of them,” he added, his voice faint as he disappeared into the shadows.

Malfoy, now visibly unsettled, turned to Hagrid. “I’m not going in that forest,” he said, his voice higher-pitched and tinged with panic.

Hagrid’s face darkened as he loomed over Malfoy. “Yeh are, if yeh want ter stay at Hogwarts,” he said fiercely. “Yeh’ve done wrong, and now yeh’ve got ter pay fer it.”

“But this is servant stuff!” Malfoy snapped, his tone bordering on a whine. “It’s not for students to do. I thought we’d be copying lines or something. If my father knew I was doing this, he’d—”

“—tell me that’s how it is at Hogwarts?” Hagrid growled, his voice deep and rumbling. “Copyin’ lines! What good’s that ter anyone? Yeh’ll do summat useful or yeh’ll get out. If yeh think yer father’d rather yeh were expelled, then get back off ter the castle an’ pack. Go on.”

Malfoy’s mouth opened and closed like a fish out of water, but no words came out. Neville crossed his arms and watched with mild amusement, while Harry bit back a grin. For once, Draco Malfoy had nothing to say.

Malfoy didn’t move. He glared furiously at Hagrid, his jaw tight, but after a tense moment, he dropped his gaze and muttered something under his breath.

“Right then,” said Hagrid, his tone firm. “Now, listen carefully, 'cause it’s dangerous what we’re gonna do tonight, an’ I don’t want no one takin’ risks. Follow me over here a moment.”

Sighing, Neville followed after Hagrid, his wand clutched tightly in his hand. He was on high alert, his eyes scanning the darkened treeline for any movement. The forest loomed ahead like a wall of black, the air carrying a faint, damp chill.

Hagrid led them to the very edge of the Forbidden Forest, holding his lamp high as he pointed down a narrow, winding earth track that disappeared into the thick, shadowy trees. A light breeze rustled through the underbrush, lifting their hair as they stared into the oppressive darkness.

“Look there,” said Hagrid, holding the lamp higher and illuminating a silvery trail on the ground. “See that stuff shinin’ on the ground? Silvery stuff? That’s unicorn blood. There’s a unicorn in there been hurt badly by summat. This is the second time in a week. I found one dead last Wednesday. We’re gonna try an’ find the poor thing. Might have ter put it out of its misery.”

“And what if whatever hurt the unicorn finds us first?” Malfoy asked, his voice betraying his fear despite his best efforts to sound cool.

“There’s nothin’ that lives in the forest that’ll hurt yeh if yer with me or Fang,” Hagrid reassured him. “An’ keep to the path. Right, now, we’re gonna split inter two parties an’ follow the trail in diff’rent directions. There’s blood all over the place; it must’ve bin staggerin’ around since last night at least.”

“I want Fang,” Malfoy blurted out quickly, his eyes darting nervously to the boarhound’s long, sharp teeth.

“All right,” Hagrid said, a slight smirk tugging at his lips, “but I warn yeh, he’s a coward.”

Neville, who had remained quiet so far, stopped Hagrid before the group could split. “Actually, Hagrid,” he said, his tone measured, “why don’t you take Malfoy with you? You can keep him in line, and me and Harry can handle Fang.”

Hagrid frowned thoughtfully, scratching his beard as he considered Neville’s suggestion. After a moment, he nodded. “All right then. Malfoy, yer with me. Harry, Neville, you two take Fang.” He looked at all of them, his expression serious. “Remember, if yeh find the unicorn, send up green sparks. If anyone gets into trouble, send up red sparks, an’ we’ll come find yeh. Got it?”

Neville and Harry nodded silently as they split off from Hagrid and Malfoy, heading down their own path into the forest.

Neville raised his wand. “Lumos,” he murmured, the tip of his wand illuminating their surroundings with a pale glow. “Might as well get started,” he said quietly, his eyes darting around.

Harry followed his lead, casting his own Lumos as they walked close together, the light from their wands overlapping. They followed the faint trail of unicorn blood, glistening silver under their wandlight.

They wandered the forest for over an hour, following the faint silvery trail until it abruptly ended, leaving them aimless. For the next half-hour, they walked in circles,

Finally, Fang sniffed at the ground, letting out a low whimper before leading them to a fresh trail of blood. Neville exchanged a wary glance with Harry.

Harry knelt beside a puddle of the silvery liquid, holding his wand close to it for a better look. “It’s getting thicker,” he said, his voice hushed. Tentatively, he touched the blood with his fingers and winced slightly. “It’s still warm. We must be close.”

Neville nodded, his jaw tightening as he became even more alert. His gaze swept the surrounding trees, every nerve in his body on edge.

They followed Fang deeper into the forest, their light barely cutting through the suffocating darkness. The trees grew denser, their branches tangling into a canopy that blocked out even the faint glow of the half-moon. The air felt heavier, and the stillness was deafening.

Finally, they reached a clearing. Neville stopped abruptly, his gut tightening as he took in the eerie silence. His breath caught as his worst fears were confirmed. We’re here, he thought grimly. Quirrellmort.

“Look,” Harry murmured, pointing to the center of the clearing. Lying on the ground was a large, bright white unicorn, its lifeless body glistening in the faint light.

Before Harry could say more, Neville quickly clamped a hand over his mouth. “Shh,” Neville hissed quietly, his voice barely audible. His eyes were locked on the cloaked figure crouched over the dead unicorn, its dark robes billowing slightly in the faint breeze. The sight was horrifying—like something straight out of a nightmare. The figure leaned over the unicorn’s neck, its hood obscuring its face as it drank the silvery blood.

Neville’s mind screamed a single thought: 'We need to leave. Now.' Slowly, he began stepping backward, pulling Harry with him. His movements were careful and deliberate, and his only goal was to retreat without making a sound.

But fate wasn’t on their side. Both boys tripped over a gnarled root, the sudden fall startling Fang, who let out a loud bark before bolting into the woods.

“Damn it,” Neville muttered under his breath, cursing himself as he scrambled to his feet. He grabbed Harry’s arm, pulling him up, only to see Harry clutching his forehead, his face twisted in pain. Harry’s hand covered his lightning scar, and he winced as though it were burning.

Neville’s eyes shot back to the clearing. The cloaked figure had turned toward them, as the hooded figure began advancing.

Panic surged through Neville. He raised his wand, “Diffindo!” The severing charm shot from his wand with a bright flash, slicing through the air toward Quirrellmort.

But Quirrell flicked his wand effortlessly, deflecting the Diffindo to the side. The spell struck a tree behind him, slicing it cleanly in half and The top half crashed to the ground with a deafening thud.

The figure snarled, raising its wand. “Crucio!” he spat, a jet of white light streaking toward them.

Neville reacted instinctively, shoving Harry to the side while diving in the opposite direction. The curse missed them both, hitting the ground with a burst of sparks. Scrambling to his feet, Neville raised his wand again. “Diffi—”

The curse hit him before he could finish.

Neville’s world exploded in a blinding white light as pain engulfed him, sharp and excruciating. His wand slipped from his grasp as his knees buckled, and he collapsed to the ground, screaming.

“AAAAAARRRRGGGGHHHHHH!” he cried, his body writhing uncontrollably. The pain was all-consuming.

Through the haze, he could faintly hear Harry calling his name, but the pain was too overwhelming to process anything else. All he could think was one desperate ‘Make it stop.’

Kaito Akaden Chapter 145

Kaito Akaden Chapter 145

Then he stepped into the men’s section alone. The locker room was quiet, a gentle hush broken only by the faint drip of water from somewhere in the back. Kaito glanced around and saw no one else there. He released a soft breath and moved to one of the wooden benches.

Sitting down, he covered his face with his hands for a moment, thinking about how chaotic the day had been. He’d gone from finishing a mission to asking Tsunade about removing Kakashi from ANBU, then straight into a hot spring outing with his mother, teammates, and the Hokage. He felt a bit overwhelmed, though a part of him was relieved to finally have a break.

Standing up, he mumbled, “I’m already here. Might as well soak for a few minutes.”

He reached down to grab the collar of his shirt. However, as he started to pull it over his head, he paused suddenly. A memory popped into his mind. Slowly, he lowered the shirt back down, his brows drawn together in anger.

“That bastard…” he muttered, anger flashing in his eyes.

….

A few minutes earlier, a Kaito clone sat in a nearby tree, leaning against the trunk on a thick branch. He sat with one leg folded and the other dangling, idly plucking leaves from a smaller branch and tearing them before tossing them aside.

He grumbled to himself as he did this, “Man, why am I stuck with guard duty? It’s boring. Why can’t the boss do it? He’s back in the village already. Nothing ever happens, ya know.” It was a good thing nothing happened—he didn’t actually want trouble—but doing this day in and day out was mind-numbing.

He sighed and plucked another leaf, splitting it with Wind Chakra. That’s when he sensed something with his Mind’s Eye of Kagura. He looked up at the hot spring building and saw a man crouching atop it.

His eyes narrowed, and a growl escaped his mouth. “What does he think he’s doing…?”

Jiraiya was crouched on the roof of the Konoha hot spring house, peering through a handheld telescope at the women’s side. He giggled creepily as he watched, muttering perverted comments. “Ah, just like that—turn around and show Papa those puppies, heheheh…” A thin nosebleed trickled from his nostril as he leaned forward.

Jiraiya quietly exclaimed, “Oh my, look at those… hehehe, you’re one of a kind!”
He snickered again, adjusting his telescope. “Oh my—look at that. Aren’t you a sight to behold…” Drool threatened to escape the corner of his mouth.

Kaito’s shadow clone landed behind him, looking annoyed. Despite his irritation, the clone stayed calm, especially since he could tell his mother Kushina, Hotaru, Tsunade, and Shizune were still in the changing area. They weren’t in direct view—yet. He didn’t want to make a scene, but he also had to put a stop to Jiraiya’s perverted antics.

“Hey, old man,” the clone said, tapping Jiraiya’s shoulder. “Just what do you think you’re doing?”

Without even looking back, Jiraiya brushed the clone’s hand off. “Shhh, kid, scram. I’m busy doing valuable research.”

“Research?” The clone’s eyebrow twitched. “Listen, old man, you need to leave. Now. Or—”

Jiraiya shushed him. “Go on, get lost,” he muttered irritably, then suddenly zoomed in with his telescope. Kushina and Tsunade had just come into view, stepping out of the changing room. Both wore only small towels, barely covering their shapely figures.

A creepy grin spread across Jiraiya’s face. “Oh ho, look at that. Tsunade and Kushina at the same time? What luck!” He let out an unseemly whistle. “Wow… jackpot!”

Kaito’s clone went pale with fury, anger flaring at Jiraiya’s lecherous comments. How dare he gawk at them like that... especially at my mom!

Before Jiraiya could react, he found himself violently wrapped up in glowing Chakra Chains.

“Wait—whatttttt—ahhhhhhh!” Jiraiya shouted, but was cut off when the clone teleported them both away.

….

Back in the women’s changing room…

Kushina adjusted her towel, folding it over her chest to secure it tightly. “All set! Now let’s go,” she exclaimed, glancing at the others, who were finishing up and wrapping their towels.

Kushina stepped over to Hotaru, giving her a playful smile. “Awww, you look super cute, Hotaru-chan. And those curves…” She gave Hotaru’s chest a teasing poke. “You’re so young yet so… well-developed. Kai-kun is a lucky boy, ya know!”

Hotaru’s cheeks went red as she pressed the towel more tightly against herself. “A-Aunt Kushina, please…” she mumbled, mortified.

Undeterred, Kushina giggled. “So, when are you gonna ask my son out on a date? You’d better hurry, or some other girl might snatch him away if you wait too long.”

Hotaru’s eyes dropped. “I… I don’t think he’s interested in me,” she whispered, looking embarrassed.

Tsunade, who had just finished wrapping her own towel, chimed in, “Most boys that age are only interested in training or Jutsu. But I agree with Kushina. If you like him, make a move soon. Kaito’s pretty popular—he’s the Fourth’s son, and everyone sees him as a future Hokage.”

Hotaru gave a tiny nod, though she still looked uneasy.

Kushina slipped her arm around Hotaru’s shoulders. “Oh, trust me, he’s noticed you. He’s just slow on the uptake—like his father was. He’s shy about stuff like this, believe me.”

Hotaru turned a deeper shade of red. “Y-You really think he likes me?”

“Sure do,” Kushina replied. “He’s really protective of you. He smiles a lot whenever your name comes up. He just won’t make the first move. Minato was the same way at that age.”

Hotaru lowered her gaze, a small hopeful smile forming on her lips.

“Leave the poor girl alone,” Tsunade told Kushina, though her tone was more amused than scolding.

“Oh, fine,” Kushina sighed, rolling her eyes dramatically. Then she turned her attention to Shizune. “So, Shizune, how about you? Got any special someone in mind?”

Shizune stepped back, clutching her towel. “Me? No, I—I haven’t really found anyone interesting.”

“Ah, that’s a shame,” Kushina teased. “You’re wasting your prime, you know! Leave it to me; I’ll set you up with a guy. I’m great at matchmaking.”

Tsunade walked up behind them, nodding. “I’ve been telling her to get out more,” she added with a teasing smile.

Waving her hand dismissively, Kushina said, “All right, let’s see who’s single... What about Genma-kun? Last I heard, he was still unattached. Nice guy, too.”

Shizune’s cheeks heated, and she stammered, “I—uh—this is all so sudden...”

Tsunade tapped her chin. “Genma, huh? That’s the kid who always has a senbon in his mouth. He does seem reliable.”

Kushina pushed the door open leading into the hot spring, warm steam billowing out. “Exactly, and he used to be on Minato’s guard detail. See, we can trust him. I’ll totally set you up. Sound good, Shizune?”

Shizune just gaped, unable to form a coherent response.

Kushina hummed, thinking aloud, “If not Genma, how about Kakashi-kun… But good luck getting him to show up for a date,” she grumbled, rubbing her temple. “I swear, that man’s either on a mission or sulking somewhere. He’s hopeless.”

Tsunade’s eyes flicked thoughtfully. Kaito did just ask me to help get Kakashi out of ANBU…

Before anyone could comment further, they heard a male voice—faint and panicked—echo over the hot spring walls: “Wait—whatttttt—ahhhhhhh!”

They all paused, Tsunade’s eyes narrowing. “That sounded like Jiraiya... If he’s spying on us, I’ll—”

Kushina waved her off confidently. “Relax, Tsuna-nee. Kai-kun’s got it handled. If that pervert tried anything, he’s probably already been taken care of.” She gave a wicked smirk, clearly untroubled by Jiraiya’s plight.

…..

Meanwhile…

Jiraiya slammed into the ground of a training field on the outskirts of Konoha, skidding across it from the force of the throw. The shadow clone had dispelled itself the moment they landed, tossing the old man into the dirt so the original Kaito would be notified.

Kaito appeared atop a tree where he’d placed a Hiraishin marker. He was furious. He jumped to the ground, eyes locked on Jiraiya, who was standing up and dusting himself off.

“What the hell was that about?” Jiraiya snapped, brushing debris off his clothes. “I was in the middle of vital research, and—” He stopped, realizing who he was speaking to. “Hey... You’re Minato’s brat, Kaito, right? Care to explain why you interrupted me?”

Kaito’s eyes narrowed in disgust. “You’re ‘researching’ my mother and my friends?” he hissed, fists clenching. “You perverted old bastard.”

Jiraiya scoffed, waving off the accusation. “Kid, it’s just a harmless peek. Don’t overreact—”

Kaito’s eyes dilated at the older man’s casual demeanor. Without warning, Kaito flickered in front of Jiraiya and punched him in the face.

Caught off-guard, Jiraiya took the hit and went flying before he could react. Kaito followed up with a dropkick from above, slamming Jiraiya into the ground and leaving a small crater.

Jiraiya spat out some blood and leapt back, trying to gain distance. This kid is fast, he thought. As soon as he landed, Kaito was on him again, unleashing a barrage of punches and kicks.

“Hey, calm down, kid!” Jiraiya tried to reason, struggling to dodge and block Kaito’s relentless strikes. He’s really serious. He’s trying to hurt me! Seizing an opportunity, he grabbed Kaito by the leg and tossed him back. “We can work this out—no need to fight! Calm down!”

Kaito’s body flickered, disappearing and then reappearing above Jiraiya, driving a kick into his face and sending him flying again. Jiraiya managed to land, skidding across the training ground, blood trickling from his split lip.

Straightening up, the Sannin wiped his mouth and glared. “Alright, kid, if it’s a fight you want, it’s a fight you’ll get!” He lunged forward, meeting Kaito’s own charge, but Kaito was noticeably faster, ducking and weaving before landing several counterhits.

Realizing he couldn’t keep up, Jiraiya jumped back. ‘This is insane. It’s like fighting Minato, but he’s trying to kill me!’

Forming a seal, he shouted, “Senpō: Hari Jizō!” His hair morphed, growing longer and sharper. Then it shot out as spiky needles straight at Kaito.

The needles pierced through Kaito’s form—but that form flickered and vanished. Jiraiya spun around just in time to see the real Kaito appear behind him, a massive sphere of chakra in his palm.

“Chōōdama Rasengan!” Kaito roared, slamming the gigantic Rasengan toward Jiraiya.

Jiraiya’s eyes went wide, and he quickly wrapped his hair around himself for protection. But the colossal Rasengan crashed into him, exploding with intense force. A massive crater formed where Jiraiya had been.

Some distance away, Jiraiya was behind a tree, panting. ‘That was too close. If I hadn’t known about that kid’s flicker trick, I’d be dead.’ He tried to steady his breathing. ‘He’s really out for blood. I have to—’

His thoughts were cut off when he had to dodge an Air Bullet that gouged a hole in the spot he’d just been standing.

“Oh, come on, kid!” he shouted, blocking another one of Kaito’s strikes. Kaito grabbed Jiraiya’s arm, yanking him forward to knee him in the face, then twisted and flung him into the ground.

Still in midair, Kaito launched several massive Fireballs at Jiraiya.

Jiraiya skidded, then rolled aside, barely avoiding the first Fireball. He dodged another and formed hand signs, slamming his palm onto the ground. “Earth Style: Earth Wall!” A thick slab of earth rose to block the scorching flames.

‘I have to do something or he really might kill me…’ Jiraiya thought. But he had no chance to relax—Kaito reappeared in front of him, swinging a tanto aimed at cutting him in half.

Jiraiya jerked to the side, and his hair extended, trying to wrap around Kaito. But chakra chains shot out from Kaito’s back, swatting away Jiraiya’s hair before rushing the Sannin himself. The chains impaled him through the chest—only for the impaled Jiraiya to turn into a pile of mud.

A second later, Jiraiya burst from the ground behind Kaito, a Rasengan in hand. Kaito quickly formed his own Rasengan, and the two spheres collided. Kaito’s Rasengan was larger—similar to the one Minato used to create.

Jiraiya thought the clash would cancel both Rasengan, but Kaito’s overpowered his, slamming into Jiraiya’s stomach and sending him crashing into a tree.

Jiraiya coughed up blood as he tried to stand, only for a red blade made of Lightning Chakra to pierce his left shoulder, pinning him to the tree. The electricity partially paralyzed him.

‘This kid really is going to kill me… ‘Jiraiya thought, staring at Kaito’s outstretched hand. A menacing look crossed the boy’s face. “Akaden: Eisō…” Kaito muttered, referring to the red blade.

Still able to move his right arm, Jiraiya slammed his hand onto the ground. “Summoning Jutsu!”

Kaito retracted his lightning blade rather than sever Jiraiya’s arm, leaping back. He could sense the surge of chakra. ‘He’s summoning something big.’

Jiraiya summoned Gamaken and perched atop the giant toad’s head. “Gamaken, stall the kid for a moment—we can’t outrun him. I need time to summon those two,” he said, beginning to gather Natural Energy.

Kaito landed on a nearby tree, eyeing the towering summon. ‘Damn that toad, it’s going to level the whole training ground…’

Gamaken hefted his giant sasumata, mumbling, “I’m not very graceful, but I’ll do my best,” before swinging it down at Kaito.

Kaito body-flickered aside, narrowly avoiding the massive weapon. The toad hopped backward to create distance, but Kaito chased it. When he caught up to the massive toad, he launched chakra chains from his back, binding Gamaken’s arm and the sasumata—but he hadn’t anchored the chains to the ground, allowing the huge toad to yank him along. Realizing his error, Kaito released the chains and somersaulted onto another tree. He created a shadow clone, and together they used more chakra chains—this time anchoring them to the ground—to restrain Gamaken again, successfully pinning him.

“Gamaken-san,” Kaito shouted, “I have no quarrel with you. Please leave. I’m only after that perverted old man on your head.”

“I’m sorry,” the toad replied. “But I promised to protect him. I can’t break my word.”

Kaito scowled, preparing to bite his thumb. ‘I might have to summon Katsuyu myself…’

Just then, Jiraiya spoke up from atop Gamaken. “It’s alright, Gamaken—you can leave.”

The giant toad sighed in relief. “If you insist…” He dispelled himself in a huge cloud of white smoke that filled the area.

Kaito immediately sensed Jiraiya’s chakra rising, becoming much larger than before.

Hogwarts: Neville’s Insert Chapter 27

Hogwarts: Neville’s Insert Chapter 27

Neville snorted. “Must be a record,” he said dryly. “Good thing Hermione wasn’t caught with us. That would’ve made it one hundred and fifty.”

Harry managed a weak chuckle but didn’t say anything.

When they climbed through the portrait hole into the Gryffindor common room, Hermione was waiting for them. The moment she saw Neville, she flung herself at him, wrapping him in a tight hug. “Neville!” she cried, her voice thick with emotion. “I should’ve been caught with you. I’m so sorry—I should’ve been there.”

Neville gently patted her shoulder, prying her off him. “If you’d been caught, we’d have lost even more points,” he said with a faint grin. “As it is, we’ve already lost one hundred. No need to make it worse.”

Hermione’s face crumpled slightly, but she nodded, sniffling.

Neville turned to Harry with a sarcastic smile. “Get ready, mate. We’re about to be ostracized by the rest of Gryffindor.” He wiped an imaginary tear from his cheek and added dryly, “Ah, the wonders of peer pressure.”

Harry groaned again, collapsing into an armchair by the fire. “Tomorrow’s going to be awful.”

….

Neville stood in the middle of an almost empty classroom, his wand clutched tightly in his right hand. He was winded, his chest heaving as he tried to catch his breath. Beads of sweat trickled down his temple, but he paid them no mind.

“Diffindo!” he shouted, slashing his wand toward a chair in front of him. The spell cut through it cleanly. Without pausing, he rolled to his right, springing up quickly. “Glacius!” he cast at another target, freezing a desk solid. He spun on his heels, spotting another imaginary foe, and with a sharp flick of his wand, yelled, “Expelliarmus!” Then, with a leap to his left, he rolled to the ground, coming to a stop in a crouch. “Petrificus Totalus!” The spell shot toward the final target, locking the imagined enemy in place.

Neville straightened, panting heavily. Around him lay the aftermath of his practice: chairs and desks in various states of destruction. One was sliced neatly in half, another encased in ice, and a few were toppled over, bearing the marks of his improvised training session.

“I really need some moving targets to practice with,” Neville muttered to himself, wiping the sweat from his forehead. He dropped to the floor, sitting cross-legged to catch his breath. The stillness of the abandoned classroom seemed to press in around him as he gathered his thoughts.

Neville had been practicing rapid spellcasting, chaining one spell to another while adding imaginary dodges to simulate battle conditions. It was the closest he could get to preparing for a real fight. He wished he could use the Room of Requirement, but with Voldemort’s presence at Hogwarts, it was far too risky. The last thing he needed was to draw attention to himself. So, he made do with what he had—this forgotten classroom, filled with old chairs and desks that no one would miss.

Pulling himself to his feet, Neville pointed his wand at one of the broken chairs. “Reparo,” he said, and the scattered wood pieces flew together, mending seamlessly until the chair looked as good as new. He moved around the room, casting the charm repeatedly. Each ruined desk and chair returned to its former state under the soft glow of his magic.

Satisfied with the results, Neville checked his watch. His stomach sank as he saw the time. “4:40,” he muttered. “Shit, I’m late.” Shoving his wand into his pocket, he grabbed his bag from one of the tables and slung it over his shoulder. Without another glance at the room, he bolted out the door, his footsteps echoing in the empty corridor.

As he made his way to the Gryffindor common room, Neville’s thoughts drifted. It had been a month since they’d been caught out after curfew. For the first few days, nothing much had happened. But it hadn’t taken long for rumors to spread like wildfire. The whispers, the glares, and the pointed comments had made it clear that the fallout was far from over.

At first, Gryffindors passing the giant hourglasses that recorded the house points thought there’d been a mistake. How could they possibly be a hundred points down from the day before? Whispers broke out among the students, confusion quickly turned to outrage.

It didn’t take long for the story to spread like wildfire: Harry Potter, the famous Harry Potter, their hero of two Quidditch matches, had cost them all those points—him and another first-year boy. The two of them had become the most hated students in Gryffindor almost overnight. The anger wasn’t limited to their own house, either. Even Ravenclaws and Hufflepuffs had turned on them, furious that Gryffindor’s chances of unseating Slytherin in the House Cup had been dashed.

The first few days after the rumors started were awful. Wherever Harry and Neville went, they were met with glares, whispers, and open insults. Nobody bothered to lower their voices as they hurled comments like:

“Great going, Potter!”
“Longbottom, you’re a bloody disgrace to Gryffindor!”
“Maybe they should just kick you both out.”

The Slytherins, of course, were having the time of their lives. They jeered and cheered whenever Harry or Neville passed by, often whistling sarcastically and calling out, “Thanks, Potter, we owe you one!” or “Good job, Longbottom—don’t let the door hit you on the way out!”

Unlike when the rumors about the troll incident had circulated, Neville bore the brunt of Gryffindor’s anger. Harry still had a loyal circle of supporters—Ron, Hermione, and a few others who admired his reputation as the Boy Who Lived. But Neville didn’t have that luxury. For him, the isolation was absolute.

When he was alone, things got worse. He’d been cornered more than once by angry Gryffindors looking to vent their frustrations. One time, someone hit him square in the face with a pie, the custard blinding him as he stumbled down a few stairs. Fortunately, he’d only been on the fourth step and escaped with nothing more than bruised dignity.

During one of their study sessions in the corner of the Gryffindor common room, Ron tried his best to lift Harry’s spirits. “They’ll all forget this in a few weeks,” he said, leaning back in his chair. “Fred and George have lost loads of points in their time, and people still like them.”

Harry sat slumped over his parchment, a deep frown creasing his face. “They’ve never lost a hundred and fifty points in one go, though, have they?” he replied miserably.

“Well—no,” Ron admitted after a moment’s hesitation.

Sitting nearby, Neville didn’t bother joining the conversation. He kept his head down, focused on his notes. What was the point of chiming in? No matter how much they talked about it, nothing would change the way their housemates looked at them now.

Nearby, Neville sat quietly, scribbling in his notebook. He didn’t bother to join the conversation. What was the point? The damage had already been done, and words wouldn’t change how the rest of the house felt about them.

For Harry, the shame of it all was unbearable. He was so ashamed of himself that earlier that week,

Neville had rolled his eyes when Harry recounted the incident. ‘Harry and his resolutions,’ Neville thought with a sigh. Harry had sworn not to meddle in anything that didn’t concern him, but Neville knew better. ‘It’s only a matter of time before he’s back to sticking his nose where it doesn’t belong.’

harry gone to Oliver Wood and offered to resign from the Quidditch team. He’d hoped it might ease some of the resentment from his teammates, but Neville had warned him it wouldn’t go as planned.

As usual, Neville had been right.

“Resign?” Wood had thundered, his voice echoing through the empty corridor. “What good’ll that do? How are we supposed to get any points back if we can’t win at Quidditch?” Wood’s frustration had been palpable, and Harry had left the meeting red-faced and defeated.

In fact, the entire Gryffindor house had stopped talking to them. Even the first years—Seamus, Dean, Parvati, and Lavender—had quietly distanced themselves from Neville and Harry. There were no outright confrontations or insults, just a cold, deliberate silence that felt even worse. They acted as though the two boys didn’t exist, and it was suffocating.

The only ones who still spoke to them were Ron and Hermione. Neville was actually glad he’d thought to drape the Invisibility Cloak over Hermione that night, shielding her from being caught. If she had been, she’d be suffering the same ostracization, and Neville didn’t think she would have coped with it as well as they had. Even so, the ordeal had changed her. Hermione no longer raised her hand in class or challenged the professors. She kept her head down, quietly doing her work and drawing as little attention to herself as possible. It was a stark contrast to the confident, eager Hermione he’d first met.

Even Professor McGonagall was sharper with them. She wasn’t outright cruel, but her patience had clearly worn thin. Her tone was curt, her reprimands harsher than usual, and she seemed to hold Harry and Neville to a stricter standard than the rest of the class.

Neville, however, didn’t care whether the other students spoke to him or not. The cold shoulders and glares didn’t bother him as much as the sheer stupidity of the situation. All this fuss over the bloody House Cup? The winning house got nothing tangible—just some decorations in the Great Hall for a few days. In Neville’s opinion, the entire house system was idiotic. Sure, it encouraged competition, but it also bred animosity between the houses, creating divisions that Voldemort had exploited to build his army. Cooperation would make Hogwarts stronger, but instead, they clung to this outdated system that only encouraged rivalries.

Reaching the Fat Lady’s portrait, Neville muttered the password and stepped into the Gryffindor common room. As soon as he entered, several students turned to glare at him. He met their gazes briefly before turning away, ignoring them entirely. Their judgmental looks didn’t faze him anymore.

He made his way to the far corner of the room, where Ron and Hermione were sitting with their books spread out before them. Both were engrossed in their work.

Neville dropped his bag onto the floor and slid into the chair beside Hermione. “I see you two started without me, huh?” he said, his tone light as he pulled his Astronomy book from his bag.

Hermione looked up from her notes, her brows furrowed in annoyance. “You’re late,” she said sharply. “We agreed to meet here at five. Where have you been?”

Neville smiled awkwardly, scratching the back of his head. “Yeah, sorry about that. I, uh, lost track of time practicing spells,” he admitted, flipping open his book to the chapter they were revising.

Hermione sighed, clearly still annoyed but choosing not to press the matter. She turned back to her parchment, her quill scratching away as she resumed her work. Final exams were only a week away, and the pressure was palpable.

Just as they settled into studying, Harry burst into the common room, looking winded. He made his way over and plopped down in the seat beside Ron, brushing his messy hair out of his eyes.

“What took you so long, mate?” Ron asked, raising an eyebrow.

Harry leaned in, lowering his voice to a whisper. “I was walking back from the library,” he began, glancing around to ensure no one was eavesdropping. “I heard someone whimpering in a classroom up ahead. As I got closer, I realized it was Quirrell’s voice. He was saying, ‘No—no—not again, please—’ like someone was threatening him.”

Ron and Hermione exchanged startled looks, but Harry continued. “I crept closer and heard him sob, ‘All right—all right—’ Then Quirrell came hurrying out of the classroom, straightening his turban. He looked pale—like he’d been crying—and didn’t even notice me standing there. As soon as his footsteps faded, I looked into the room. It was empty, but there was a door at the other end, slightly open.”

Harry hesitated for a moment, then admitted, “I was halfway toward it before I remembered my promise not to meddle anymore. But…” He paused, his expression darkening. “I’d bet twelve Sorcerer’s Stones that Snape had just left the room. Quirrell looked like he’d finally caved.”

Neville, who had been flipping through his Astronomy book, rolled his eyes at Harry’s dramatic retelling. Quirrell’s probably crying because Voldemort tortured him for failing to get the Stone, Neville thought dryly. He didn’t bother voicing his opinion, knowing Harry wouldn’t listen.

“Snape’s done it, then!” Ron exclaimed, his voice loud enough that Neville winced and glanced toward the rest of the common room. “If Quirrell’s told him how to break his Anti-Dark Force spell—”

“There’s still Fluffy, though,” Hermione interjected, her tone thoughtful.

“Maybe Snape’s figured out how to get past Fluffy without asking Hagrid,” Ron suggested. His eyes lit up with a familiar spark of excitement. “I bet there’s a book somewhere in here about how to get past a giant three-headed dog. So what do we do, Harry?”

Before Harry could answer, Hermione cut in firmly. “Go to Dumbledore. That’s what we should have done ages ago. If we try anything ourselves, we’ll be expelled for sure.”

"But we’ve got no proof!" said Harry, frustration evident in his voice. "Quirrell’s too scared to back us up. Snape’s only got to say he doesn’t know how the troll got in on Halloween and that he was nowhere near the third floor—who do you think they’ll believe? Him or us? It’s no secret we hate him. Dumbledore’ll just think we made it up to get him sacked. Filch wouldn’t help us if his life depended on it—he’s too friendly with Snape. The more students that get thrown out, the better, as far as he’s concerned. And don’t forget, we’re not even supposed to know about the Stone or Fluffy. That’ll take a lot of explaining.”

Neville didn’t look up from his work, flipping a page in his Astronomy book as he spoke. “Even if we had proof, it’d be a waste of time. I’m telling you, the Stone must be a fake. There’s no way it’s actually here in Hogwarts. Only an idiot would place something that important in a school full of children. We’re wasting our time thinking about that stupid Stone.”

Hermione glanced between Neville and Harry, clearly considering Neville’s point, but Ron frowned, unconvinced. “If we just do a bit of poking around—”

“No,” Harry said firmly, cutting Ron off. “We’ve done enough poking around.” He pulled a map of Jupiter toward him and focused on learning the names of its moons, clearly done with the conversation.

….

The following morning, Neville, Hermione, Harry, and Ron sat at the far end of the Gryffindor table, away from the rest of their housemates. It had become their norm—no one wanted to sit near them, and they preferred the quiet anyway.

Neville took a bite of his bacon sandwich, glancing up occasionally as he listened to the soft rustle of Hermione flipping through the Daily Prophet beside him. As usual, she was eating toast with one hand while scanning the paper with the other. Across the table, Harry and Ron picked at their breakfasts, speaking in low voices.

Just then, two folded paper planes glided through the air toward them, landing neatly in front of Neville and Harry. The planes unfolded themselves, revealing identical notes written in Professor McGonagall’s neat handwriting.

Neville picked up the note, scanning the contents:

Your detention will take place at eleven o’clock tonight. Meet Mr. Filch in the Entrance Hall.
Signed, Professor McGonagall.

He glanced up at Harry, who was already looking at him, holding his own note. Wordlessly, Neville raised his parchment. “You got the same?” he asked.

Harry nodded, his expression one of resignation.

Neville shrugged, setting the note back on the table. “Well, I was wondering when it might be,” he said casually before taking another bite of his sandwich. it had been over a month and they still havent been assigned thier detention yet neville thought. As he chewed, Neville couldn’t help but think, ‘Dumbledore was probably waiting for Quirrell to go after the unicorns. It made sense in a way.’

Hermione leaned over and plucked the note from Neville’s hands, reading it quickly. “Detention at eleven o’clock at night? That seems late, even for Filch,” she said, her tone tinged with concern.

Neville shrugged again, unbothered. “Filch probably thinks it’ll scare us more if it’s dark,” he replied, taking another bite of his sandwich. “Can’t imagine it’ll be anything good, though.”

Hermione’s frown deepened as she passed the note back to Neville. “Well, you’ll need to be careful,” she said, her tone serious. “Filch is bound to make it as awful as possible.”

“Not like we have a choice,” Harry muttered, folding his note back into a square and stuffing it into his pocket.

Kaito Akaden Chapter 144

Kaito Akaden Chapter 144

Kaito nodded and asked, “When can we start?”

“Not so fast, brat,” Tsunade interrupted. “I can’t have you leave on a training trip right now. The village is in a precarious spot. We just cleaned up after that incident, and we have missions piling up. I can’t spare you going off to Shikkotsu Forest for training just yet.”

Kaito tilted his head. “Huh…”

Tsunade nodded again. She leaned forward, elbows on her knees. “Right now, I need every Jonin in the village to take on high-level missions. The village took a hit, morale is shaky, and as the new Hokage, I have to rebuild trust and stability.”

Kaito’s brow furrowed. “Huh… but I’m a Chūnin, not a Jonin.”

She cut him off with a wry grin. “A Chūnin, huh? Well, that’s about to change. As one of my first acts as Hokage, I’m promoting you to Jōnin. You’re far too skilled to remain a mere Chūnin. I need you on higher-level missions, so congratulations,” she added with a smirk, crossing her legs. “You’re a Jōnin now, as of today.”

…

The sun hung high over Konoha, bathing the bustling streets in bright, warm light. Villagers hurried about, stopping at market stalls, chatting in small groups, and greeting passing shinobi. It had been six months since Tsunade had taken office as the Fifth Hokage, and the village had largely recovered from the earlier attacks. Morale was high, and the plan to better integrate the Uchiha clan into the main divisions of Konoha was going smoothly. People seemed happier these days, and there was a lighter atmosphere with Tsunade as their hokage.

Inside the Hokage’s office, the mood was a bit more serious. Kaito stood next to Hotaru, both looking a little worn from their latest mission. They had just returned to the village after a full week away, and their clothes still showed signs of travel—dust clung to their boots, and there was a tiredness around their eyes.

“Lady Tsunade,” Hotaru began politely, bowing her head. “We managed to retrieve the hostage without them getting hurt, and we escorted her to the hotel where she’ll be staying.”

Tsunade, sitting behind her desk, nodded. She had a thick file open in front of her. “That’s good to hear,” she said, scanning what looked like a mission report. “The Daimyo of the Land of Bears will be happy to hear that his niece is safe. Well done, both of you.” She placed the report on top of another stack of papers and gave a small smile. “You two have been on a roll. You have the highest mission completion rate since I took charge.”

Kaito let out a low grumble under his breath and muttered, “Because you are a slavedriver you keep sending us on back-to-back missions…”

Tsunade’s eyes narrowed as she looked at him. “Did you say something, brat?” she asked, raising an eyebrow. Her tone was firm, but not entirely unkind.

Kaito straightened, quickly masking his annoyance. “No, nothing,” he said, trying to sound more cheerful. “I said that we’re happy to serve you.”

Tsunade leaned back in her chair, smirking just a little. “Good to hear,” she replied, looking at some documents on her desk. “Now, I have another mission for you two. There’s a huge backlog right now, and we’re short on people to handle them.”

Hearing that, both Kaito and Hotaru paled, alarm flitting across their faces. They had barely caught their breath from the last mission. Hotaru glanced worriedly at Kaito, then took a tiny step forward. “Lady Tsunade,” she began nervously, “may we… may we take a break before leaving on another mission?” She swallowed hard, her hands fidgeting at her sides.

Tsunade sighed dramatically and put on a mock frown. “Ah, I was just about to assign you to another mission,” she said, her voice full of feigned disappointment. She even placed the back of her hand against her forehead for effect. Then, after a long pause, she waved her hand in resignation. “Fine, fine. You both can take a break. Now get out of here before I change my mind.”

Hotaru wasted no time in bowing. “Thank you, Lady Tsunade!” she said quickly. She nudged Kaito, urging him to follow, and began moving toward the door in a hurry, eager to escape before Tsunade decided to pile on more work.

But as Hotaru reached the threshold, she noticed that Kaito wasn’t with her. Turning, she saw him still standing in front of Tsunade’s desk, looking thoughtful. His eyes were focused on the floor. “Kai-kun?” she asked, confused.

Tsunade, who had picked up a few papers to continue working, looked up again. “What’s up, brat?” she asked, her tone blunt but curious. “Need something else?”

Kaito slowly scratched the back of his head, looking a bit embarrassed. He forced a small smile. “Yeah, I have a request,” he said quietly.

Tsunade’s eyes flickered with interest. She set the paper in her hand on the desk, leaning back in her chair. Her face turned serious, and she crossed her arms. “A request, huh?” she said. “I hope it’s not something that could kill you, like the last time you wanted to learn Senjutsu.”

Kaito raised his hands quickly. “No, no, nothing like that,” he said. “This is about… Kakashi.”

“Kakashi?” Tsunade repeated, leaning forward slightly. “What about him?”

Taking a breath, Kaito lifted his gaze, meeting Tsunade’s eyes. “Could you remove Kakashi from ANBU?” he asked. His voice carried a hint of urgency, and it was clear this request mattered to him.

Tsunade’s eyebrows shot up in confusion. “Why would you want me to do that?”

Kaito’s expression grew more serious. “I don’t think ANBU is helping him,” he said. “He should never have been put there in the first place. I once asked Dad why he placed Kakashi in ANBU, and he told me he really hadn’t known how to deal with Kakashi after… well after Rin died.”

Kaito sighed, looking down at the floor. “The Third Hokage recommended it as a way to keep Kakashi busy, but it wasn’t the right call. Dad regretted it. He told me he planned to remove Kakashi from ANBU and train him personally—like he did before—after Naruto was born. But… ya know what happened.”

Sighing, Kaito ran a hand through his hair. “Kakashi had a difficult life—first his father, then his team, one by one. He’s gotten into this mindset that if he gets too close to people, he’ll end up losing them, ya know? Mom’s been trying to help him—inviting him over for dinners at our place, setting him up on dates, and all that—but he’s always away on missions. He’s blocking out his social life, trying to drown himself in work so he’s too busy to focus on what’s happening around him. He’s my friend, and I want him to be happy, ya know? I think taking him off ANBU and making him spend more time with his friends will help him.”

Kaito had wanted to ask Tsunade this before, but with how busy he’d been over the past six months, it slipped his mind. And what he said was true: Kakashi was being self-destructive. Ever since Kaito told him that the masked man was Obito, Kakashi had become more focused and kept on training—but at the same time, he’d gotten more depressed and withdrawn.

Hotaru looked sad upon hearing that.

Tsunade pushed her chair back and stood, walking to the front of the desk. She leaned against it, crossing her arms under her chest as she studied Kaito’s face. “That’s a good reason.” she said, closing her eyes briefly. “But Kakashi is very important to the ANBU. I get what you’re saying, though. The kid has emotional baggage from the Third Shinobi War, yet another thing that bastard caused, sending children barely old enough into combat.”

 She paused, thinking about the scars from the Third Shinobi War and the number of children who had been forced to grow up too quickly. She let out a tired breath and massaged her forehead. “I’ll think about it, kid. I understand your point, but I can’t just pull him out without planning.” She opened her eyes again, then arched an eyebrow. “I’m surprised you didn’t say anything about your other friend, Itachi.”

Kaito shrugged. “Itachi’s different,” he explained, voice quieter now. “He’s better suited for ANBU than for normal squads. He likes pushing himself, and ANBU is an environment where he can do that in a controlled way. Itachi also… well, he’s not in that same dark place Kakashi is. To be honest,” he added, sighing, “I don’t think kids should graduate early in general, ya know? It causes all sorts of problems later.”

Before Tsunade could reply, the office door burst open. It slammed against the wall, and everyone turned just in time to see Kushina stride in, her long red hair swaying. She was dragging Shizune by the arm, and Shizune seemed torn between embarrassment and a sense of duty.

“Hey, Tsuna-nee!” Kushina said loudly. “Come on, let’s get going already, you know!” She flashed a big smile, clearly in a rush.

Shizune, looking apologetic, gave Tsunade a quick bow. “I’m sorry, Lady Tsunade,” she said, still trying to keep up with Kushina’s pace. “She just… wouldn’t take no for an answer.”

Kushina blinked in surprise when she realized Kaito and Hotaru were in the room. “Kai-kun! Hotaru-chan!” she shouted, letting go of Shizune to rush forward. She swept both teens up in a tight hug. “You’re back! I missed you two!”

Kaito managed a smile, returning the hug. “Hey, Mom,” he said, his tone softening at her enthusiasm.

Hotaru giggled, hugging Kushina in return. “Good to see you too, Aunt Kushina,” she said kindly.

Kushina let go, stepping back to look at the pair. “Did you just get back? Oh my, you both must be starving. You look so thin!” She glanced between them, her warm eyes filled with concern.

“Yeah, we just arrived,” Kaito said, rubbing his neck. “But, Mom, what are you doing here?”

A cough from Tsunade snapped Kushina’s attention back to the Hokage. Tsunade looked annoyed, arms folded. “Kushina,” she said, “I was still working, you know.”

Kushina scratched the back of her head, laughing sheepishly. “Ah, sorry, Tsuna-nee,” she said. “You were taking so long, and I got tired of waiting.”

Shaking her head, Tsunade sighed. “Fine,” she said, straightening up from leaning against the desk. “I was getting tired anyway.” With a shrug, she formed a quick seal, creating a Shadow Clone that took her spot in the chair. The clone picked up a pen and began signing documents, letting the original Tsunade escape. “All right, let’s go,” she said, turning to leave.

Kushina brightened, then looked at Kaito and Hotaru with a grin. “How about you two come with us to the hot spring?” she asked. “I used to go right after missions, and it helped me relax so much. After a whole week out there, you must need a good soak!”

Hotaru put a finger to her chin and thought for a moment. “If… if I won’t be intruding, I’d like that,” she answered quietly. She glanced at Kaito to see what he would say.

Kaito shook his head. “You guys go ahead,” he said. “I’m hungry, so I might look for something to eat first.”

“Come on, Kai-kun!” Kushina said, throwing an arm around his shoulders and pulling him close. “You should relax once in a while, you know!.” She leaned in, lowering her voice so only he could hear. “Besides,” she teased, “you might get a peek at Hotaru-chan… or maybe you prefer an older woman like Tsuna-nee or Shizune, hmm?”

Kaito’s face turned red. “Mom!” he hissed, eyes wide. “I’m not a pervert,” he whispered, trying not to let Hotaru overhear. “I’d never do that.”

Kushina just giggled, clearly enjoying how easy it was to fluster him. “Well, then it’s settled!” she declared loudly, pulling him by the shoulders. “We’re going to the hot springs!”

Ever since Kushina noticed he wasn’t making any moves on Hotaru, she’d been trying to get a reaction out of him whenever possible, seizing every opportunity to tease him at every turn.

Hotaru couldn’t help but giggle as she watched the mother-and-son duo. She knew Kushina liked to tease Kaito about her and about everything else. With a light shrug, she followed them out of the office.

Tsunade watched them leave and let out a long sigh, rolling her eyes a bit. “Might as well go with them before they get too far,” she told Shizune, who nodded quickly. They both left the office, leaving the Shadow Clone behind to tackle the stack of paperwork.

….

Soon, they arrived at the hot springs. The building itself was tucked behind tall wooden fences, with a sign at the front marking the separate entrances for men and women. The smell of hot mineral water drifted in the air. It was calm and inviting, a perfect place to unwind after a string of tough missions.

Outside the entrance, they split up by gender. Hotaru and Kushina—along with Tsunade and Shizune—went to the women’s section. Before they disappeared through the sliding door, Kushina couldn’t resist one more jab at her son. She called over her shoulder, “Don’t you dare peek, Kai-kun!”

Kaito groaned, his face heating up again. “Mom…” he muttered under his breath.

Then he stepped into the men’s section alone. The locker room was quiet, a gentle hush broken only by the faint drip of water from somewhere in the back. Kaito glanced around and saw no one else there. He released a soft breath and moved to one of the wooden benches.

Sitting down, he covered his face with his hands for a moment, thinking about how chaotic the day had been. He’d gone from finishing a mission to asking Tsunade about removing Kakashi from ANBU, then straight into a hot spring outing with his mother, teammates, and the Hokage. He felt a bit overwhelmed, though a part of him was relieved to finally have a break.

Standing up, he mumbled, “I’m already here. Might as well soak for a few minutes.”

He reached down to grab the collar of his shirt. However, as he started to pull it over his head, he paused suddenly. A memory popped into his mind. Slowly, he lowered the shirt back down, his brows drawn together in anger.

“That bastard…” he muttered, anger flashing in his eyes.

Kaito Akaden Poll

Should minato be revived?

Kaito Akaden Chapter 143

Kaito Akaden Chapter 143

Tsunade rubbed her temple, thinking it over. “Where is his family now? They couldn’t have stayed in the village if Danzo was after them.”

“I relocated them to Hachō Village,” Kaito answered. “But now that Danzo and the Third Hokage’s old influences are no longer a problem, can they return to Konoha?”

Tsunade let out a slow breath. “If Mukai keeps his end of the deal and continues spying on the Akatsuki, then yes, I don’t see why they can’t return. It might actually give us an advantage—having him closer to home. Who else knows about this arrangement?”

“Just me and Itachi,” Kaito said, “and now you.”

Tsunade nodded, looking tired but resolute. “Alright. Anything else I need to know?” she asked, a hint of dry humor in her tone.

Kaito scratched the back of his neck. “it’s more of a request.”

Raising an eyebrow, Tsunade leaned back. “A request? What do you want, brat?”

Kaito met her gaze seriously. “I want to learn Senjutsu.”

….

Tsunade leaned back on the couch, her expression utterly blank as she regarded the boy. “You want to learn Senjutsu?” she repeated, as though the very words were perplexing.

Kaito nodded, resolute. “Yes. I’d like to learn Senjutsu,” he clarified, meeting her gaze without hesitation. “Could you ask your summons if she’d be willing to teach me?”

Tsunade’s lips formed a tight line. She leaned back against the couch and crossed her arms. “Why Senjutsu, brat?” she asked. “You do realize learning Senjutsu isn’t something you can pick up like a simple Taijutsu or Ninjutsu. Jiraiya has spent over twenty years studying it, and he still hasn’t fully mastered it. Honestly, there’s only one person I know of who truly did—and that was my grandfather, the First. And even that comes from stories I heard as a kid. If it were easy, half the shinobi in Konoha might know how to do it by now. So, why do you want Senjutsu so badly?”

Kaito closed his eyes and thought of the night he received the memories of the shadow clone—how he felt he could do anything until he realized how much he had lost that day: his mother Kushina, his brother Naruto, and even his adopted sister Karin. He remembered how helpless his clone was, watching them get hit by that Fire Style jutsu. He clenched his fists at his sides. “That night proved I’m not strong enough. I wasn’t strong enough. My family only survived because they were lucky,” he said quietly. “I don’t ever want to feel that helpless again. If I’m going to protect the people I care about, I need to be stronger. Senjutsu is a way to get there.”

Tsunade eyed him for a moment. Finally, she let out an exasperated sigh, pinching the bridge of her nose. “Listen, brat,” she said, her voice softening despite her blunt words, “you shouldn’t blame yourself for what happened. It’s not always about personal strength. Sometimes the world just tosses you into a storm you can’t control. But let me make something clear: you are extremely talented—maybe more so than even your father was at your age. Some might say you’re the most talented shinobi Konoha’s ever produced. But all the talent in the world won’t matter if you don’t live long enough to use it. Senjutsu is dangerous. Most who tried to learn it either failed or ended up dead. Are you sure you still want to do this?”

Kaito met Tsunade’s eyes. “I know it’s risky,” he admitted. “I also know Dad was the only other person who managed to learn Senjutsu. He told me it was the hardest training he had ever done. But I still want to try.”

Tsunade sighed aloud, rubbing the bridge of her nose. She knew she wouldn’t be able to convince him otherwise. Then, without warning, she uncrossed her legs and leaned back into the couch. “Alright, I’ll ask Katsuyu if she’s up for this. But I’m warning you now: if she says no, that’s the end of it. You’re not going to pester me about it again, got it?”

Kaito bowed his head just slightly. “I understand.”

“Good,” she muttered. She stood up, then bit down on her thumb. A thin rivulet of blood appeared where her teeth broke the skin. “Stand back a little,” she ordered, glancing at Kaito and then at the floor between them. She quickly formed a series of hand signs.

“Summoning Jutsu,” Tsunade declared, pressing her palm onto the floor.

A plume of thick white smoke erupted, momentarily obscuring everything in front of her. When it dissipated, a slug about the size of a large dinner plate sat there. Its top half was a pale blue and the bottom half, white.

“Lady Tsunade,” the slug greeted, its voice calm and polite. “It’s good to see you. How may I help you?” Almost immediately, it noticed the boy standing nearby. “Oh my, I almost forgot my manners. Hello. I am Katsuyu, Lady Tsunade’s personal summon. It’s a pleasure to make your acquaintance.”

“It’s nice to meet you too, Lady Katsuyu,” Kaito said, bowing respectfully. “My name is Kaito Uzumaki.”

Tsunade wasted no time. She cut right to the chase, gesturing toward Kaito. “Katsuyu, I summoned you because this brat here wants to learn Senjutsu. I’d like to know if you’d be willing to teach him.”

Katsuyu’s antenna-like eyes swung back toward Tsunade. “You want me to teach him Senjutsu?” she asked, as if to confirm she had heard correctly.

“That’s right,” Tsunade said. “He’s adamant about it. He insisted he wants to learn.”

Katsuyu paused, shifting her gaze between Tsunade and Kaito thoughtfully. “Hmm,” she murmured after a moment. “He does seem to possess a large chakra reserve, something of a requirement for Senjutsu. But I have to remind you that there has only been one successful Senjutsu user from the Shikkotsu Forest—your late grandfather was the last, my lady.” Katsuyu’s gaze settled on Kaito. “Are you certain you want to learn it, Kaito-kun? If you fail, there is no reversing the effects. Nature Energy isn’t something you can treat lightly. Even if you have the necessary chakra to sustain it, one misstep might be fatal.”

Kaito thought, So I was right then. Hashirama was a slug sage—he learned Senjutsu from here. he nodded and asked can you explain what senjutsu is, i know the general expalination.

Katsuyu gave an approving nod. her voice was calm. “First, to become a Senjutsu user, you must learn to sense Natural Energy. It’s the energy that flows through every living thing in this world—through every tree, every blade of grass. To enter Sage Mode, you must harmonize this energy with your own chakra. If you draw too little, you won’t succeed in transforming. But if you draw too much…” She paused, letting the severity of the warning settle in. “…your body will dissolve into liquid, and you’ll become one with the forest permanently.”

Kaito nodded, already knowing that. “So how exactly do I sense this Natural Energy?” he asked.

Kaito thought, I wonder if it’s different than what they teach in Mount Myōboku? I know the snakes’ Sage training is different from the toads’.

Katsuyu gave a slight bob of her head. “To sense Nature Energy, you must first become one with nature. That means you must learn how to sit perfectly still and clear your mind until you can feel the energy flowing around you. Like a rock or a plant, you must quietly observe the life around you.”

So it’s the same as the toads then, Kaito thought, nodding. “So I’d have to learn how to become one with nature and remain perfectly still… That could take a while. How long before I manage to even sense Nature Energy?”

“That depends entirely on you,” Katsuyu explained. “Some learners can spend years, others less. However, there is a way to speed up the process. I can secrete a special substance that helps your body absorb Nature Energy more easily, giving you a sense of what you’ll be feeling for. It could shorten the training time, but it also carries an added risk. If you lose control—if your concentration slips even a fraction—you could end up dissolving. Of course, if I’m near you, I can mitigate that by siphoning off the excess Nature Energy until you gain experience. But it’s still dangerous.”

“It’s similar to the toad oil,” Kaito said with a frown, a thoughtful expression crossing his face. “I see… So there’s a faster method, but it also increases the risks.”

I wonder if I can have shadow clones guarding Mom and Naruto, because I remember Naruto could have more than two clones when he was training, Kaito thought to himself. He ran a hand through his hair and continued, “Can I have a shadow clone or two around?”

Katsuyu gave an almost apologetic shake of her body. “Maintaining shadow clones would divide your concentration, Kaito-kun. To learn Senjutsu, you must have unwavering focus on gathering Nature Energy properly. If your mind is split between clones, you’re far more likely to slip up and absorb too much. That could end… badly.”

Kaito lowered his head, trying not to grimace. I really can’t leave Mom and Naruto without guards, he thought. But if I can’t keep a shadow clone active to watch them…

Tsunade, who had returned to the couch, observed his troubled expression. “Brat,” she said, her tone softer than usual, “if you’re worried about leaving your family unprotected, don’t be. They’ll be fine. You can’t guard them every second of your life. Besides, you’ve got the Hiraishin—if something does go wrong, you can teleport to them in a heartbeat.”

Kaito exhaled, relief and lingering concern warring on his features. “I suppose that’s true. Still… I just don’t want what happened that night to happen again.”

Tsunade turned to Kaito. “So, do you still want to learn Senjutsu?”

Kaito nodded and closed his eyes, thinking,’ I need to learn to use Nature Energy. I know Sage Mode can be as strong as EMS if fully mastered. If I’m to keep up with Obito, I need to take the risk. And besides, if Naruto was able to learn it within a week then i can as well. plus, if I’m going to heal Mom, I need to master senjutsu. I could always learn from the toads, but I don’t know where that bastard is right now, and if possible, I don’t want to spend time with him—he might think I’m the Child of Prophecy or something. Nah, I’ll let Naruto sign the toad contract like canon.’

Opening his eyes, Kaito looked back at the slug. “I understand the dangers. But I also know I need to do this. The night before showed me how close I came to losing my family. I want to protect them—and everyone else I care about. Please, Lady Katsuyu, teach me.”

Tsunade gave a slight nod, acknowledging Kaito’s determination. “You heard him. He’s not going to take no for an answer,” she said with a mild scoff, though a small, reluctant smile tugged at the corner of her lips.

“Well,” Katsuyu replied softly, turning fully to face the boy, “to train in Senjutsu with me, you’d first need to become my summoner. That means you have to sign the Shikkotsu Forest summoning contract. Lady, if that is okay with you, Lady Tsunade?”

Tsunade raised a hand dismissively, waving it through the air. “He can sign it if he wants. I have no objection.”

Katsuyu secreted a large scroll. The scroll rolled onto the floor in front of her with a heavy thump, appearing far too big to have fit inside her small body. “Kaito-kun, if you would sign your name in blood, that will seal the contract,” Katsuyu explained.

Kaito nodded. He glanced at Tsunade, who took the scroll from Katsuyu’s side and set it carefully on the ground, unfurling it so that its length stretched out.

Kaito took in the sight. There were multiple names, many of which had faded or grayed out with age. His eyes trailed to the only name still vibrant: Senju Tsunade. Beside her name were multiple others that were grayed out, most of them from the Senju Clan. One in particular caught his eye: Senju Hashirama.

Kaito took a kunai from his pouch, pressing the tip to his thumb until a bead of blood welled up. Then he smeared it across his fingertips, quickly writing “Uzumaki Kaito” in neat characters beside Tsunade’s name. Finally, he placed his bloody fingertips on the contract, leaving a red stamp of each finger as tradition dictated.

Once done, Tsunade said, “Well, kid, congrats. You are officially a summoner of the Shikkotsu Forest now.”

Kaito nodded and asked, “When can we start?”

“Not so fast, brat,” Tsunade interrupted. “I can’t have you leave on a training trip right now. The village is in a precarious spot. We just cleaned up after that incident, and we have missions piling up. I can’t spare you going off to Shikkotsu Forest for training just yet.”

Kaito tilted his head. “Huh…”

Tsunade nodded again. She leaned forward, elbows on her knees. “Right now, I need every Jonin in the village to take on high-level missions. The village took a hit, morale is shaky, and as the new Hokage, I have to rebuild trust and stability.”

Kaito’s brow furrowed. “Huh… but I’m a Chūnin, not a Jonin.”

She cut him off with a wry grin. “A Chūnin, huh? Well, that’s about to change. As one of my first acts as Hokage, I’m promoting you to Jōnin. You’re far too skilled to remain a mere Chūnin. I need you on higher-level missions, so congratulations,” she added with a smirk, crossing her legs. “You’re a Jōnin now, as of today.”

Hogwarts: Neville’s Insert Chapter 26

Hogwarts: Neville’s Insert Chapter 26

He made his way over to the snowy white owl perched near the window. Hedwig hooted softly, tilting her head curiously as Neville approached. “Hey, girl,” Neville said gently, holding out the letter. “Can you take this to Augusta Longbottom at Longbottom Manor?”

Hedwig gave another happy hoot, as if she were agreeing. Neville tied the letter carefully to her outstretched leg and stroked her soft feathers. “Thanks, Hedwig. Safe flight.”

The owl gave a small flap of her wings, then soared gracefully out of the open window, disappearing into the night. Neville watched her until she was nothing more than a small speck against the dark sky.

With a sigh, he turned back to his bed and collapsed onto it, still damp from his shower. The day had been long, but seeing the Mooncalves had brought him a surprising sense of peace. He closed his eyes, listening to the muffled sounds of his dorm mates settling in for the night.

.....

"Wonder what it’s like to have a peaceful life," Neville muttered, shaking his head and sighing as he took in the scene in front of him.

Leaning back against the wall of Hagrid’s hut, he let out another deep sigh. How did I even get here? he thought, watching Hagrid stroke Norbert’s spiky head through the crate slats. The dragon let out a puff of smoke, curling its tail tightly against the inside of the crate. The whole thing felt ridiculous—smuggling a dragon out of Hogwarts? Wasn’t this place supposed to be safer than the outside world? His gaze flicked toward Harry and Hermione, who were huddled together, whispering about timing and Charlie’s friends.

Ron wasn’t with them tonight, which was probably for the best. He was still in the hospital wing, his hand swollen and tinged green from the poisonous bite Norbert had given him days ago. Neville scowled slightly at the thought. At least that idiot got a break from all this nonsense, he thought grimly.

He’d tried—he really had—to talk some sense into them earlier in the week. "Why don’t we just tell Professor McGonagall?" he’d argued, standing in front of Harry and Hermione in the Gryffindor common room. "She’d help Hagrid! She wouldn’t let him go to Azkaban, and she’d probably know how to get Norbert sent to a sanctuary. She’s not cruel, you know."

Harry had looked at him like he’d grown a second head. "what If she rats out Hagrid, they’ll send him to prison," he’d said firmly, crossing his arms. "We can’t let that happen."

Hermione had nodded reluctantly, her voice softer but still firm. "It’s too risky. If anyone finds out about Norbert, it could ruin Hagrid’s life. We have to do this ourselves."

Neville had thrown up his hands in frustration but didn’t push the argument any further. He’d known it wouldn’t make a difference. They were too focused on their plan. Rolling his eyes, he’d muttered to himself, Dumbledore probably already knows about the dragon. This has to be another one of his overly complicated schemes for Harry.

It always came back to Harry, didn’t it? Trolls, restricted sections, and now a dragon. Somehow, Dumbledore let Harry stumble into danger again and again, all part of some grand plan.

Now, here they were, in the middle of the night, smuggling an illegal dragon out of the castle. Neville shook his head, glancing over at Hagrid, who was still fussing over Norbert like a proud parent.

He leaned back against the wall of the hut again, his mind drifting to a memory from a few weeks ago. He’d sent a letter to his gran, Augusta Longbottom, asking to meet her in person. She had arranged for him to visit Hogsmeade one weekend with Professor McGonagall permission,

Neville followed his grandmother into the Three Broomsticks, the warm, bustling atmosphere a welcome contrast to the chilly streets of Hogsmeade. Augusta had insisted on finding a private booth where they could sit and talk without interruption, and now they were tucked into a corner of the pub, a small wooden table between them.

As they settled into their seats, a server brought over two steaming mugs of butterbeer, and Augusta adjusted her hat as she studied Neville carefully. “Well,” she began, her voice brisk but carrying a hint of warmth, “how are you getting on, dear? I trust things are going well at school?”

Neville hesitated for a moment before nodding. “Everything’s fine, Gran,” he replied. “Actually… better than fine. I’ve been learning loads, and, um, Hagrid even took us to see Mooncalves a while ago. We got to feed them and everything.”

“Mooncalves, eh?” Augusta’s eyes softened slightly, a rare expression for her. “That must’ve been quite the experience. Did you enjoy it?”

Neville smiled faintly. “Yeah. They’re amazing. A bit weird-looking, but in a cute way. It was… nice to see something like that.”

They chatted for a while longer, their conversation flowing easily as they waited for their meal to arrive. Augusta asked about his classes, and Neville recounted some. But as the server returned with their food, Neville, deciding it was time to address the real reason he had asked her to come.

“Gran,” he began cautiously, setting his fork down. “There’s… something I’ve been wanting to ask you. Something I need to know.”

Augusta looked up, her brow furrowing. “Go on,” she prompted.

Neville swallowed hard. “I want to know what really happened to Mum and Dad,” he said quietly. “How could they end up… like that? What happened to them?”

For a moment, Augusta didn’t respond. She let out a long sigh, her expression softening. She sat back in her chair, her hands resting on the table. “Your parents… Frank and Alice… they were Aurors,” she began, her voice heavy with emotion. “They worked for the Ministry during the war. It was a terrible time, Neville. The whole country was in chaos, a civil war against… well, against You-Know-Who.”

Neville nodded slowly, though he already knew the answer. “You mean Voldemort?” he asked, feigning ignorance as he tilted his head.

Augusta flinched slightly at the name, her lips pressing into a thin line. “Yes, him,” she said firmly. “Though there’s a reason people don’t say his name, Neville. It was jinxed during the war. Anyone who said it would alert him—or his followers. That’s why people still call him You-Know-Who.”

Neville nodded again, filing away the information. “But… what does he have to do with Mum and Dad?” he asked hesitantly.

Augusta let out another sigh, her gaze distant as she chose her words carefully. “I don’t know all the details,” she admitted. “But when you were born, Frank took you and Alice into hiding. I think it was to protect you. They were both well-known figures in the war, and that made them targets.”

Neville nodded slowly, already knowing most of what his gran had said. But there were still pieces missing. “I take it they were under some sort of hiding spell?” he asked carefully. “I mean, it’d be easy for someone to find them otherwise—like, wouldn’t sending an owl be enough to track them down?”

Augusta nodded, folding her hands on the table. “Yes and no,” she said. “There are spells to redirect owls—make them miss their target or fly in circles. But that would only narrow down the area they were in, not hide them completely.” She paused, her voice lowering slightly. “No, they were under a much more powerful spell. The Fidelius Charm. It’s a very complex bit of magic. It hides a secret—like the location of a house—inside a living person, called the Secret Keeper. Only the Secret Keeper can reveal the location. You can’t force it out of them, not even with magic.”

Neville frowned, trying to process her words. “So… if they were under a spell like that, then how did they end up… like this?”

Augusta’s expression grew pained, her shoulders sagging slightly. “They weren’t tortured in the house that had the Fidelius Charm,” she said quietly. “I don’t know myself why they left that house. But they were found by Bellatrix Lestrange, her husband Rodolphus, and his brother Rabastan. It happened in one of the cottages the Longbottom family owns.”

Her voice trembled ever so slightly as she spoke, and Neville could see the sadness etched deeply into her features.

Neville’s brow furrowed, his mind racing. ‘Why would they leave the safety of their protected home? And how did Bellatrix and her cucks find them?’ The more he thought about it, the less sense it made. ‘It doesn’t add up… unless it was all part of a grand plan,’ he thought bitterly, knowing exactly whose word would have drawn his parents out of hiding.

Breaking from his thoughts, Neville looked at his gran, who seemed visibly saddened. “I’m sorry for making you remember that, Gran,” he said softly, his voice filled with genuine regret.

Augusta let out a heavy sigh and shook her head. “No, Neville, it’s alright. You have the right to know.”

The weight of the conversation hung heavily between them, but they let it fade. For the rest of the evening, they caught up on each other’s lives. Augusta asked him about his studies, his friends, and the goings-on at Hogwarts, while Neville listened attentively as she spoke about life at Longbottom Manor and the family’s history.

Hagrid had Norbert packed and ready to go in a large crate. His face was red and blotchy, and his voice wavered as he explained, “He’s got lots o’ rats an’ some brandy fer the journey.” He sniffled loudly. “He’s got a teddy bear in there in case he gets lonely,” Hagrid muttered tearfully as he adjusted the crate’s straps.

Neville let out a soft snort. "Hagrid, you’re a legend," he mumbled under his breath.

From inside the crate came a ripping noise, followed by the unmistakable sound of stuffing being torn apart. Neville winced. ‘That poor teddy never stood a chance,’ he thought.

“Bye-bye, Norbert!” Hagrid sobbed as Neville, Harry, and Hermione carefully draped the invisibility cloak over the crate. It barely fit all three of them and the bulky box. “Mommy will never forget you!” Hagrid wailed, wiping his eyes with the corner of his sleeve.

Under the cloak, Neville, Harry, and Hermione exchanged uneasy glances. Moving the crate was awkward and cumbersome, and Norbert was already shifting around restlessly inside. This is going to be a nightmare, Neville thought as they began their trek back up to the castle.

How they managed to haul the crate all the way back to the castle, none of them could say. Midnight drew closer as they heaved it up the marble staircase in the entrance hall, sweat dripping from their brows. The dragon inside let out occasional growls and thumps, making the already difficult task even harder. Even with one of Harry’s shortcuts, the journey felt endless.

“Nearly there!” Harry panted as they reached the corridor beneath the tallest tower. Neville’s arms ached, and he wondered if his back would ever feel the same again.

But just as they started forward, a sudden movement ahead made them freeze. Neville almost dropped his side of the crate in alarm. The three of them shrank into the shadows, instinctively forgetting they were already invisible.

Two dark shapes were grappling with each other just a few feet away. Then a lamp flared, and the figures came into focus: Professor McGonagall, looking stern as ever in a tartan bathrobe and hair net, and Draco Malfoy, who was squirming as she held him firmly by the ear.

“Detention!” McGonagall shouted, her voice sharp enough to cut through the quiet corridor. “And twenty points from Slytherin! Wandering around in the middle of the night—how dare you—”

“You don’t understand, Professor,” Malfoy protested, his voice frantic. “Harry Potter’s coming—he’s got a dragon!”

Neville sighed, glancing at Harry and Hermione. ‘Did I mention that Ron slipped up and let Malfoy find out about us smuggling the dragon?’ he thought grimly. Neville resisted the urge to roll his eyes. ‘Typical Ron,’ he thought, shaking his head slightly.

“What utter rubbish!” McGonagall snapped. “How dare you tell such lies! Come on—I shall see Professor Snape about you, Malfoy!”

As McGonagall dragged a protesting Malfoy away, The three of them waited until the corridor was silent again before resuming their climb. After what felt like an eternity, they reached the top of the tower and stepped out into the cool night air. They threw off the cloak, grateful to finally breathe properly again.

Hermione did a little jig, grinning from ear to ear. “Malfoy’s got detention! I could sing!”

Neville chuckled at her glee. “Maybe next time, Hermione. Let’s focus on getting this over with first.”

Still laughing softly, they set Norbert’s crate down in the middle of the tower. The dragon thrashed inside, clearly unhappy with his confinement.

“Just hang on, Norbert,” Harry muttered under his breath. “You’re almost free.”

Ten minutes later, the sound of rushing air filled the quiet night as four broomsticks swooped down from the darkness. Charlie’s friends landed lightly on the tower, their faces cheerful despite the late hour.

“You lot did well,” one of them said, giving them a friendly grin as they inspected the crate. “He’ll be safe with us. Don’t worry.”

They showed the trio the harness they’d rigged up, a clever contraption designed to suspend Norbert safely between the four broomsticks. Neville helped secure the crate, fastening the straps tightly. As he worked, he couldn’t help but snort softly. ‘Yeah, Dumbledore definitely knows about this. They can’t just bypass Hogwarts’ wards without him knowing. If it were that easy, Voldemort and his Death Eaters would’ve stormed the castle ages ago.’

At last, Norbert was ready. With a few final adjustments, the handlers took off, lifting the crate into the air. The dragon gave one last disgruntled thrash inside the harness, but the broomsticks rose steadily into the sky.

And like that Norbert gone.

Neville, Harry, and Hermione stood there for a moment in silence, watching as the dark shapes vanished into the starry sky. Relief flooded through them, and they let out a collective sigh. The weight of the dragon—literal and metaphorical—was finally gone. Quietly, they slipped back down the spiral staircase.

But just as Harry stepped out of the shadows at the base of the stairs, Neville’s stomach dropped. Filch.

“Harry, wait!” Neville hissed, reaching out to grab his arm, but it was too late. The lantern light flickered, and Neville cursed under his breath as Filch’s hunched figure emerged from the darkness.

“Well, well, well,” Filch whispered, his voice laced with smug satisfaction. “We are in trouble.”

Without missing a beat, Neville pulled the invisibility cloak off himself and threw it over Hermione, ignoring her startled gasp. “Stay hidden,” he muttered under his breath. “It’s better this way.”

“But—” Hermione started to protest, her voice barely above a whisper.

“Just do it,” Neville insisted, his tone leaving no room for argument.

As Filch’s lantern swung closer, Neville straightened up, his mind racing. It’s better to follow the script, he thought grimly. Dumbledore would have made sure Harry ended up in the Forbidden Forest to meet Quirrellmort anyway. This way, at least Hermione wouldn’t be dragged into the mess.

Filch’s beady eyes gleamed as he swung the lantern wildly, illuminating Harry and Neville. “Caught you red-handed,” he sneered, his delight practically radiating off him. “Sneaking around at this hour, eh? Up to no good as always, Potter.”

Neville said nothing, keeping his expression carefully neutral. He wasn’t about to give Filch the satisfaction of a reaction.

“Come on, then,” Filch growled, motioning with his lantern. “Professor McGonagall will deal with you lot. She’ll know what to do with troublemakers like you.”

They were marched straight to Professor McGonagall’s office, where Malfoy was already waiting. He stood in the corner, his face a mix of smugness and nervousness, clearly not expecting to see Harry and Neville being dragged in as well.

Professor McGonagall, standing tall and fierce, looked angrier than Neville had ever seen her. She loomed over them, her tartan dressing gown adding an extra layer of authority. “I would never have believed it of any of you,” she snapped, her tone sharp enough to cut glass. “Mr. Filch says you were up in the Astronomy Tower. It’s one o’clock in the morning! Explain yourselves.”

Neville stayed quiet, his mind racing. He needed to steer this away from the dragon. If she doesn’t ask, don’t volunteer.

“I think I’ve got a good idea of what’s been going on,” McGonagall continued, her voice growing colder. “It doesn’t take a genius to work it out. You fed Draco Malfoy some cock-and-bull story about a dragon, trying to lure him out of bed and into trouble. I’ve already caught him.”

Neville saw his opening and jumped in before Harry could say a word. “Huh?” he said, feigning confusion. “I’m sorry, Professor, but I don’t know what dragon you’re talking about.”

McGonagall’s eyes narrowed, but Neville pressed on. “Actually, we were waiting for Malfoy,” he said earnestly. “He challenged Harry to a duel. Said Harry would be a disgrace to all Potters if he didn’t show up.”

Harry nodded quickly, adding to Neville’s explanation.

“Rubbish!” Malfoy shouted, his face going pale. “That’s not—”

“Enough!” Professor McGonagall snapped, silencing Malfoy just as he opened his mouth to protest. Her piercing gaze swept over all three boys, her lips pressed into a thin line.

“That’s enough,” she repeated sternly. “Three students out of bed in one night! I’ve never heard of such a thing before!” She turned to Malfoy first. “Mr. Malfoy, I will be writing to your parents to explain, in great detail, exactly what has occurred here tonight.”

Her sharp eyes then fixed on Harry, making him squirm. “And you, Mr. Potter. I thought Gryffindor meant more to you than this. All three of you will receive detentions.”

Finally, she turned to Neville, her voice heavy with disappointment. “Mr. Longbottom, I expected more from you. I thought you had more sense than to let someone goad you into a challenge. I am extremely disappointed in you.”

Neville felt his chest tighten as she continued. “And fifty points will be taken from Gryffindor.”

“Fifty?” Harry gasped. His face paled as he realized what that would do to their House points.

“Fifty points each,” McGonagall said firmly, her voice trembling with frustration. Her nostrils flared as she glared at them.

Neville stayed quiet, biting back the urge to argue. This whole mess could’ve been avoided if we’d just reported the dragon to McGonagall in the first place, he thought bitterly.

“Professor—please!” Harry tried again. “You can’t—”

“Don’t tell me what I can and can’t do, Potter,” McGonagall snapped, cutting him off. “Now, get back to bed, all of you. I have never been more ashamed of Gryffindor students.”

On their way back to the common room, Harry groaned. “One hundred points… in one night.”

Neville snorted. “Must be a record,” he said dryly. “Good thing Hermione wasn’t caught with us. That would’ve made it one hundred and fifty.”

Harry managed a weak chuckle but didn’t say anything.

When they climbed through the portrait hole into the Gryffindor common room, Hermione was waiting for them. The moment she saw Neville, she flung herself at him, wrapping him in a tight hug. “Neville!” she cried, her voice thick with emotion. “I should’ve been caught with you. I’m so sorry—I should’ve been there.”

Neville gently patted her shoulder, prying her off him. “If you’d been caught, we’d have lost even more points,” he said with a faint grin. “As it is, we’ve already lost one hundred. No need to make it worse.”

Hermione’s face crumpled slightly, but she nodded, sniffling.

Neville turned to Harry with a sarcastic smile. “Get ready, mate. We’re about to be ostracized by the rest of Gryffindor.” He wiped an imaginary tear from his cheek and added dryly, “Ah, the wonders of peer pressure.”

Harry groaned again, collapsing into an armchair by the fire. “Tomorrow’s going to be awful.”

Kaito Akaden Chapter 142

Kaito Akaden Chapter 142

“Good to hear that you think so, brat.” Tsunade sat down in her chair, leaning back. “How’s Kushina doing? Shizune mentioned she was injured during the attack. And what about those two brats how are they holding up?”

Kaito settled into a chair opposite her. “Mom’s doing fine now. She woke up about an hour ago. As for Naruto and Karin, they’re shaken but okay.”

“Good.” Tsunade nodded, her eyes softening as she looked at Kaito. “Go and get some rest, brat. You look dead on your feet. I’ll come by to check on her later, once I’m done here.”

Kaito offered a tired smile, his exhaustion evident in the droop of his shoulders. “Yes, Lady Tsunade,” he said quietly, then slipped back out the same window he’d entered, heading for home.

Alone again, Tsunade let out a soft sigh and turned her attention back to the paperwork spread haphazardly across her desk. Everything had changed overnight, and there was much to do. For now, she would focus on sorting through the mess of reports and documents, one page at a time.

….

The next morning, a somber silence settled over the village. Under a gray, clouded sky, many shinobi and civilians made their way to the Konoha Cemetery. They dressed in black, heads bowed, to pay their respects to the Uchiha who had fallen during what was now known as the “Uchiha Incident.”

At the front of the gathering, Fugaku and Mikoto Uchiha stood stiffly. Mikoto’s head was bowed in respect. By her side were Itachi and Sasuke, both solemn and silent. Behind them, the rest of the Uchiha clan formed a quiet line, dressed in black as they came forward, one by one, to place flowers at the graves of the lost. Some cried openly, while others stood still, holding their sorrow inside. Shisui, bandages still visible beneath his robes, gently laid his flower among the others, whispering a soft farewell.

Near the front, Tsunade stood with Shizune, offering respect as the new Hokage. Many others from various clans were present as well, their silent presence a show of unity in the face of tragedy. Among them, Hotaru stood with her parents and her clan, their expressions serious and thoughtful.

A short distance away, Kaito stood beside his mother, Kushina, who was seated in a wheelchair. Naruto and Karin stood close by, also dressed in black. Kushina was still too weak to walk, her body recovering from the strain of using her chakra use during the attack. Yet, she had insisted on coming here, unwilling to remain at home during such an important moment.

When the ceremony ended, The people began to drift away, leaving the cemetery in small groups, heads bowed and voices low.

As the crowd gradually thinned out, Kaito gently pushed Kushina’s wheelchair through the cemetery’s quiet pathways, with Naruto and Karin walking close behind. They soon approached a familiar grave, the one bearing the name “Fourth Hokage: Minato Namikaze.” Kushina looked at the carved letters and gave a small, trembling smile. Tears started to form at the corners of her eyes as she gazed at the headstone, memories and emotions welling up within her.

“Hi, Mina-kun,” she said quietly, her voice trembling just a bit. “It’s been a while, hasn’t it? We’re all safe… well, mostly safe.” She let out a small, tired laugh. “I know you must be wondering what I’m doing in a wheelchair. Don’t worry, I’m fine. Tsuna-nee says I’ll be back on my feet in about a week. I’m just a bit weak after trying to use my chakra, ya know”

Her voice grew quieter, filled with longing. “So much is changing, Minato,” she said softly. “I wish you were here to see it all. The village is working hard to heal, and Tsunade is stepping up as Hokage. I think you’d be proud of her.” Tears shone in her eyes as she continued, “We miss you, Mina-kun, every day. But don’t worry—we’re taking care of each other.”

With that, Kushina gently placed a bouquet of fresh flowers at the base of the gravestone. Her last words drifted off into a soft murmur, carried away by the gentle breeze that rustled through the cemetery.

Naruto and Karin said nothing, standing quietly beside Kushina. They understood that this moment was mainly for Kushina and Minato. Naruto swallowed, looking a bit uneasy. He respected his father even though he had never really known him. Karin felt a quiet sympathy, understanding the loss but not daring to break the silence.

Kaito stood silently, his gaze drifting upward. He was lost in his own thoughts, feeling both frustrated and resigned. “Even if I change events, some things just stay the same, huh?” he wondered, thinking about all that had happened.

He heard footsteps approaching and turned to see Hotaru and her family walking over. Kushina noticed them too and quickly wiped her tears, putting on a small smile. “Hey, you guys,” she greeted quietly. “We’re just visiting Minato, ya know?”

Hitomi, Hotaru’s mother, gave a gentle smile and stepped closer. “We wanted to check on you, Kushina. How are you feeling?”

Kushina shrugged lightly, trying to sound cheerful. “I’m fine, really. Just a bit weak. I overdid it the night before, and now I have to stay in this wheelchair for a little while. Nothing too serious. I’ll be walking around and driving everyone crazy again soon enough.”

Hitomi leaned down and gave Kushina a gentle hug. “I’m glad to hear you’re okay. You had us worried.”

While the adults spoke, Hotaru moved toward Kaito. She looked him over, noticing he seemed a bit less exhausted than yesterday. “How are you doing, Kai-kun?” she asked softly. “You seem better than before.”

Kaito managed a small grin. “I’m fine, Hotaru. I just needed some rest, that’s all.” He began pushing Kushina’s wheelchair again, guiding them away from the gravesite.

They soon came across Mikoto Uchiha and her younger son, Sasuke. Mikoto, worry evident on her face, approached Kushina. “Are you alright, Kushina?” she asked gently.

Kushina nodded, giving Mikoto a reassuring smile. “I’m okay, just a little weak, that’s all. Nothing to worry about.”

Just then, a familiar voice called out, “Hey, brat! There you are. I’ve been looking for you everywhere!”

It was Tsunade, walking toward them with Shizune at her side. She had one hand on her hip, looking mildly annoyed but also relieved to have found Kaito. Shizune followed, carrying a small piglet.

Kaito raised an eyebrow, confused. “Huh? What’s going on, Tsunade-sama?” he asked. “Why were you looking for me?”

Tsunade tapped her foot, seeming a bit annoyed. “Did you forget we have to prepare for my inauguration, kid?” she said. “I’ve been running around trying to find you.”

Kaito looked even more puzzled. “Your inauguration? What do you need me for?” he asked, genuinely not understanding how

Tsunade let out an irritated sigh. “Because, brat, I’m going to officially name you as my successor.”

That announcement hit like a shockwave. Everyone who didn’t already know stared in disbelief. Hotaru gasped quietly. “Kai-kun is going to be the Sixth?” she asked, turning wide eyes on Kaito.

Naruto practically shouted, “You’re gonna be the Sixth Hokage, Kaito-nii?! That’s awesome!”

Hiashi widened his eyes, surprised by the announcement, while Hitomi looked back and forth between Kushina and Mikoto, noticing that they didn’t seem as shocked. They must have known about this in advance.

Kaito let out a tired sigh. “I never agreed to that,” he muttered. “You said I was one of the candidates, not that I was going to be announced as your official successor. Plus, I’m only twelve years old!”

Tsunade shrugged, looking totally unconcerned. “Too bad. I didn’t get much of a choice when I took this job, and now you don’t either. We need someone to follow after me, and you fit the bill.” She reached out and grabbed the back of Kaito’s shirt, lifting him off the ground. He let out a startled yelp, flailing his arms. “Hey! Put me down! I can’t just leave my mom like this,” he protested

Tsunade rolled her eyes, completely ignoring his protests. “Don’t give me that,” she said. “I know you always keep a few shadow clones around to watch over them. Besides, Shizune will stay with your mother, right, Shizune?”

Shizune gave a small nod. “Yes, Lady Tsunade,” she agreed, her voice calm and reassuring.

“See?” Tsunade said triumphantly. “Kushina, I’ll return your son after the ceremony. We have a lot to get ready.” With that, she started walking off with Kaito tossed him over her shoulder, carrying him off.

Kushina watched with a grin, waving goodbye. “Have fun, Kai-kun,” she teased lightly, not bothering to hide her amusement.

Kaito gave his mother a betrayed look, but seeing that she was in good hands, he sighed and let Tsunade drag him away. She literally hoisted him over her shoulder, marching off toward the Hokage Tower.

…..

Later that evening, after the inauguration ceremony had finished, Tsunade and Kaito found themselves in the Hokage’s office.

Tsunade’s desk was covered in stacks of paperwork—reports, mission requests, budget summaries, and letters from other nations. She let out a long, dramatic groan. “Why is there so much paperwork? I swear it grows when I’m not looking,” she complained, resting her forehead in her palms.

Kaito tried not to laugh. “Why are you surprised? The Hokage’s work mostly involves paperwork,” he said quietly. “I did ask if you were sure, remember?”

Tsunade lifted her head and shot him a glare. “I blame you for this,” she grumbled. “You and your big mouth sweet-talked me into taking this position. I should never have let you convince me.”

Kaito held up his hands in mock surrender. “Hey, you’re the best person for the job. I just pointed it out,” he replied calmly. “I don’t recall forcing you.”

Tsunade grumbled under her breath, muttering something about “dumb redheaded brats” as she slumped forward.

Just then, Shizune entered the office, carefully balancing another large stack of papers in her arms. “Lady Tsunade,” she said briskly, “these need to be done by the end of today. Come on, you shouldn’t slack off. There are more where these came from if you don’t keep up.” With that, Shizune turned and left, letting the door close softly behind her.

Tsunade stared at the new pile as if it might sprout fangs and attack. She looked like she was a second away from tears. Kaito couldn’t help but feel a bit sorry for her. After all, this was a far cry from fighting battles and saving lives with medical ninjutsu. Paperwork was its own kind of torture.

Kaito watched Tsunade’s despair with mild amusement. “Why don’t you use shadow clones to do the paperwork?” he suggested. “My dad used to do that when he was Hokage. That’s how he managed to spend time outside of the office.”

Tsunade froze, staring at Kaito as if he had just revealed the world’s biggest secret. “Shadow clones?” she repeated dumbly. Suddenly, she stood up and slammed her hand on the desk. “Why didn’t I think of that before?!”

Without waiting, she made a hand sign and created two shadow clones. The clones immediately grabbed some of the papers and began working through them. Tsunade looked so relieved it was almost funny. “This changes everything,” she said, feeling happier than she had all day.

Kaito smiled slightly. “Did you really think Dad was stuck behind a desk all the time? He was a genius, you know.”

Tsunade sighed, sounding content for once. “Well, that’s one problem solved.” Then she turned to Kaito, looking him up and down. “But why are you still here, brat? Don’t you have something else to do now that the inauguration is over?”

Kaito hesitated, his eyes serious. “Actually, I do have something to tell you, but it should be in private.”

That caught Tsunade’s attention. She waved her hand, silently telling the ANBU stationed in the corners of the room to leave. They vanished without a sound. Only the clones, too busy to pay attention, remained. “Alright,” Tsunade said, “what is it?”

Kaito formed a few hand signs and pressed his palm against the floor. A faint, glowing seal spread across the room and then faded. He turned back to Tsunade, who was now looking at him with narrowed eyes.

“Is it really that important?” she asked, her voice low and serious.

Kaito nodded, folding his arms. “You might know this, but I’ve been keeping an eye on the masked man ever since the Nine-Tails attack,” he began quietly. “I’ve sent clones out all around to gather information on him and track his movements. Over the past few years, I’ve learned quite a bit.”

Tsunade crossed her arms, her expression grim. “So you’ve found something?” she prompted, her tone sharp and focused.

Kaito nodded, his tone serious. “Yeah, i found out that the masked man is puting together a mesenaries all compriceds of S-class shinobi. They call themselves the Akatsuki. for now they are doing odd jobs hear and there for money Your old teammate, Orochimaru, is one of them.”

Tsunade’s eyes narrowed. “Are you sure Orochimaru is one of them?” Her voice turned sharp with concern.

Kaito nodded. “Yeah, he’s been a part of the group for a few years now. But there’s more—everywhere they go, they seem to suddenly gather information on the jinchuriki. From what I’ve gathered, they are after the Tailed Beasts.”

Kaito reached into his pouch, took out a scroll, and unsealed a file. Handing it over, he said, “See for yourself.” Tsunade opened the file and began flipping through the pages. As she did, Kaito continued, “There’s someone named Mukai Kohinata. He was part of ROOT and ANBU, an S-rank shinobi who hid his true strength. He got caught selling Konoha’s intel to Kirigakure.”

Tsunade glanced up. “Selling intel to Kiri?”

Kaito nodded. “Yes, but that’s not the whole story. The reason he did it was because his son was terminally ill. He tried to get help from Konoha, but there aren’t any real programs or support for cases like his. He was desperate.”

Tsunade’s expression softened slightly. “I see,” she said quietly. “Go on.”

Kaito continued, “Danzo found out about this and ordered Itachi to kill Mukai as part of his ANBU test.”

Tsunade’s gaze sharpened again. “I take it Itachi didn’t kill him? And Mukai is now part of the Akatsuki?”

Kaito shook his head. “Mukai turned out to be stronger than both Itachi and Shisui combined when they confronted him. Well, sort of. He’s a member of the Akatsuki, but not under his real name. During Itachi’s mission, I confronted him and offered him an option, which he chose. He faked his death and is now known as Kurogane Sora, a missing ninja from the Land of the Bear.”

Tsunade was taken aback. “Your spy in the Akatsuki?” she leaned forward, frowning. “How can you be sure he won’t betray you?”

Kaito sighed. “I saved his family from Danzo’s ROOT agents who were sent to eliminate them. In return, I promised Mukai a pardon for his past actions. I also placed a seal on him to prevent any betrayal. He understands that if he were to betray us, his family would lose the safe life I’ve arranged for them. Additionally, I was hoping you could take a look at his son. If we can help the boy, it should further strengthen Mukai’s loyalty.”

Tsunade rubbed her temple, thinking it over. “Where is his family now? They couldn’t have stayed in the village if Danzo was after them.”

“I relocated them to Hachō Village,” Kaito answered. “But now that Danzo and the Third Hokage’s old influences are no longer a problem, can they return to Konoha?”

Tsunade let out a slow breath. “If Mukai keeps his end of the deal and continues spying on the Akatsuki, then yes, I don’t see why they can’t return. It might actually give us an advantage—having him closer to home. Who else knows about this arrangement?”

“Just me and Itachi,” Kaito said, “and now you.”

Tsunade nodded, looking tired but resolute. “Alright. Anything else I need to know?” she asked, a hint of dry humor in her tone.

Kaito scratched the back of his neck. “it’s more of a request.”

Raising an eyebrow, Tsunade leaned back. “A request? What do you want, brat?”

Kaito met her gaze seriously. “I want to learn Senjutsu.”

Hogwarts: Neville’s Insert Chapter 25

A Neville SI Chapter 25

Neville groaned internally. “Of course, the whole dragon egg thing with Hagrid,” he thought, yet he couldn’t deny feeling a bit excited at the thought of seeing a real dragon.

“But it’s against wizarding law,” said Ron, keeping his voice low. “Has been for ages—Breeding dragons was outlawed by the Warlocks’ Convention of 1709. Everyone knows that. And it’s not as if you can keep a dragon secret for long. Too much fire, too much danger. My brother Charlie works with them in Romania and he’s got loads of burns. Letting a dragon loose around here would be mad.”

“But are there wild dragons in Britain?” Harry asked, curious.

Ron gave a small shrug. “A few, yeah. There are Common Welsh Greens and Hebridean Blacks. The Ministry of Magic keeps them hidden from Muggles. They’ve got folks whose whole job is to Memory-Charm Muggles who spot them. I heard my dad talking about it once.”

Hermione glanced at the books. “So what is Hagrid doing looking up dragons at a time like this? He knows it’s against the law. It might have something to do with what he’s guarding for Dumbledore. Or maybe he’s just being—well, Hagrid.”

….

They were sitting at the Gryffindor table, the Great Hall buzzing with chatter as dinner was in full swing. The golden glow of floating candles reflected off the enchanted ceiling, which showed the darkening sky outside. At the head table, only Professors McGonagall, Dumbledore, Flitwick, and Sprout were present, quietly eating their meals.

Neville sat opposite Hermione, barely touching his food, lost in thought. His mind kept circling back to his parents and how he could help them. He stared blankly at his plate, poking at a piece of chicken with his fork.

“Oi, Neville!” Seamus plopped down beside him with such force that Neville was startled snapping him out of his thoughts.

Oh, hey,” Neville said, blinking and offering a quick nod in greeting.

 “I’ve been lookin’ for you everywhere, mate!” Seamus said, his brow furrowed. “Where’ve you been?”

Neville rubbed the back of his neck. “Oh, um… the library. Why? What’s up?”

Dean leaned over from across the table, grinning. “We needed someone for five-a-side. Thought you’d want to join in since you love footie.”

Seamus jumped in before Neville could respond. “Yeah, you missed it! We played against the Hufflepuffs and won. A fourth-year Gryffindor joined us last minute.”

Neville sighed, a touch of regret crossing his face. “Ah, man, I missed it? I’ve been looking forward to that.” Over the past few months, playing football had become a popular pastime for the Muggle-borns, thanks to Dean bringing a ball back after the Christmas break.

“Don’t worry, mate,” Dean said reassuringly, “we’re playing again tomorrow evening against Hufflepuff. Same time.”

Neville perked up and nodded. “Yeah, I’ll definitely be there.”

The Great Hall gradually began to empty as students finished their meals. Neville took one last bite of his dinner, then stood up with the rest of the Gryffindors, trailing behind them as they moved toward the doors.

He walked along absentmindedly, his thoughts drifting again, when a familiar voice pulled him back.

“Neville!” Hermione grabbed his arm and tugged him to the side, her bushy hair bouncing slightly as she turned to face him.

Neville blinked in confusion. “Uh? What’s wrong, Hermione?”

“Don’t tell me you forgot!” Hermione scolded, hands on her hips. “Hagrid asked us to wait for him after dinner, remember?”

Neville’s eyes widened in realization. “Oh… right!” He shook his head, grinning sheepishly. “I completely forgot. Thanks, Hermione.”

the rest of the Gryffindors noticed Neville and Hermione staying behind, Lavender called out, “Aren’t you lot coming with us?”

“Hagrid asked to see us,” Harry explained.

Seamus shrugged. “Alright, well, have fun, then. See you back in the common room.”

As the hall emptied, Harry frowned slightly. “You reckon Hagrid’s going to talk about the Stone again?”

Ron shoved his hands into his pockets and shrugged. “Probably. What else would it be about?”

Neville tuned out the conversation as the four of them waited quietly near the entrance.

“Neville?” Hermione’s soft voice brought him back to reality. She was looking at him, her brow furrowed with worry. “Are you okay? You’ve been a bit… off ever since the Christmas break.”

Neville blinked and forced a small smile. “Uh, it’s nothing, Hermione. Just thinking,” he said, waving her concerns away with a dismissive gesture. “I’m fine.”

Hermione didn’t look entirely convinced, but before she could say anything else, the large doors to the Great Hall creaked open, and everyone turned to look. Hagrid entered, his heavy boots echoing against the stone floor, and walking alongside him was none other than Professor McGonagall.

“Here they are, Professor,” Hagrid said as they stopped in front of Neville, Harry, Hermione, and Ron.

Neville’s raised an eyebrow. "Why’s Hagrid here with McGonagall? Did he… did he rat us out?" Neville’s thoughts as he exchanged quick glances with Harry, Ron, and Hermione. By the looks on their faces, they were all thinking the same thing. "No, that doesn’t make sense. Dumbledore wants Harry to know about the Stone, doesn’t he? "

Before Neville could dwell on it any further, Hermione straightened up and stammered nervously, “Good evening, Professor.”

“Good evening, Professor,” Neville quickly added, sound normal. Harry and Ron mumbled their greetings as well, a little less composed.

McGonagall nodded at them, her sharp gaze moving from one to the other. “Good evening,” she replied crisply. “Now, Hagrid tells me that you four have been asking about Mooncalves?”

Neville blinked. Mooncalves? The word rang a faint bell, but it still caught him off guard. He vaguely remembered asking Hagrid about them months ago and had completely forgotten since.

“Mooncalves?” Hermione repeated, her voice laced with confusion, clearly expecting McGonagall to reprimand them for snooping around about the Philosopher’s Stone.

“Yeah, Mooncalves,” Hagrid said cheerfully, oblivious to the tension. “Neville’s been askin’ me a few times about ‘em. Thought today’d be a good night for yeh lot to see.”

McGonagall cleared her throat, pulling their attention back to her. “Yes, well,” she said, her tone brisk but not unkind. “You may accompany Hagrid to see the Mooncalves tonight. However, I expect you all to follow his instructions and use caution. While Mooncalves are relatively harmless, accidents can still happen, and I don’t want any of you getting hurt.”

They all nodded quickly, a mix of relief and curiosity on their faces. “Yes, Professor,” Neville said, with Hermione and Harry echoing him immediately.

Satisfied, McGonagall nodded once more. “Very well. I’ll leave you in Hagrid’s care. Good night.”

“Good night, Professor,” they chorused as McGonagall turned on her heel and swept out of the Great Hall, her robes swishing behind her.

Hagrid clapped his hands together, his grin wide and excited. “Right then, come along, you lot! No time to waste.”

With that, he ushered them out of the Great Hall and down the stone corridors, carrying a large lantern that cast a warm golden light around them. The crisp evening air hit them as they stepped outside, the castle doors closing softly behind them.

As they made their way across the grounds, Harry finally spoke up. “So, Hagrid—did you really bring us out here to see Mooncalves?”

“Course I did!” Hagrid said, beaming. “Tonight’s a full moon. Mooncalves only come out then. Yeh lot are in for a treat!”

They followed Hagrid as he stopped briefly outside his hut to collect two large buckets, each one sloshing softly with grainy feed. He handed one to Neville. “Here yeh go, Neville. This is fer the Mooncalves. Careful not to spill it.”

Neville took the bucket carefully, glancing inside to see what looked like a glowing, silvery feed. “What’s in here?” he asked curiously.

“Mooncalf pellets,” Hagrid replied, hefting his own bucket. “They love it. Keeps their coats all shiny, yeh know.”

As they continued down the path toward the hills, Harry asked another question. “So where do they live, Hagrid? These Mooncalves.”

“In burrows underground,” Hagrid replied, holding the lantern high to light their way. “They’re shy creatures, they are—don’t come out much except durin’ a full moon. Hogwarts has a Mooncalf den that’s been here fer centuries.”

Hermione, walking beside Neville, lit up with excitement. “I’ve read about them in Fantastic Beasts and Where to Find Them! It says Mooncalves dance in the moonlight during a full moon. That’s how they leave those strange patterns.”

“Patterns?” Ron asked, wrinkling his nose. “What d’you mean?”

“You know,” Hermione replied patiently, “those patterns found in crop fields—circles and swirls that Muggles think are made by aliens? It’s actually Mooncalves. They’re the ones who make them.”

Hagrid chuckled, nodding his approval. “Righ’ you are, Hermione! They dance in the moonlight, leaving them patterns behind. Part o’ their mating ritual, yeh see. It’s somethin’ magical to watch.”

After a while of walking, they climbed a hill and reached a tall, gnarled tree. The moonlit clearing spread out below them, and Hagrid held up his hand, signaling for them to stop.

“There they are,” he said softly, pointing toward the open space.

“They’re so cute!” Hermione whispered, barely able to contain her excitement.

Neville stood his face a mixture of awe and delight. 'They look just like they did in the movie,' he thought. The Mooncalves moved with slightly clumsy energy, almost like overly excited puppies that still managed to behave themselves. They nibbled on the grass or playfully bumped into one another.

“Blimey,” Ron muttered, taking a step back. “They’re a bit freaky-looking with those huge eyes, though.”

“Don’t be daft, Ron. They’re lovely,” Hermione countered, glaring at him before taking a few careful steps forward.

Hagrid placed his bucket on the ground and gestured for the others to do the same. “Alright, now, take some o’ the pellets and toss ‘em gently. The Mooncalves’ll come over.”

Following Hagrid’s instructions, they each grabbed a handful of the glowing feed and scattered it into the clearing. The pellets floated gently in midair, hovering just at the perfect height for the Mooncalves.

The Mooncalves immediately perked up, their wide, glowing eyes fixing on the floating pellets. With graceful, yet slightly clumsy steps, they trotted forward to eat, their pale, shimmering coats gleaming in the moonlight.

A group of smaller Mooncalves—babies, by the looks of them—waddled toward the feed, their spindly legs carrying them with an adorable wobble. Neville couldn’t help but smile as they moved, their tiny, curious faces peering up at him. They were so endearing, like gentle, oversized puppies eager for attention.

Hermione let out a high-pitched squeal as one of the baby Mooncalves came close. “Oh, you’re adorable!” she exclaimed, scooping it up gently to feed it by hand. The creature nibbled happily, its wide eyes blinking up at her.

Neville knelt down as a few of the baby Mooncalves approached him, holding out handfuls of pellets. “You’re even better up close,” he murmured, grinning as one of them ate directly from his palm.

Harry smiled, watching the scene unfold as he tossed more pellets. “They’re not what I expected,” he said quietly.

As they fed the Mooncalves, Harry glanced at Hagrid, seizing the opportunity while they were alone. “Hagrid, we wanted to ask you… about the Sorcerer’s Stone and Fluffy.”

Ron nodded, adding quickly, “Yeah—who else is guarding it besides you?”

Hagrid froze mid-throw, his face going pale in the glow of the full moon. He quickly glanced around the clearing, his voice dropping to a harsh whisper. “Hush! Not here. You lot shouldn’t be talkin’ ‘bout that out in the open.”

The group fell silent, exchanging uneasy glances. Hagrid sighed heavily and muttered, “Come on. Let’s get you back to me hut.”

After tossing the last of the glowing pellets to the Mooncalves, Hagrid led them back up the winding path toward his hut. The lantern bobbed in his hand, its warm light guiding the way.

As they walked, Neville couldn’t help but smile. “Thanks for taking us to see the Mooncalves, Hagrid. That was… amazing. Seeing them in person is so much better than just reading about them in a book.” His voice was lighter now, more at ease than it had been in weeks. For the first time in a while, Neville relaxed.

Hermione, who had noticed how relaxed Neville seemed during their time with the Mooncalves, smiled softly. “Yes, thank you, Hagrid. Can we come see them again sometime?”

Hagrid let out a booming laugh. “Course yeh can! Yeh just let me know when yeh want ter visit ‘em. Mooncalves are always glad fer a bit o’ attention.”

By the time they reached Hagrid’s hut, the night had grown cooler. Inside, however, it was sweltering. The blazing fire in the grate made the small room feel like an oven, despite the warm evening outside. Hagrid set the lantern down, stoked the fire a bit more, and gestured for them to sit at the table.

“Sit yerselves down,” Hagrid said cheerfully. He pulled out a kettle to make tea, whistling softly to himself, and laid out a plate of suspicious-looking sandwiches. “Tea’s comin’, and I’ve made some stoat sandwiches if yeh’re hungry.”

“Er, no thanks, Hagrid,” Ron said hastily, his nose wrinkling at the sight of the sandwiches.

As Hagrid poured the tea, he turned back to them. “So—yeh wanted to ask me somethin’?”

Neville, sitting quietly, wasn’t paying much attention to the conversation. His gaze drifted toward the fireplace, where something large sat nestled among the flames. It was an egg. 'That must be the dragon egg,' he thought, narrowing his eyes. 'It’s surprisingly small for what’s supposed to be inside. If I’m correct, it’s not much bigger than an ostrich egg'.

Meanwhile, Harry decided not to waste any time. “We were wondering if you could tell us what’s guarding the Sorcerer’s Stone—apart from Fluffy.”

Hagrid frowned, his thick eyebrows pulling together. “O’ course I can’t tell yeh that,” he said gruffly. “Number one, I don’ know meself. Number two, yeh know too much already, so I wouldn’ tell yeh even if I could. That Stone’s here fer a good reason. It was almost stolen outta Gringotts—bet yeh’ve worked that out too, haven’t yeh?” He shook his head. “Beats me how yeh even know about Fluffy.”

“Oh, come on, Hagrid,” Hermione said, her voice warm and coaxing. “You might not want to tell us, but you do know, don’t you? You know everything that goes on here.”

Hagrid’s beard twitched, and though he tried to hide it, they could tell he was smiling. Harry and Ron grinned at Hermione, clearly impressed by her tactic.

“We just wondered,” Hermione continued innocently, “who Dumbledore trusted enough to help him, apart from you.”

Hagrid’s chest swelled with pride at her words, and he couldn’t help but puff out his chest a little. “Well… I s’pose it couldn’t hurt ter tell yeh that much,” he admitted, ticking off his fingers as he spoke. “Let’s see… he borrowed Fluffy from me, o’ course… Then some o’ the teachers did enchantments. Professor Sprout—Professor Flitwick—Professor McGonagall—”

He paused, scratching his head. “Professor Quirrell—an’ Dumbledore himself did somethin’, o’ course. Hang on, I’ve forgotten someone…” His face scrunched up in thought before it brightened. “Oh yeah—Professor Snape.”

“Snape?” Harry, Ron, and Hermione said almost in unison, their voices sharp with disbelief.

“Yeah,” Hagrid replied firmly. “Yeh’re not still on abou’ that, are yeh? Look, Snape helped protect the Stone—he’s not about ter steal it.”

Harry exchanged a glance with Ron and Hermione, and he knew they were all thinking the same thing. If Snape was one of the ones protecting the Stone, then he probably knew how to get past all the other teachers’ enchantments. Everything except Quirrell’s spell—and how to get past Fluffy.

“You’re the only one who knows how to get past Fluffy, aren’t you, Hagrid?” Harry asked anxiously. “And you wouldn’t tell anyone, would you? Not even one of the teachers?”

“Not a soul knows, except me an’ Dumbledore,” Hagrid said proudly, puffing up his chest.

“Well, that’s something,” Harry muttered to the others, trying to sound reassured.

Hagrid busied himself pouring another round of tea, but Harry shifted uncomfortably and wiped at his forehead. “Hagrid, can we open a window? I’m boiling.”

“Can’t, Harry, sorry,” Hagrid said quickly. His eyes darted nervously toward the fire.

Harry followed his gaze and frowned. Something was there—right at the center of the fire, just below the kettle. He leaned forward, his voice slow and deliberate. “Hagrid… what’s that?”

Hagrid shifted awkwardly, fiddling with his beard. “Ah… that’s, er…”

Ron crouched closer to the fire, his face lit up with curiosity. “That’s an egg! It’s massive. Where did you get it, Hagrid? It must’ve cost a fortune.”

“Won it,” Hagrid said proudly. “Las’ night. I was down in the village havin’ a few drinks, got into a game o’ cards with a stranger. Think he was glad ter get rid of it, to be honest.”

“But what are you going to do with it once it hatches?” Hermione asked, her voice tinged with concern.

“Well, I’ve bin doin’ some readin’,” Hagrid said eagerly, pulling a large, battered book from under his pillow. “Got this outta the library—Dragon Breeding for Pleasure and Profit. It’s a bit outta date, o’ course, but it’s all in here. Keep the egg in the fire ‘cause their mothers breathe on ‘em, see. And when it hatches, feed it a bucket o’ brandy mixed with chicken blood every half hour. And look here—this part shows how ter recognize diff’rent eggs. What I’ve got there’s a Norwegian Ridgeback. They’re rare, them!”

Hagrid looked thoroughly pleased with himself, but Hermione didn’t share his excitement. She looked around the hut, her expression incredulous. “Hagrid… you live in a wooden house.”

But Hagrid wasn’t listening. He hummed cheerfully as he stoked the fire, clearly picturing himself as the proud father of a baby dragon.

The group left Hagrid’s hut a short while later, their heads spinning with what they’d just seen and heard.

“That’s mad,” Ron muttered as they trudged back toward the castle. “A dragon in a wooden house! Hagrid’s going to set the whole place on fire.”

“Not to mention he got it off some stranger,” Hermione added, shaking her head. “Doesn’t he think that’s suspicious?”

Harry nodded, deep in thought. “Yeah, but he won’t listen to us. We’ll just have to keep an eye on him. Dragons are illegal for a reason.”

The four of them made it back to Gryffindor Tower, their conversation buzzing with worry and excitement over Hagrid’s new egg. Inside the common room, students were sprawled out, working on homework or chatting by the fire. Neville slipped away quietly to take a shower, letting the warm water wash away the chill from the evening air.

A little while later, Neville walked back into the dormitory, drying his hair with a towel. His eyes drifted to his bedside table, where a letter sat neatly folded and sealed. He paused mid-step, cursing under his breath. I forgot to send this to Gran.

Harry was gathering his things to head for a bath when Neville walked over. “Harry,” he said, holding up the letter, “mind if I borrow Hedwig to send this?”

Harry looked up and nodded with a smile. “Sure, mate. She’ll be happy to have something to do.”

Neville grinned back. “Thanks.”

He made his way over to the snowy white owl perched near the window. Hedwig hooted softly, tilting her head curiously as Neville approached. “Hey, girl,” Neville said gently, holding out the letter. “Can you take this to Augusta Longbottom at Longbottom Manor?”

Hedwig gave another happy hoot, as if she were agreeing. Neville tied the letter carefully to her outstretched leg and stroked her soft feathers. “Thanks, Hedwig. Safe flight.”

The owl gave a small flap of her wings, then soared gracefully out of the open window, disappearing into the night. Neville watched her until she was nothing more than a small speck against the dark sky.

With a sigh, he turned back to his bed and collapsed onto it, still damp from his shower. The day had been long, but seeing the Mooncalves had brought him a surprising sense of peace. He closed his eyes, listening to the muffled sounds of his dorm mates settling in for the night.

Kaito Akaden Chapter 141

Kaito Akaden Chapter 141

Hotaru sighed, visibly relieved. She sank onto the floor beside Kaito, pressing a hand to her chest. “I was so worried,” she confessed. “When I heard what had happened, I rushed over.”

Kushina mustered a small smile. “We’re safe, Hotaru-chan. I’ve got my little knight here,” she said, ruffling Kaito’s hair. Kaito looked down, still feeling a bit guilty, but he said nothing.

Noticing his mood, Hotaru was about to ask something when a Kaito clone poked his head through the door. “Boss, an ANBU is here,” he announced. “You’re being summoned to the Hokage’s office.”

Kaito nodded, setting the plate aside on the bedside table. He stood up, and exhaustion nearly took him off his feet. He stumbled.

“Kai-kun!” Hotaru exclaimed, catching his arm, worry returning to her face.

Kushina’s eyes went wide with alarm. “Are you all right?”

Kaito forced a small smile. “I’m fine,” he said softly.

….

Kaito leapt from one rooftop to another, ignoring the pain and fatigue gnawing at his muscles. He was headed straight for the Hokage Tower. Normally, he would have taken the door like a regular person, but he was too exhausted for any unnecessary detours. He landed lightly beside the Hokage’s office window, tapping on the glass.

“Yo, you called, Lady Tsunade?” kaito asked opening the window

Inside, Tsunade glanced up from behind the Hokage’s desk and gave a curt nod. “Get in here, brat.”

Kaito slid the window open and climbed through. The office was already crowded. Shikaku Nara stood at the back, arms crossed and eyes closed, as though deep in thought. Fugaku Uchiha was there, arms folded, his face grave. Ibiki Morino flipped through a clipboard of notes, his eyes skimming each page. Kakashi leaned against the wall near the window, he nodded to Kaito when he entered.

Tsunade sat behind the Hokage’s desk, reading a stack of reports. Papers and scrolls were spread out before her in a chaotic arrangement. When Kaito settled himself, Tsunade placed the files down, steepled her fingers, and fixed her gaze on the group.

“All right,” she said. “Report.”

Shikaku opened his eyes and sighed, stepping forward. “Every ROOT shinobi involved in the incident was either killed or captured. The total number of ROOT operatives we’ve accounted for is around one thousand, not counting the ones who attacked the Uzumaki household. Search and rescue operations are still ongoing with help from the Hyūga clan. We’ve also raided all known ROOT bases listed in the official records, again with the Hyūga’s assistance. Every one of them was completely barren—meaning they knew of our plan beforehand. We’ve dispatched tracker teams to follow any leads, but so far all trails have gone cold.”

He paused, then continued, his tone heavy. “Danzo used the attack on the Uchiha clan and the Uzumakis to cover his escape. Thanks to your involvement, Lady Tsunade, and the healing from Katsuyu, casualties were minimized. We have about one hundred confirmed civilian casualties and around two hundred shinobi casualties.”

Tsunade nodded somberly. “So that’s the damage. What about the captured ROOT members? Any leads on hidden bases we didn’t know about?”

Ibiki shook his head. “No, Lady Tsunade. The ROOT shinobi have seals placed on their minds. Any attempt to probe too deeply results in their memories being wiped. They can’t—or won’t—reveal anything. We’re stuck on that front.”

Tsunade cursed under her breath and stood, beginning to pace. “What about the elders and my old teacher, the Third Hokage? Do they have any clue where Danzo might have fled?”

Ibiki bowed slightly. “They’re not forthcoming with information. As for the Third Hokage, he claims to only know of the bases already on record. He doesn’t seem to have any information about Danzo’s whereabouts.”

Tsunade halted and narrowed her eyes. “I want a thorough investigation of the elders. Ibiki, you have my permission to look into their minds. Find some way past whatever defenses they have. I need answers.”

Ibiki nodded. “It shall be done, Lady Tsunade.” Without another word, he turned and left the office, his presence slipping away like a shadow.

After Ibiki was gone, Tsunade clenched her fists. “That bastard got away…” she growled, frustration plain in her voice.

Shikaku leaned forward, brow furrowed. “How did Danzo know about our plan? We took pains to keep it quiet.”

Kaito cleared his throat. “It’s probably because of a leak on the Daimyō’s side. Danzo must’ve had someone feeding him information from a higher level. He had too perfect a window to act.”

Kakashi pushed himself off the wall. “There’s another possibility—he might have been in contact with that masked man.”

Tsunade turned sharply to Kakashi. “What makes you say that?”

Kakashi straightened. “During the attack, the masked man was the one who dealt with the Uchiha police force, and later Itachi confronted him. If Danzo and the masked man’s interests aligned, even briefly, it could explain the timing.”

Kaito’s eyes widened slightly at that revelation. “So he killed off the Uchiha police force, just like in the original…” he murmured to himself, thinking back to his past life’s knowledge.

Tsunade’s gaze snapped to Kakashi. “Itachi fought the masked man during the attack?”

Shikaku’s eyes narrowed, listening intently, while Fugaku’s eyes widened in shock, then hardened.

Kakashi nodded and raised his hand in a subtle signal. Itachi flickered into the room, dropping to one knee. He wore his ANBU uniform and mask. “Hai, Lady Tsunade.”

Tsunade waved a hand. “At ease, Itachi.” He rose, pushing his mask up so his face was visible.

She continued, “You confronted the masked man?”

Itachi nodded. “Yes, Lady Tsunade. I encountered him while defending the clan. He was about to kill my friend Izumi. She confronted him after he murdered several of our police officers.” His voice was quiet and composed.

Tsunade’s face was grim. “So he was working with Danzo or, at the very least, took advantage of the situation.”

Kaito stepped forward, speaking softly. “I think he just took advantage of the chaos. Danzo and this masked man don’t strike me as the types to follow each other’s orders.”

Itachi’s gaze dropped momentarily before he continued. “There’s more. During our fight, I managed to land a blow and was sure I had killed him. I watched his chakra signature vanish—just like it does when someone dies. But after a short while, he appeared behind me again. If not for Kakashi-sempai’s intervention, I wouldn’t be standing here right now.”

Tsunade’s jaw tightened, and Shikaku’s brow knitted. “You’re certain you killed him once?”

Itachi nodded. “I’m certain. His chakra disappeared completely. Yet he returned as though nothing had happened.”

Tsunade shook her head. “How is that even possible?”

Fugaku closed his eyes and spoke in a measured tone, “Izanagi.”

At the mention of that word, Itachi’s eyes flicked to his father. Tsunade frowned. “Izanagi?”

Fugaku opened his eyes, voice heavy. “It’s a forbidden Uchiha technique. By sacrificing a Sharingan, the user can rewrite reality itself for a short period. Life and death can be bent, and outcomes altered. It would also explain why the dead Uchiha police officers were all missing their eyes. He probably collected them to fuel this ability.”

Tsunade looked ill, fingers curling into her palms. Shikaku’s expression turned grim. “So you think he took the eyes of the fallen Uchiha to replenish his supply of Sharingan and continue using Izanagi?”

Fugaku inclined his head. “It’s possible, and given what we’ve seen, very likely.”

Kakashi said nothing, turmoil churning inside him. He suspected the masked man’s identity, but he kept his silence. If it truly was Obito, he needed proof—he couldn’t just throw accusations around without being sure.

The room fell silent. Tsunade resumed pacing, angry energy crackling around her. Finally, she took a deep breath and spoke decisively, “We can’t dwell on what we can’t change. The masked man’s gone, Danzo’s gone. We need to move forward.”

She turned to Shikaku. “We need to pick up more mission requests starting tomorrow. We can’t let word spread that we’re weakened. Increase border patrols and keep all available jōnin in the village for the time being.”

Her attention moved to Fugaku. “I want the Uchiha to prepare for the funeral ceremony tomorrow. After that, we’ll hold my inauguration as the Fifth Hokage. I don’t want to drag this out any longer than necessary. The village needs stability.”

Fugaku nodded, accepting the task. Kakashi and Itachi also inclined their heads, acknowledging her orders.

Tsunade sighed heavily. “You’re all dismissed. Get some rest, prepare for tomorrow. We have a lot of rebuilding and reorganizing to do.”

With that, the shinobi left one by one. Kakashi vanished in a silent shunshin, Itachi followed, and Fugaku walked out with measured steps. Shikaku slipped away quietly, lost in thought.

Kaito lingered, watching Tsunade. Once they were alone, Tsunade leaned against the desk, arms folded across her chest. She let out a long, frustrated breath. “This is a mess,” she said plainly.

Shikaku, who was halfway out the door, paused and added quietly, “We couldn’t have expected this, Lady Tsunade. Even the best plans have blind spots.”

Tsunade frowned. “I know. We’ll deal with it. We’ll keep watch on the Daimyō’s court to see if we can find the leak. But for now, we can’t do much else.”

Kaito spoke up softly, “I know this isn’t ideal, but for what it’s worth, I think you’re doing great.”

“Good to hear that you think so, brat.” Tsunade sat down in her chair, leaning back. “How’s Kushina doing? Shizune mentioned she was injured during the attack. And what about those two brats how are they holding up?”

Kaito settled into a chair opposite her. “Mom’s doing fine now. She woke up about an hour ago. As for Naruto and Karin, they’re shaken but okay.”

“Good.” Tsunade nodded, her eyes softening as she looked at Kaito. “Go and get some rest, brat. You look dead on your feet. I’ll come by to check on her later, once I’m done here.”

Kaito offered a tired smile, his exhaustion evident in the droop of his shoulders. “Yes, Lady Tsunade,” he said quietly, then slipped back out the same window he’d entered, heading for home.

Alone again, Tsunade let out a soft sigh and turned her attention back to the paperwork spread haphazardly across her desk. Everything had changed overnight, and there was much to do. For now, she would focus on sorting through the mess of reports and documents, one page at a time.

Hogwarts: Neville’s Insert Chapter 24

Hogwarts: Neville’s Insert Chapter 24

Harry, who had been pacing around the dusty floor, stopped and frowned. He looked like he wanted to argue but seemed worn out. “If it really is the Stone, we have to do something,” he said quietly.

Neville cut in, speaking calmly but firmly. “And what can we do, really? We’re only first years. We can’t stop Snape if he truly wants it. And if it’s not the Stone, we’re worrying over nothing.” He shrugged. “I’m off back to the common room. There’s a party on, and it might cheer us all up. If you lot want to come, feel free. If not, stay here and fret.”

He headed for the door, leaving them to think. Hermione frowned but nodded and said, “He’s right, you know. We’re just kids. Let’s go back to the common room.” She followed Neville.

Harry sighed. “Yeah, let’s head back,” he said.

Ron grumbled under his breath, “No shock that she’d agree with him,” and trudged after them all.

…

It was a late afternoon that felt more like early evening, and for the first time in ages, the Scottish highlands were filled with warm, gentle sunlight. Beams of soft light slipped through the tall windows of the Hogwarts library, stretching across desks and chairs, making the dust motes sparkle as they drifted quietly in the still air. It had been a long, damp stretch of bad weather lately—rain and mist clinging to the castle walls. But now, at last, the sky was a bright, clear blue, the sort of blue that made you think of summer holidays and lazy afternoons by the lake.

The library was almost peaceful. Most students, eager to enjoy the fine weather, had headed outdoors. You could guess that some would be down by the lake, soaking up the sun, or strolling around the greenhouses, or even sneaking off towards the Quidditch pitch. But here, in this hushed space, there were still a few who chose to stay inside and study. Among them were Neville Longbottom and Hermione Granger, sitting opposite each other at one of the broad wooden tables.

Hermione had her head bent low over her notes, her bushy hair falling around her face. She was reviewing textbooks and crinkled bits of parchment filled with tidy writing. Exams were not far off, and Hermione took revision seriously. She always had some subject to go over, some facts to file away in her mind, determined to be as ready as possible.

Neville, on the other hand, had a large, potions book open in front of him, Practical Potioneering: A Healer’s Handbook not a standard Hogwarts textbook but a book from the longbottom's personal library. These days, Neville was on a mission that had little to do with school exams. He was looking for a way to help his parents—Frank and Alice Longbottom—who had been tortured into madness by the Cruciatus Curse many years ago. The thought weighed heavily on him. As he gazed down at the pages, he tried to piece together what he knew, what he’d read, and what he could guess.

From everything Neville had learned about the effects of that curse, he understood that his parents’ minds had effectively shut down to preserve the most basic functions needed for survival. The Cruciatus Curse was pure agony, as though countless white-hot knives were stabbing you at once. A body and mind could endure only so much before something had to give. For Alice and Frank, their minds had sealed off many parts—emotions, memories, even clear thoughts. According to the hospital reports, they no longer felt pain, nor did they display proper emotional responses. Still, when Neville and his grandmother visited, there were moments, tiny sparks of recognition, suggesting that somewhere deep within their damaged minds, something familiar still lingered. If those faint glimmers existed, perhaps all was not lost.

Neville had read that the area of the brain dealing with fear, emotion, and memory—the amygdala—was likely shut down or harmed in his parents. If he could somehow restart or heal it, they might return to who they once were. He had filled page after page of a secret notepad—charmed so only he could read it—with ideas and theories. Some were wild guesses, while others were more carefully considered. But Neville was no Healer, and magic for healing minds was not something deeply researched.

One idea he had seemed cruel: use the Cruciatus Curse again. The thinking behind it was that if the original cause had forced the mind to shut down, maybe the same cause could shock it awake. But Neville hated this thought. The idea of hurting his parents or people that looked like them made him sick. It wasn’t even worth proper consideration. He marked it as a last resort—really, something he would never try unless there was no other option. Hurting them again? That would be monstrous.

Another idea was to try healing the damaged part of the brain if he could figure out how. Perhaps a potion might mend it. The problem was that none of the healing spells or potions that he had read about, could regrow something like the amygdala. Regrowing bones was one thing—Skele-Gro did that. But regrowing or awakening a part of the brain that governed feelings and memories seemed far beyond known magic.

Neville had even spoken with Madam Pomfrey. She told him that while healing organs was sometimes possible, regrowing one entirely was another matter. There was no known potion that could regenerate an organ or any part of it, at least not to her knowledge. Still, Neville refused to give up. Just because it hadn’t been done before didn’t mean it was impossible. He thought about science—he’d read that Muggle scientists had studied creatures like axolotls, which could regrow limbs and organs. If science could do something like that, then why couldn’t magic? After all, they’d managed to create methods of instant transportation. Regrowing an organ should be possible too, shouldn’t it?

He sighed, pressing his forehead against the desk. His head throbbed from all this thinking. Coming up with ideas was easy enough, but making them real felt like climbing a steep, endless hill.

From across the table, Hermione looked up from her notes, concern shining in her brown eyes. “Are you all right, Neville?” she asked softly, leaning toward him. She had noticed how tense he’d been ever since the Christmas break.

Neville kept his forehead on the desk and mumbled, “Yeah, I’m fine… Just thinking, that’s all.”

He knew Hermione wouldn’t push him too hard if he didn’t feel like talking. She was smart and caring but also respected when someone needed a bit of space. She gave a small nod and went back to her book, though he could sense that she was still worried about him.

It wasn’t long before Harry Potter and Ron Weasley turned up. Harry approached with a small grin, Ron trailing behind, both boys looking a bit windblown as if they’d just come in from outside.

“Hey, you two,” Harry greeted, sliding into a seat next to Hermione. Ron took a chair beside Neville, though Neville still kept his head down. Hermione nodded in greeting, her attention drifting back to her notes. Neville barely lifted his head, letting out a quiet grunt to acknowledge them.

Harry glanced at Neville’s hunched figure. “What’s wrong with him?” he asked, nodding towards Neville but directing the question to Hermione.

Hermione sighed, looking at Harry and Ron with a hint of annoyance. “He’s just a bit tired, I think. You two really should be focusing on exams as well. They’re not going to pass themselves, you know.” She turned her stare on them meaningfully.

Harry pulled out a stack of parchment and a couple of Hermione’s carefully prepared notes. “I am studying,” he said with a bit of a smile. “Your notes are really helpful, Hermione.”

Ron rolled his eyes dramatically and groaned, “Bloody hell, Hermione, the exams aren’t until ages away.” He leaned back and crossed his arms, looking as if the mere mention of studying put a sour taste in his mouth.

Hermione snapped, “Ten weeks, Ron. That’s not ages! That’s no time at all, not if you want to do well. Honestly!”

Ron grumbled, “ You make it sound like we’ve got to know every fact in every book. Look at Neville—he’s got a headache just from all this studying, “

Hermione sniffed, trying to look unbothered. “You do realise these exams matter for getting into our second-year classes, don’t you?”

Harry tried to reason with Ron, “She’s got a point, mate. We do have to pass if we want to move on. I’d rather not end up failing.”

Ron thumped his head softly on the table and gave a muffled, “Not you as well, Harry.”

Neville, tuning out his surroundings for a moment, let his thoughts return to his parents. He wondered how they’d ended up in such a terrible state. As far as he knew, his mum and dad had been hidden away just like the Potters. How, then, had Bellatrix Lestrange and her followers found them? Was there a traitor, as there had been for the Potters? Who had served as their Secret-Keeper?

Another question nagged at him: he knew Dumbledore had instructed both the Potters and the Longbottoms to go into hiding using the Fidelius Charm. If his mother had been Harry’s godmother—now that Sirius was no longer in the picture—she should have gained custody of Harry. Neville was certain that Dumbledore hadn’t helped Sirius because he wanted Harry placed with the Dursleys to shape him in a particular way. He remembered Hagrid taking Harry straight to Privet Drive after that dreadful night, before Sirius was even convicted, despite the fact that Sirius, as Harry’s godfather, should have been given custody.

Now Neville wasn’t sure if Alice really had been Harry’s godmother, or if that was something he’d once read in a fanfiction. Still, it seemed plausible. Considering all the photographs Neville had seen of Alice and Lily together at Hogwarts and beyond, it was clear they were very close friends. If that were true, then Dumbledore suddenly became Neville’s prime suspect for having leaked the Longbottoms’ location.

Neville groaned quietly at the headache forming behind his eyes. “I need more information,” he thought. “Maybe I should talk to Gran about this.” If he understood more about what had happened to his parents, he might uncover something crucial.

He suddenly sat upright and grabbed a clean bit of parchment, causing the others to glance over in surprise. Neville wrote a quick note to his grandmother, asking if they could meet in Hogsmeade or arrange some way of having a talk. He wanted to ask her a few things face-to-face. He thought maybe he could ask Professor McGonagall if he could leave the grounds for a short time to meet Gran or sneak out if she didn't allow it. It was a long shot, but he had to try.

After folding the letter neatly and tucking it into his pocket, Neville turned to Harry. “Harry,” he said softly, “would you mind if I use Hedwig later? I need to send this to my gran.”

Harry looked up and gave a friendly nod. “Sure thing, Neville. Hedwig’s been a bit bored, anyway. She’ll like the chance to stretch her wings.”

Neville managed a small smile. “Thanks, Harry,” he said, feeling a little lighter now that he had a plan. It might not solve things straight away, but it was a start.

They returned to their quiet work for a few moments. Hermione went back to flipping pages and taking notes. Ron tried not to complain too loudly, and Harry attempted to absorb some of Hermione’s notes.

Just then, Ron’s eyes drifted towards a large shape moving between the shelves. He gave a small start and said in a hushed tone, “Hagrid! What are you doing in here?”

The others looked up, startled to see the half-giant gamekeeper shuffling through the library of all places. Hagrid looked completely out of place, towering over the shelves, trying to hide something behind his back. He wore a nervous smile that didn’t quite fit under his wild beard.

“Ah—jus’ lookin’,” he said, glancing around as if expecting the librarian, Madam Pince, to throw him out at any second. “Nothin’ important, jus’ a bit o’ readin’.”

This was suspicious enough to get everyone’s interest. Normally, Hagrid didn’t poke around the library much. Harry, Hermione, Neville, and Ron exchanged curious looks.

Hagrid’s eyes narrowed slightly. “An’ what’re you lot doin’ in ‘ere on a day like this?” he asked, voice suddenly suspicious. “Not still tryin’ ter find out about Nicolas Flamel, are yeh?”

Ron puffed out his chest a bit. “Oh, we found that out ages ago,” he said proudly. “We know who he is, and we know what that dog—Fluffy—is guarding. it's a Sorcerer's St --"

“Shhh!” Hagrid hissed, whipping his head around. “Not so loud, Ron. Do yeh want the whole school ter know?”

Harry, trying to calm things down, said softly, “Hagrid, we’re not going to shout it about. But we did want to ask you a couple of questions about… well, about what might be down there besides Fluffy.”

Hagrid’s eyes darted nervously. “SHHHH!” he said again, leaning forward so that his beard nearly brushed the table. “Listen, I can’ talk in ‘ere. If yeh want ter ask me summat, yeh meet me after dinner, outside the Great Hall. I’m not promisin’ I’ll say anythin’ at all, mind, but don’ go rabbitin’ on about it in the library. Students ain’t s’pposed ter know anythin’ about that. They’ll think I told yeh.”

He straightened up, something still tucked behind his back, and began to shuffle off. “See yeh later, then,” said Harry quietly, and Hagrid gave a small nod before disappearing around a bookshelf and then out of sight.

As soon as he was gone, Hermione frowned and tapped her quill against the desk. “What on earth was he hiding behind his back?”

“Probably something to do with the Stone,” said Ron thoughtfully. “I mean, what else would get him to come in here? He’s not the study type.”

Hermione shook her head. “Not sure. But let’s see what he was looking at.” She started to get up, but Ron was quicker. He wandered down the aisle Hagrid had come from and returned a minute later carrying a heavy armful of books. He dropped them onto the table with a thump.

Neville, who had been trying to sort through his own worries, looked up. The titles on the covers made his eyebrows rise.

“Dragons,” Ron whispered eagerly. “Hagrid was looking at dragons. Look at these: Dragon Species of Great Britain and Ireland; From Egg to Inferno, A Dragon Keeper’s Guide. He’s up to something with dragons.”

Harry scratched his head. “Hagrid’s always wanted a dragon,” he said slowly. “He told me that the first time I met him. Said he’d love a dragon as a pet.”

Neville groaned internally. “Of course, the whole dragon egg thing with Hagrid,” he thought, yet he couldn’t deny feeling a bit excited at the thought of seeing a real dragon.

“But it’s against wizarding law,” said Ron, keeping his voice low. “Has been for ages—Breeding dragons was outlawed by the Warlocks’ Convention of 1709. Everyone knows that. And it’s not as if you can keep a dragon secret for long. Too much fire, too much danger. My brother Charlie works with them in Romania and he’s got loads of burns. Letting a dragon loose around here would be mad.”

“But are there wild dragons in Britain?” Harry asked, curious.

Ron gave a small shrug. “A few, yeah. There are Common Welsh Greens and Hebridean Blacks. The Ministry of Magic keeps them hidden from Muggles. They’ve got folks whose whole job is to Memory-Charm Muggles who spot them. I heard my dad talking about it once.”

Hermione glanced at the books. “So what is Hagrid doing looking up dragons at a time like this? He knows it’s against the law. It might have something to do with what he’s guarding for Dumbledore. Or maybe he’s just being—well, Hagrid.”

Kaito Akaden Chapter 140

Kaito Akaden Chapter 140

At that moment, Shisui approached them. Kaito managed a shaky sigh of relief before explaining, “Danzo found out about what we were doing. He’s launched an attack on the Uchiha clan… and hit us here to create a distraction.”

Shisui’s single, intense eye widened. “The Uchiha clan is under attack?” He moved as if to rush out the door, but Kaito raised a hand to stop him.

“Don’t go, Shisui,” Kaito said, voice firm but sympathetic. “You’re still hurt and not fully recovered. Lady Tsunade and the others have already arrived to help. every thing is under control. I need you to stay here and protect everyone while I head over.”

Shisui tensed, torn by the urge to protect his clan. But he knew Kaito was right. His shoulders slumped slightly, and he nodded reluctantly. “Alright,” he said quietly.

As one of Kaito’s clones moved forward to pick Kushina up and carry her to her room, Shisui stood guard, Kaito nodded to him before teleporting away.

….

The morning sun had fully risen over the Village Hidden in the Leaves. Yet, despite the warm glow, the entire village was on high alert and under strict lockdown. Shinobi rushed through the narrow streets and past bustling shops, their expressions grim. Villagers whispered quietly to their neighbors, casting nervous glances over their shoulders. Everyone was talking about what had happened the night before, and rumors flew through the marketplace like startled birds.

A woman carrying a cloth bag stepped closer, leaning toward the shopkeeper, and asked softly, “Hey, Yasaki-san, are these rumors true?”

The shopkeeper, an elderly woman, leaned in and replied just as softly, “Hai, I heard the Third Hokage isn’t Hokage anymore. Lady Tsunade has taken over.” Her voice turned conspiratorial as she took the basket of vegetables to be counted.

A man picking out some cucumbers said, “Yes, I heard she exposed the Third Hokage and his advisors for their wrongdoing—something about their involvement in the destruction of the Senju Clan because the Senju refused to support him. Can you believe it?”

The shopkeeper nodded. “That’s what everyone’s saying. The Third Hokage and his advisors have been accused of terrible things—like orchestrating the downfall of the Senju clan simply because they wouldn’t support him. They say he was involved in the Orochimaru incident too.”

“I heard something even more disturbing,” the man whispered. “People claim Lord Danzo kidnapped children for Orochimaru’s experiments, and that the Third Hokage knew about it the whole time.”

The shopkeeper nodded gravely. “I also heard that when Lady Tsunade tried to arrest Danzo, he attacked both the Uchiha clan and the Uzumakis. Did you see the aftermath near the Uchiha district? The street’s closed off.”

“Oh, so that’s what those explosions were yesterday.” A woman looked worried. “Oh dear, are they okay? I hope Lady Kushina and her children are alright. They’ve been through so much already.”

“I think they’re alright. That’ll be 100 ryō,” said the shopkeeper handing the man the bag with the packed vegetables. “Apparently, that Uzumaki kid—the older boy—saved both the Uchiha clan and his own family. Some say he’s the one who convinced Lady Tsunade to come back to the village.”

“He’s becoming more and more like his father, the Fourth Hokage,” the man added, handing over money.

“If the Fourth were still alive, things would never have gotten this far,” the woman sighed.

The shopkeeper shook her head. “Don’t say that. He gave his life to save us, and we should be grateful. If it weren’t for his sacrifice back then… well, I don’t even want to think about it.”

…

Within a large, dome-shaped barrier created by glowing chakra chains, one of Kaito’s clones sat guard atop the Uzumaki home. The golden chains wound their way into the ground, forming a protective dome. Inside, two of his clones cleared debris from the previous night’s attack, while two more dealt with the lifeless bodies of ROOT shinobi. The front hall of the house was singed and partially blown apart by a wind-enhanced fire jutsu. The living room was half-destroyed. Elsewhere, the house remained mostly intact, but the damage was still significant.

In Kushina’s bedroom, the real Kaito sat at her bedside, holding his mother’s hand. Beside her, Naruto and Karin slept curled up, their cheeks stained with dried tears. Kaito’s gaze lingered on Kushina’s face. Her breathing was calm but occasionally hitched with pain.

Kaito’s mind churned with last night’s memories, replaying every horrific moment. He had almost lost his mother. The clones’ memories tormented him—the wind-enhanced fire, the desperate attempts to reach Kushina and the others in time, and the unbearable feeling of watching his world nearly collapse.

“I’m not strong enough,” he thought, his heart twisting. “If Shisui hadn’t stepped in… and if I hadn’t teleported just in time…” Tears gathered at the corners of his eyes, one sliding down his cheek. He struggled with the memory of feeling utterly helpless, even though he had done so much to protect them.

After he saved his family, Kaito went back to help the Uchiha clan. By the time he arrived, they had everything under control and had successfully repelled and captured the ROOT shinobi. Kaito then rushed back home, leaving the rest to his shadow clones. He’d known that Danzo would flee the village amid the chaos. Once back, he told Shizune and Shisui what had happened. Shizune went to assist in the hospital, surely overflowing with injured Uchiha, while Shisui left to help his clan.

In his previous life, Kaito had been an orphan. Now, reborn into the Naruto world, he cherished his family. He had lost his father, Minato, because he hadn’t acted in time, and nearly losing his mother as well—she had only survived by sheer luck. The same had almost happened again the previous night; Kushina survived once more only by chance. It was a harsh reminder of how weak he truly was. He had believed he was strong enough now, but the events of the night before proved otherwise. He stayed awake until dawn, watching over Kushina as she slept, filled with worry.

Kaito lowered his head, resting it lightly against her hand. After a while, he felt Kushina stir. He opened his eyes and leaned back as Kushina slowly opened hers, panic flickering in her gaze as she remembered last night’s attack. She winced in pain at the sudden movement.

Kaito placed a gentle hand on her shoulder. “Mom, please,” he said softly. “Shizune-san said you need rest. Don’t strain yourself.” He adjusted her pillows, helping her lie back more comfortably.

Kushina’s eyes darted around anxiously. “What… what happened?” she asked, her voice hoarse.

Kaito exhaled slowly. “Danzo found out about our plan and attacked the Uchiha clan—and us—before escaping,” he explained. He gestured gently to Naruto and Karin. “They’re fine, just exhausted. They cried themselves to sleep after last night’s attack.”

Kushina’s eyes softened. She reached out, stroking Naruto’s hair, then Karin’s. “I’m so glad everyone’s okay,” she whispered.

Kaito lowered his head, his voice tight with guilt. “I’m sorry I… I wasn’t here sooner.” His throat caught, and he forced the words out, eyes watering. “If Shisui hadn’t protected you… if I hadn’t arrived in time…”

Kushina reached up, wiping the tears from his cheeks. “It wasn’t your fault, Kai-kun,” she reassured him softly.

His eyes closed, voice trembling. “You could have… if Shisui hadn’t saved you…” He couldn’t finish the thought.

She pulled him into a hug. “It wasn’t your fault,” she murmured against his hair. “We’re alive because you saved us. Don’t blame yourself.”

They stayed like that for a while. When they parted, Kaito wiped his eyes and asked gently, “Mom, please let me heal you,” pushing up his sleeve. “I nearly lost you… I can’t stand the thought of that happening again. Please…” His voice was raw with emotion.

Kushina shook her head. “Kai-kun, I can’t knowingly let you shorten your own life for me. As your mother, that’s something I just can’t do.”

“But Mom,” Kaito insisted, “I have more chakra than I did back then. I’m sure it won’t happen again. That time it happened because I was younger and didn’t have enough chakra.”

Kushina took his hand and kissed it, tears welling in her eyes. “I’m sorry, Kai-kun. I just can’t.”

Kaito bowed his head, knowing he couldn’t change her mind. Just then, a Kaito clone came in wearing an apron. “Good morning, Mom! I made breakfast,” he said cheerfully. On the tray were simple tamagoyaki, rice, and chicken teriyaki.

"good morning clone-kun, and thank you" she greeted him with a smile as she tried to take the food.

Kaito took the tray. “You need to rest, Mom. Don’t strain yourself; I’ll feed you.”

Kushina tried to protest, but when she saw how determined he was, she relented. Kaito carefully fed her small bites of food. As they settled into this quiet routine:

“Mm… something smells good,” Naruto mumbled drowsily, rubbing his eyes.

Kushina giggled softly, and Naruto perked up. Realizing his mother was awake, he shouted, “Mom!” and tried to hug her. Before he could accidentally hurt her, Kaito’s chakra chain gently held him back.

“Naruto, be careful,” Kaito cautioned. “She’s hurt. Don’t jump on her.”

Naruto’s blue eyes went wide with worry. “I’m sorry, I’m just so happy you’re okay. I was so scared after what happened. ya know!”

Kushina smiled and opened her arms. “It’s alright, ya know. Come give Mama a hug.”

Kaito released him, and Naruto gave her a gentle hug. Naruto’s exclamation woke Karin, who watched them quietly. Kushina smiled at Karin. “Come here, Karin-chan, give me a hug too.”

“I’m glad you’re okay, Aunt Kushina,” Karin said, hugging Kushina with relief.

After a few moments, the Kaito clone in the apron poked his head into the room. “hey you two, why don’t you two wash up and have some breakfast in the kitchen? I made enough for everyone.”

They nodded and left, looking relieved and hungry. Kaito turned back to feeding Kushina, carefully offering small bites until she seemed more comfortable.

…

A girl with midnight-blue hair rushed through the trees, worry etched on her face. Her hair was tied in a ponytail, and she wore a white hoodie with short sleeves over a black long-sleeved shirt. Her pale eyes, tinted with purple, showed concern as she neared the damaged Uzumaki house.

Meanwhile, outside the barrier, another Kaito clone gathered the ROOT corpses. He worked efficiently, dragging bodies into a pile to seal them into a scroll later. He paused, sensing a familiar presence. As she landed in front of the barrier, her eyes were filled with worry as she took in the damaged front of the house and charred walls.

The clone waved. “Hey, Hotaru-chan,” he called. “Don’t panic—it looks worse than it is. The real Kaito is inside with Mom. Just walk through; the barrier will let you in.”

Hotaru nodded, relief visible on her face. “Thank you, Clone-kun.” She stepped forward, and the barrier parted as though acknowledging her presence.

Inside, she found another Kaito clone wearing an apron plating breakfast. "boss's in mom's room" He pointed her toward Kushina’s room. Hotaru rushed down the hall.

“Kaito! Lady Kushina!” she exclaimed, voice full of concern. “Are you all right? I heard what happened and came as hear what happend. Is everyone safe? Naruto-kun, Karin-chan? You look a bit pale, Lady Kushina. Are you alright?”

Kaito raised a hand, calming her. “Hotaru, we’re fine. Mom’s just a bit hurt, but she’ll recover. Naruto and Karin are safe; they’re just washing up now.”

Hotaru sighed, visibly relieved. She sank onto the floor beside Kaito, pressing a hand to her chest. “I was so worried,” she confessed. “When I heard what had happened, I rushed over.”

Kushina mustered a small smile. “We’re safe, Hotaru-chan. I’ve got my little knight here,” she said, ruffling Kaito’s hair. Kaito looked down, still feeling a bit guilty, but he said nothing.

Noticing his mood, Hotaru was about to ask something when a Kaito clone poked his head through the door. “Boss, an ANBU is here,” he announced. “You’re being summoned to the Hokage’s office.”

Kaito nodded, setting the plate aside on the bedside table. He stood up, and exhaustion nearly took him off his feet. He stumbled.

“Kai-kun!” Hotaru exclaimed, catching his arm, worry returning to her face.

Kushina’s eyes went wide with alarm. “Are you all right?”

Kaito forced a small smile. “I’m fine,” he said softly.

Hogwarts: Neville’s Insert Chapter 23

Hogwarts: Neville’s Insert Chapter 23

Hermione said, "It means you never die."

Ron sounded offended. "I know what it means!"

Hermione shot him a look and said, "That's what Fluffy's guarding on the third floor—that's what's under the trapdoor: the Philosopher's Stone."

Neville said, "I doubt that," yawning. He stood up. "I doubt Nicolas Flamel would give something so valuable to Dumbledore of all people." Standing up, Neville said, "Well, I'm knackered. I'm off to bed. See you lot tomorrow." He slung his bag over his shoulder and paused before digging into his bag and taking out a small album.

Neville handed it over to Harry and said, "Here you go, Harry. I almost forgot—this is for you."

Harry took it and asked, "What's this?" as he opened it.

Neville shrugged and said, "It's pictures of your mum. Apparently, my mum and yours were best friends, and my mum was even your godmother and yours mine. Anyway, I copied some of her pictures for you."

Harry was stunned, looking at the moving pictures of his mother in the album—from when she was their age to when they were adults.

Neville yawned and said, "Well, good night." He was too tired and just wanted to sleep.

….

Neville strolled along with the rest of the Gryffindor's first years, heading into the North Tower Courtyard. The match had ended not too long ago—Gryffindor against Hufflepuff—and they were returning from the stands. Almost everyone around him was in high spirits, chattering away about the victory. It was a fairly pleasant afternoon, and the sun had dipped just enough to cast a soft light on the old stone walls. A gentle breeze carried the distant voices of other students still lingering about, most discussing the outcome of the match.

The Gryffindors were buzzing with talk of how strange and unfair the match had been at times. They went over every last detail, as was common after any Quidditch match: who’d caught the Snitch, who’d dodged the Bludgers best, and who’d done something foolish. But the main point of discussion—nearly everyone mentioned it—was how Professor Snape, acting as referee, had been rather biased. Snape had awarded a penalty to Hufflepuff because one of the Weasley twins had accidentally sent a Bludger in Snape’s direction. Granted, it did nearly knock Snape sideways, but no one believed that deserved a penalty. Then, Snape had given Hufflepuff a second penalty for what seemed to be no reason at all. It had left a sour taste in many mouths, despite the Gryffindor win.

Ron was being especially loud about it. “I mean, did you see that?” he said, waving his arms about as they walked. “Snape was giving them penalties like they were sweets! Completely out of order! He was just waiting for a chance to hand Hufflepuff some points, I’m sure of it!” Seamus and Lavender joined in, nodding firmly and adding their own complaints: “Too right,” said Seamus. “He’s got it in for Gryffindor, everyone knows it.” Lavender shook her head and said, “It’s not fair at all. He just can’t stand to see Gryffindor do well.”

Hermione, walking beside Neville, also looked annoyed. She glanced over at Neville and huffed, “Professor Snape’s behavior was absolutely unfair, wasn’t it? Just shocking! I know referees are meant to be strict, but that was something else.” She folded her arms tightly. “I’ve half a mind to write a note to Professor McGonagall about it. There’s meant to be some sense of fairness in the game, and that was just Snape being Snape, as usual. Honestly, I shouldn’t be surprised, but I still am.”

Neville, on the other hand, didn’t care much about Quidditch. He found the game dumb and a waste of time, not worth getting worked up about. Neville offered a small shrug. He had no desire to get worked up over a silly game, no matter how important Quidditch seemed to everyone else. “It’s Snape,” he murmured quietly, keeping his voice low. “What can any of us do about it? At least Harry caught the Snitch, so we won. That’s two matches in a row for him, isn’t it? Pretty impressive. I doubt many first-years have a record like that.”

Hermione sighed, crossing her arms. “I suppose you’re right,” she said. “We did win, and that’s something. I just wish the match had felt fair.”

They reached a small bench in the courtyard, not too far from a patch of well-tended flowers. Neville settled down on it and let himself relax. The courtyard was calmer than the stands had been. Hermione took a seat right next to him. Meanwhile, Ron was still pacing about, running his hands through his ginger hair and muttering under his breath about Snape’s blatant cheating. Hermione, Neville, and Ron had decided to wait there for Harry before heading back to the common room. The rest of the Gryffindors had gone on ahead, no doubt eager to start the victory party Fred and George were surely throwing. The Weasley twins loved a good celebration, and with Gryffindor’s win, there’d be no shortage of laughter, sweets, and noise in the common room tonight.

Ron still worked up about the match, shifted his complaints from Snape to Malfoy. During the match, Malfoy had walked over to where they were seated to taunt them, he was successful in riling up Ron, and Ron had ended up punching Malfoy right in the face. Neville could still picture the look of surprise on Malfoy’s pale features. Naturally, Crabbe and Goyle had rushed in to defend their friend, and it had nearly turned into an all-out brawl right there in the stands. Neville, who normally avoided fighting, had decided he’d had enough. He’d whipped out his wand and cast a Body-Bind Curse on all three of them—Malfoy, Crabbe, and Goyle—leaving them stiff as boards, unable to move. Neville still thought it was rather funny. By the time they’d left the stands, the three of them were probably still stuck there if no one had come along to free them. Ron now considered it quite a moment of pride. he taunted Malfoy for the rest of the match up until they left, Ron saw it as a second, smaller victory alongside the Quidditch one.

At last, Neville couldn’t help himself. He opened one eye and said softly, “It’s just a game, Ron.” He tried to keep his tone gentle and calm. “Really, you’re getting yourself all worked up. We won, didn’t we? We came out on top, so what’s the point of moaning about it?”

Ron spun round, looking astonished that Neville had dared to downplay Quidditch. “Just a game?” he burst out, his voice cracking with disbelief. “Just a game? Neville, Quidditch is everything here! It’s tradition, honour, house pride!” He flung his arms about, red in the face. “It’s not just a silly game. It means something!”

But Neville, now slightly annoyed, reached into his robes for his wand. He knew a little jinx he’d been practicing. Without opening his eyes fully, he cast “Langlock” on Ron. At once, Ron fell silent, his mouth moving but no sound coming out. He looked shocked, pawing at his own tongue.

Hermione gasped, giving Neville a quick swat on the shoulder. “Neville! you shouldn’t do that to our friends!” she pulled out her wand, muttering the counter-curse. Ron stumbled back, coughing and touching his tongue gingerly. Once he was free of the jinx, he glared at Neville.

“That was… that was strange,” Ron said, still a bit startled. “My tongue… it wouldn’t budge! Don’t do that again!” He then turned to Hermione and said, “Thanks. That was a right weird feeling.”

Hermione explained quietly, “Langlock is a jinx that makes your tongue stick to the roof of your mouth. It’s not very nice to use on your friends.” She shot Neville a disapproving look. Neville just shrugged, closing his eyes again and leaning back more comfortably. He didn’t feel guilty—Ron had been working his last nerve—but he supposed he shouldn’t have done it. Still, it was over now.

It had been about two months since Christmas, and things had changed in small but noticeable ways. After Christmas break, Neville remembered meeting Hermione early one morning after his usual workout. She’d mentioned how thoughtful Neville’s Christmas gift to Harry had been, and Neville had tried to brush it off as nothing special. Truth be told, it had been a simple gesture. Over Christmas, Neville had sorted through some old photos he had, and he’d copied one and given it to Harry—just something nice, not worth making a fuss over.

Harry, for his part, had come to thank Neville in private later that day. He’d said it was the best gift he’d received, and he felt bad for not thanking him straightaway the day before. He’d thought Neville was tired and didn’t want to bother him just to say thanks. Neville never felt comfortable making a fuss about such things, so he told him that when he was going through some of his parent’s old photos during Christmas break they found them, so he copied them and gave them to Harry. It's no big deal,

This change had brought Harry a bit closer to Neville and Hermione. Harry had taken to joining their spell practice sessions, spending time with them both. Ron, meanwhile, had seemed annoyed by this. Neville had noticed before how Ron always tried to keep harry from making friends, pulling him away whenever he got too close to Neville or spent too long talking with Hermione.

The months had passed without much fuss, except for Harry’s growing worry when he found out Snape would referee the Gryffindor vs Hufflepuff match.

Speaking quietly so that no one else would hear, Harry told the other three about Snape's sudden, sinister desire to be a Quidditch referee.

 "Don't play," said Hermione at once.

"Say you're ill," said Ron.

"Pretend to break your leg," Hermione suggested.

"Really break your leg," said Ron.

"I can't," said Harry. "There isn't a reserve Seeker. If I back out, Gryffindor can't play at all."

 Harry shook his head. “I can’t,” he’d said. “There isn’t another Seeker to stand in for me. If I don’t play, Gryffindor can’t play at all.”

 Neville, who had been leaning against a wall, had pointed out, “He’s not going to kill you out there, Harry. It’s a Quidditch pitch, not a battlefield.”

Harry had nodded. “I suppose I’ll play. If I back out, the Slytherins will all say I’m scared of facing Snape. I’ll show them. If we win while Snape’s the referee, that’ll wipe the smirks off their faces.”

They hadn’t talked about Nicolas Flamel. since Neville had told them about Flamel.

Back in the present, Neville opened his eyes when he heard footsteps. Harry came running towards them, looking quite frantic. He had that excited yet anxious look, and his hair was even messier than usual. Hermione stood up at once and asked. “Harry! Where have you been?” she asked.

Ron, having recovered from the langlock jinx, rushed over to Harry, practically jumping on the spot, grinning. “You won it for us, Harry! And you’ll never guess—I gave Malfoy a shiner in the stands, right on his smug face! And Neville here knocked him, Crabbe, and Goyle stiff as planks. They were all left in the stands!” Ron sounded almost proud. “Everyone’s waiting for you in the common room. Fred and George nicked some cakes and other stuff from the kitchens. It’s going to be a proper party!”

Harry, however, looked as if he had more pressing matters on his mind. He caught his breath and said, “Never mind that now. Let’s find a place to talk. I’ve got something to tell you……..” He hurried them along to an empty room near the corridor. Neville followed, Hermione right behind him, and Ron bringing up the rear.

Harry checked that Peeves wasn’t around, pushing the door open with caution and peering inside. The room was small and dusty, with an old desk and a few chairs. Nothing special, but certainly private enough. He motioned them all inside and closed the door quietly. Then he turned to face them.

“You won’t believe what I’ve just seen,” Harry said, voice low but urgent. “We were right. It is the Philosopher’s Stone. Snape’s trying to get it, and he’s forcing Professor Quirrell to help him. I heard him asking if Quirrell knew how to get past that three-headed dog—Fluffy—and he also said something about Quirrell’s ‘hocus pocus.’ I reckon there are all sorts of enchantments guarding the Stone, not just the dog. Different teachers must have set them up, and Quirrell’s done something to keep the Stone safe. Snape needs Quirrell to break his own enchantment. It’s all happening right under our noses.”

Hermione’s eyes went wide. “So… so you mean the Stone’s only safe as long as Professor Quirrell can stand up to Snape?” She looked genuinely alarmed, and she wrung her hands together. “But… he’s such a nervous sort, what if he can’t hold out?”

Ron gulped, his bravado fading. “It’ll be gone by next Tuesday, then,” he said, eyes darting between them.

Neville rolled his eyes at this, letting out a sigh. He had never been fully convinced by all this worry. “I doubt that it’s really the Philosopher’s Stone. You’re all panicking for nothing, if you ask me.” He leaned against the wall, arms folded over his chest.

Ron blinked at Neville. “What are you on about, mate? Of course, it’s the real Stone! Hagrid told us it belonged to old Flamel, and everyone knows he’s famous for making it, isn’t he?”

Hermione nodded at Ron’s words. “It’s quite clear, Neville. Nicolas Flamel gave the Philosopher’s Stone to Dumbledore so he could keep it safe. That must be why it’s here. Dumbledore’s the best wizard around, isn’t he? He beat Grindelwald ages ago, and people say he’s the only one You-Know-Who was ever scared of.”

Ron joined in, looking pleased with himself. “My mum always says Dumbledore is the best wizard there is. Everyone knows that.”

Neville sighed, rubbing his face as he thought it over. “But why would Flamel give the Stone to Dumbledore now?” he asked. “Flamel’s had it for over six hundred years, and everyone knows he owns it. If dark wizards had known about it all this time—and they surely would have—wouldn’t they have tried to steal it long ago? If it was safe with Flamel all this while, why bother moving it now?” He looked doubtful that the stone in Hogwarts was the real thing he couldn’t see Flamel suddenly fearing a weak Voldemort.

Harry, who had been pacing around the dusty floor, stopped and frowned. He looked like he wanted to argue but seemed worn out. “If it really is the Stone, we have to do something,” he said quietly.

Neville cut in, speaking calmly but firmly. “And what can we do, really? We’re only first years. We can’t stop Snape if he truly wants it. And if it’s not the Stone, we’re worrying over nothing.” He shrugged. “I’m off back to the common room. There’s a party on, and it might cheer us all up. If you lot want to come, feel free. If not, stay here and fret.”

He headed for the door, leaving them to think. Hermione frowned but nodded and said, “He’s right, you know. We’re just kids. Let’s go back to the common room.” She followed Neville.

Harry sighed. “Yeah, let’s head back,” he said.

Ron grumbled under his breath, “No shock that she’d agree with him,” and trudged after them all.

Kaito Akaden Chapter 139

Kaito Akaden Chapter 139

But the masked man became intangible at the last second. Kakashi's lightning-covered hand passed through him harmlessly. The masked man jumped back, putting distance between them.

As Kakashi moved past where the masked man had been, their eyes met—Sharingan to Sharingan.

The masked man landed a few feet away. "Seems you're lucky today, Itachi Uchiha. Next time, you won't be so fortunate." His body began to be sucked into a portal that spiraled open from the eye hole of his mask.

Kakashi stood protectively in front of Itachi, thoughts racing. "I wasn't sure when Kaito mentioned it, but now, seeing him up close, I'm certain... it's Obito..." he thought.

Turning to Itachi, Kakashi asked, "Are you okay?"

Itachi nodded, gratitude in his eyes. "Yes. You arrived just in time, senpai."

Kakashi nodded. "Can you still fight?"

"I'll manage," Itachi replied, though he was clearly exhausted.

Kakashi surveyed their surroundings. "Alright, we still have work to do."

....

The night sky was softly illuminated by the faint glow of the moon. Inside the Uzumaki residence, everything seemed peaceful and calm, just as it always was.

Kushina sat on the couch, humming quietly to herself while knitting. She was trying to keep her hands busy because today was the day Tsuna-nee and kaito-kun were going to enact the plan to instate Tsuna-nee as the fifth hokage. Kushina felt uneasy, hoping with all her heart that everything would go smoothly. Knitting helped calm her nerves, so she kept at it, using the gentle click of her needles to steady herself.

Across the room, Naruto and Karin were sitting at the coffee table, working through some school assignments. Naruto let out a groan, glaring down at his workbook. “This is stupid! Why do I even have to learn math to become a ninja, dattebayo?” He whined and pressed his forehead against the wood as if the table might provide answers.

Karin glanced at him over her glasses and rolled her eyes. “Naruto, it’s not that hard,” she said, slightly amused. “Numbers can help you plan strategies, you know.”

Naruto pretended to sob, tears he didn’t actually have welling up as he lifted his head. “But I’ll never pass the academy if they keep asking these weird questions!” he moaned, clutching at his chest. “Everyone will leave me behind and graduate without me!”

Kushina paused her knitting and reached over to gently bop her son on the head with the back of her hand. “Stop being so dramatic, Naruto-chan,” she said with a sigh. Her voice was affectionate but firm. “You can do it if you try.”

“Ow, that hurt!” Naruto shot back, rubbing his head, looking a bit wounded but mostly just annoyed. Karin giggled softly, enjoying the playful back-and-forth between mother and son.

Just then, Shizune entered, carrying a tray of tea. She carefully set it down on a corner of the table not covered by books. Glancing at Naruto, who was still pouting and cradling his head, Shizune offered a warm smile. “It can’t be that bad, Naruto-kun. Come on, let me help you.”

Naruto’s eyes lit up with relief. “Really? You’ll help me, Shizune-nee? Thanks!” He sat up straighter, looking suddenly more hopeful.

…

Outside, in the trees surrounding the Uzumaki home, several of Kaito’s clones kept watch. One of these clones stood on a high branch, arms crossed, leaning casually against the trunk. Using the Mind’s Eye of Kagura, he was carefully sensing everything happening in the Hokage’s office. Kaito felt confident that everything would go according to plan.

However, as the clone surveyed the events unfolding at the Hokage’s office, something unexpected happened. Danzo’s figure vanished in a puff of smoke—it was only a shadow clone. The Kaito clone’s brows shot up in surprise. “What…? Did Danzo figure out our plan?” it muttered to itself. Quickly, it searched the village with its sensing ability, just as the original Kaito was doing from the Hokage Tower, looking for Danzo’s chakra signature.

The clone’s eyes went wide when he detected a large number of shinobi attacking the Uchiha clan district. At the same time, he sensed the original Kaito teleporting to the nearest Hiraishin marker near the Uchiha compound. The clone cursed under its breath. “This is bad. Danzo must have known all along. But how? We made sure no one we spoke to could leak anything…”

Without wasting another second, the clone rushed toward the ANBU squad assigned to protect Kaito’s family that day. Tenzo, wearing a bear mask, was on duty. The clone appeared beside Tenzo so suddenly that the ANBU nearly jumped.

“Ah!” Tenzo exclaimed, catching his breath. “You scared me, Kaito.”

“There’s no time for that,” the Kaito clone said urgently. “Tenzo, you and your squad need to head to the Uchiha clan district right now. They’re under attack by Root shinobi.”

Tenzo stiffened. “What? Are you sure?”

The clone nodded, voice low and serious. “We don’t have time for a full explanation. The short version: The Third Hokage has been replaced. Lady Tsunade is the Fifth Hokage, and she’s already arrested the Elders for their wrongdoings. Danzo escaped and is attacking the Uchiha clan as we speak.”

Another ANBU dropped down beside them. “What did you just say? Lady Tsunade is the new Hokage?”

“Yes,” confirmed the clone, not pausing for breath. “We can’t waste time. Around a thousand Root shinobi are attacking the Uchiha. Go now. I’ll guard this place.”

Tenzo trusted Kaito’s strength—he knew Kaito was at least as strong as Kakashi. Plus, Kaito always kept about ten clones around to protect his home. Tenzo nodded firmly. “Alright, team, move out!”

As Tenzo and the ANBU team vanished, the Kaito clone remained behind. “I should go too,” he thought, “but protecting my family takes priority.” The clone moved swiftly, body-flickering to the rooftop. Settling down, he resumed its sensing, splitting its attention between the battle at the Uchiha compound and keeping watch for any threat that might approach the Uzumaki home.

he sensed the original Kaito rushing around the Uchiha district, cutting down Root operatives and rescuing people. It also detected Tsunade, Kakashi, Itachi, and the others arriving on the scene, counterattacking, and slowly gaining the upper hand.

The clone scanned the rest of the village, checking for other attacks. he seemed the assault was focused solely on the Uchiha clan. “Danzo must want them wiped out if he’s already branded a traitor,” he thought grimly.

Just then, another shadow clone landed beside it. “Hey, are you sensing what I am? There are dozens of tiny chakra signatures all around us.”

The first clone stood up, concentrating. “Yeah, they feel like small animals or birds, but this many, all at once… something’s off.”

The first clone flickered away, heading toward the nearest suspicious chakra signature in the trees. Landing on a branch, he peered into the darkness. A glint of silver flashed, and the clone had just enough time to raise a kunai and block it. Its eyes narrowed. A Root operative!

“How did we not sense them until now?” he muttered, leaping back as ten Root shinobi emerged from hiding. They quickly formed hand signs, releasing combined torrents of flame.

“Combination Ninjutsu: Flame Tower!” their voices echoed as multiple streams of fire melded into one raging inferno.

The clone responded by weaving his own signs. “Water Style: Great Water Wall!” He pulled moisture from the air, forming a massive water wall. “Water Style: Great Water Wall!” The two jutsu collided in a violent Steam exploded where fire met water, hissing and obscuring the battlefield. the clone to skid backward as he landed on the ground.

Chakra chains erupted from the clone’s back, anchoring themselves into the earth and forming an adamantine sealing chain barrier around the house. Even so, he realized too late that about half of the two hundred or so Root shinobi had slipped inside the perimeter before the barrier was fully formed. “Damn it,” he cursed as he parried a sword strike, swiftly cutting down a masked operative. each clone created two more clones for backup. the clones flickered around, cutting down any Root operative that approached, desperately defending the home.

…

Inside, Shizune had just finished helping Naruto work through a math problem for the second time. “See? It isn’t that hard, Naruto-kun,” she said, hoping he’d finally grasp it.

Naruto scratched the back of his head sheepishly. “Could you show me again?” He laughed nervously, feeling a bit silly.

Shizune sighed, though it was fond. “Alright, one more time,” she agreed. “Try to follow along carefully.”

Kushina, still knitting, snickered quietly at Shizune’s predicament. However, her humor vanished instantly when a thunderous explosion shook the house. Everyone froze.

Kushina’s instincts, long dormant from her shinobi days, kicked in. She jumped up, kunai in hand. “Get inside, both of you!” She swiftly pulled Karin and Naruto behind her, protective and alert. Shizune also readied herself, senbon poised between her fingers.

The sound of fierce combat echoed from outside—jutsu clashing, steel meeting steel. Without warning, the living room window shattered as a Root operative lunged through with a tanto. Kushina reacted on pure reflex, blocking a descending tanto with her kunai. She shoved him back and delivered a swift kick to another masked attacker who lunged at Naruto and Karin.

“Stay behind me!” Kushina shouted, her voice tight. She sidestepped a sword strike from a third operative and drove her kunai into his skull, then kicked the corpse into another incoming enemy.

Shizune threw several poisoned senbon, striking two Root shinobi in quick succession. One staggered; the other collapsed. As another attacker rushed in, Shizune ducked low, sweeping his legs and driving a fistful of senbon into his mask. She leapt back to Kushina’s side

Two Root operatives retreated momentarily, weaving hand signs. One unleashed a torrent of flames, while the other directed a wind jutsu to intensify the blaze. The combined inferno roared toward Kushina and Shizune, who stood protectively in front of the children. Kushina tried desperately to summon her chakra chains. They erupted from her back but then faltered as pain tore through her abdomen, causing them to flicker and vanish.

Kushina gasped, clutching her stomach as the magnified flames consumed the front of the house. Wood splintered, and a massive explosion shook the foundations. Outside, a Kaito clone saw the fiery blast and shouted, panic in his voice, “NO, Mom!” Before he could rush in, a Root blade sank into him, dispelling the clone instantly.

As the smoke cleared inside, instead of charred remains, there stood a green, skeletal ribcage made of chakra shielding Kushina, Shizune, Naruto, and Karin. It was a Susanoo—Shisui’s Susanoo.

Shisui stood before them, his single eye bleeding, Mangekyō Sharingan spinning wildly. “Are you all right?” he asked, voice taut with effort, never looking away from the attackers.

Shizune nodded. “Thank you, Shisui-kun,” she breathed, relieved.

Kushina was on the ground, clutching her stomach. The pain was overwhelming. Naruto knelt beside her, tears in his eyes. “Mom, are you all right?” he asked, voice trembling. Karin stood next to him, protective and worried.

Shisui’s Susanoo flickered slightly, and he spoke urgently. “You need to get to a safe place. Is there somewhere secure inside the house?”

Kushina forced herself to speak through the pain. “Th-The basement,” she said, voice strained. “It’s protected by seals.”

Shisui nodded. “Good. You head there. I’ll hold them off.” Susanoo’s arm swung forward, scattering a wave of Root shinobi. Shizune supported Kushina, guiding her deeper into the house, while Naruto and Karin stuck close, eyes wide and frightened.

Seeing Shisui, one of the Root shinobi shouted, “It’s Shisui Uchiha! He’s alive!” Several of them attacked at once, but Shisui created multiple after-images, each darting forward with lethal precision. Steel flashed, and Root operatives fell one after another.

While Shisui provided a distraction, Shizune guided Kushina deeper into the house, Naruto and Karin right behind. They were only steps away from the basement door when four more Root operatives appeared.

Shizune rushed forward, engaging them directly, hoping to give Kushina and the children time to escape. One of the Root operatives broke away, lunging at Kushina with his katana raised high. Kushina, still in pain and supported by Naruto and Karin, couldn’t block in time.

the katana was blocked by Kaito, he had teleporting in front of his mother just then. Before the Root operative could react, Kaito slashed forward, taking the man’s head off in a single fluid motion.

“Kaito-nii!” Naruto and Karin shouted, relief flooding their voices.

Kaito didn’t even glance at them. He simply closed his eyes—and vanished.

In the next few seconds, a blur of red lightning flickered in and out of sight, both inside and around the Uzumaki residence. The sound of startled cries filled the air, but it all happened so quickly that to the onlookers it was over in the blink of an eye. Within moments, every last Root operative who had dared to attack the home lay defeated.

When Kaito reappeared, in front of Kushina, Naruto, and Karin. He gasped for breath, falling to one knee, his body drenched in sweat. “Hiraishin Level-3 Massacre…” he muttered. It was his version of Minato’s Spiraling Flash Super Round Dance Howl Style Three. But Kaito preferred his own name for it.

He looked up, concern etched onto his face as he took in Naruto, Karin, and finally Kushina’s condition. “Are you guys okay?” he asked, voice strained with worry. But the moment he truly noticed Kushina’s state, his anxiety spiked. “Mom…?”

Shizune rushed over, kneeling beside Kushina and checking her over. “I’ll take care of her,” she assured him as she carefully administered some pills to help calm the flare of Kushina’s chakra. “Don’t worry, she’ll be alright. She just needs to rest. That technique she tried to use aggravated her condition.”

Naruto’s eyes were large and wet. “Mom’s gonna be okay, right?” he asked softly, desperately seeking reassurance.

Karin hovered nearby, anxiety making her voice tremble. “Aunt Kushina will recover, won’t she?”

Shizune offered both of them a reassuring smile. “Yes, she will. She just pushed herself too far. Give her a bit of time.”

As Shizune eased Kushina down to lie more comfortably on the floor, Kushina winced and asked, “What’s going on? Why were we attacked?” Her voice was unsteady, but she was trying her best to stay calm.

At that moment, Shisui approached them. Kaito managed a shaky sigh of relief before explaining, “Danzo found out about what we were doing. He’s launched an attack on the Uchiha clan… and hit us here to create a distraction.”

Shisui’s single, intense eye widened. “The Uchiha clan is under attack?” He moved as if to rush out the door, but Kaito raised a hand to stop him.

“Don’t go, Shisui,” Kaito said, voice firm but sympathetic. “You’re still hurt and not fully recovered. Lady Tsunade and the others have already arrived to help. very thing is under control. I need you to stay here and protect everyone while I head over.”

Shisui tensed, torn by the urge to protect his clan. But he knew Kaito was right. His shoulders slumped slightly, and he nodded reluctantly. “Alright,” he said quietly.

As one of Kaito’s clones moved forward to pick Kushina up and carry her to her room, Shisui stood guard, Kaito nodded to him before teleporting away.

Hogwarts: Neville’s Insert Chapter 22

Hogwarts: Neville’s Insert Chapter 22

Neville grabbed her hand. "Please, Gran, I just need to see them... Maybe there's something I can do. Please, Gran." He looked determined as he said that.

Augusta hesitated but, seeing Neville's determination, she let our a sigh and asked the nurse, "Can we please have a copy of the reports?"

The nurse, not knowing what to say, replied, "I... I need to ask the healers first." With that, she left to find them.

Later that night, Neville lay on his bed, looking at the ceiling. They had returned to the manor after their visit.

The healers agreed to send them the report files.

As Neville lay there, he thought, "Why do Neville's parents look like my mum and dad? Were they transmigrated here too? Or is this a sign that they can be saved?"

…

Neville and his grandmother appeared on Platform Nine and Three-Quarters with a loud crack of Apparition.

Neville had gotten used to Apparition after the first two times and was now able to remain composed when side-along Apparating.

He looked sleepy, wearing a grey jumper, a red scarf, and brown trousers, with his sling bag hung across his shoulders. His grandmother had charmed his clothes with a warming charm to keep him nice and warm in the cold winter, and Neville appreciated it. His gran was wearing a green coat to stave off the cold, along with her usual vulture hat.

Speaking of the vulture hat, over the two weeks Neville had stayed at Longbottom Manor, his curiosity had gotten the better of him, and he had asked why she wore that hat and if the vulture was real. Much to his surprise, the vulture was indeed real. According to her, it was fashion and symbolised status in the olden days, and she wore it now because she had gotten used to it.

"Come along now, Neville," Augusta called, ushering him out of the Apparition zone.

Neville pulled along his trunk, following his grandmother into the throng of people.

The station was filled with parents and their children waving goodbye as they parted ways after the winter break.

Neville yawned as they walked nearer to the Hogwarts Express.

The steam from the scarlet Hogwarts Express billowed into the crisp morning air, mingling with the excited chatter of young witches and wizards returning to school.

"Have you got everything?" Gran asked him.

Neville, yawning, replied, "Yes, Gran, I've got everything packed."

Augusta chided him, saying, "You shouldn't have stayed up all night reading."

Neville smiled sheepishly and said, "I'm just a little tired, Gran. Nothing much."

She sighed as they came to a spot near the Hogwarts Express. She then hugged him and asked him to be safe and not go finding trouble, saying that she would grow more white hairs if he got into more mischief.

Neville smiled and hugged her back. "I'll keep that in mind, but no promises," he grinned.

She covered her face in exasperation. "What am I going to do with you, Neville?"

Over the holiday, Neville had grown close to his grandmother. She hadn't had the easiest time after her son and daughter-in-law were unable to take care of their son, and she'd had to raise him at such an old age. Neville found her fun to discuss topics with and to learn spells from. Over the past two weeks, she had taught him a few spells.

The Hogwarts train whistled as steam billowed out of the engine. Augusta looked at her wristwatch and said, "Oh, look at the time! The train is about to leave. You should go and find a compartment and meet your friends." She gave Neville another hug and said, "Goodbye, Neville. We'll meet again at the end of the term. And remember to write me a letter every week."

"Will do, Gran. Goodbye, and take care, okay?" said Neville as he waved to her and pulled his trunk along into the train.

Walking down the narrow corridor, Neville found an empty compartment at the end of the train. Entering the compartment, he heaved his trunk into the luggage rack, then sat down.

Neville settled himself beside the window and took out a book from his sling bag.

It was a book on neurology; he needed to know how the brain worked and which part of his parents' brains was affected if he was to cure them.

He had first looked through the Longbottom library for any books on healing and had found a few—a potions book about healing potions explaining the ins and outs of brewing healing potions, what ingredients do what, and why a specific ingredient is used. He had found the book a must-read and had brought it along to Hogwarts after asking permission from Augusta, of course. But there weren't any books on brains and the effects of magic on specific parts of the brain. He had asked Augusta about any books she might know of, but she didn't know of any. Of course, she had done her own research over the years to find a cure for her son and daughter-in-law. Neville had asked her if there were any mind healers or books pertaining to that. He vaguely remembered reading something about mind healers in some Harry Potter fanfiction. Well, it turns out there was no such thing—only healers; they don't have specialists in areas like in the Muggle world.

Hearing that, Neville was disappointed but understood. The magical world, from what he remembered from his previous life and living in it now, was stagnant and lacked innovation. The magical world as a whole stayed stagnant compared to the Muggle world because of magic itself. The people of the magical world relied on magic too much, in Neville's opinion, which had led to them being stagnant in all fields. The Floo Network was invented in the 13th century, and everyone was just content with it and didn't try to innovate after that. The wizarding world seemed to run on the notion, "If it ain't broke, don't fix it."

He had to custom order this book from a bookstore in the Muggle world, and to do that he had to convince his gran to bring him to a Muggle bookshop. He had told her that Hermione had mentioned her parents were dentists—they are healers specialising in teeth—and if there are specialists for teeth, then there must be specialists for brains as well. Augusta had asked him if he was suggesting taking his parents to see a Muggle healer. Neville had told her that he doubted they could cure them, but they might know more about the brain and how it functions. Seeing how insistent Neville was being, Augusta had acquiesced, and they visited a bookshop and browsed through it. Neville really wished the modern internet was a thing in 1991. They had gone to a few bookshops until one accepted a custom order for the book since they didn't sell these kinds of books. It took them a week and a half, but the book arrived late yesterday evening, and he had stayed up the whole night reading it, which would explain why he was tired now.

Neville was so absorbed in the book's content that he missed the train leaving the station. A few minutes into the ride, he heard a knock on the door to his compartment.

Neville yawned and looked up from the book, seeing it sliding open to reveal Hermione with her bushy hair. She wore a red jumper and a purple scarf around her neck. She exclaimed, "There you are! I've been looking all over the train for you, Neville. The others are in a compartment further down."

Neville gave her a weak smile and said, "Good morning to you too, Hermione. How was your holiday?" shutting his book.

Hermione sat across from him and said, "It was fine—spent Christmas visiting family. What about you? You look like you haven't slept in days. And what's that book you've got there?" She asked and peered over to get a look at the book.

Neville, seeing this, looked down and said, "Oh, this? Just a book I found," showing it to her.

Hermione took the book and exclaimed, "An Introduction to Neurology! You're studying neurology? Isn't this a Muggle book? This is quite advanced. Where did you get it?" She started reading.

Neville internally cursed himself. He didn't want to let Hermione know about his parents, and he especially didn't want to let her know that he knew about the Muggle world—that would blow his cover of him losing his memories.

Neville said, "It was Gran's. Found it interesting and wanted to read it."

Hermione nodded and asked if he could lend it to her.

Neville shrugged and said, "Yeah, sure, after I'm done with it," taking the book back.

Hermione, after giving him the book, asked, "You haven't answered me yet. How was your Christmas break?"

Neville yawned and said, "You know, the usual—working out, spending time with Gran. Learned a few new spells from her," he said, putting the book into his sling bag.

Hermione waited a moment before asking, "Wait, you practised magic outside of Hogwarts? You know it's against the rules—you could get expelled!"

Neville yawned again and said, "Oh, that. According to Gran, the Trace doesn't work in magical households."

Hermione looked askance and said, "But... but that's just not fair! That means kids from wizarding families have a huge advantage if they can learn at home." She crossed her arms and glared at Neville.

Neville yawned again and said, "And according to Gran, the Trace can't really identify who used magic. It's more of a location-based spell. It's mapped to the general area where the kid lives. If any magic is detected there, it'll automatically pin the kid as the one who used it."

They chatted along the way, and were soon joined by Seamus, Dean, Parvati, and Lavender. They all chatted as they continued their journey.

Soon, night fell as they arrived at Hogsmeade Station.

They left their luggage and got off the train, walking along with the other years to the Thestral carriages.

They rode the carriages down to the castle.

They walked into the Great Hall among the students as it erupted into chatter while it filled up.

Neville and the rest of the first-year Gryffindors walked over to Harry and Ron and sat near them.

Neville greeted them, "All right, lads?"

Hermione also said, "Good to see you both. How was your Christmas at the castle?"

Harry said, "Oh, hello, you two. It was brilliant." Harry looked like he wanted to say something but decided to save it for later.

Ron, looking at Neville, said, "Blimey, mate, you look like you haven't slept in days."

Neville yawned and took a seat next to Harry. "Yeah, I haven't slept since the day before."

Soon after, Dumbledore stood up and welcomed everyone back after the winter break, and then the food appeared.

After dinner, the Gryffindors went up to the common room.

Harry, Ron, Neville, and Hermione decided to stay in the common room. They moved to the corner—their usual spot near the window.

They sat down, and Hermione asked, leaning in, "So, what did you find?"

Harry leaned in and said that he had received an Invisibility Cloak on Christmas.

Hermione asked, "Who sent it to you? Aren't those like super expensive?"

Ron nodded and said, "Yeah, they're dead expensive. They can go for more than 10,000 Galleons."

Harry said, "I don't know who sent it, but apparently my dad lent it to them, and they were returning it."

Neville yawned; he was already dozing off and was only half-following the story. He asked, "They returned it?"

Harry nodded and said, "As Hermione suggested, I used the Invisibility Cloak to sneak out and tried looking in the Restricted Section. The book I opened started screaming bloody murder."

Hermione gasped and said, "Oh, Harry, what if you were caught? You could have got into trouble!"

Harry nodded and continued, "Yeah, I almost got caught by Filch and ran into Snape threatening Quirrell about something."

Hermione asked again, "Professor Snape was threatening Professor Quirrell?"

Harry nodded and said, "Well, while I was running away from them, I found this mirror in an abandoned classroom." He paused and said, "I saw my parents in it. I even showed it to Ron."

Ron nodded and said, "Well, I didn't see Harry's parents, but I saw me winning the Quidditch Cup and being Head Boy."

Harry said, "According to Dumbledore, the mirror shows the heart's deepest desire."

Neville, dozing off, said, "Yeah, doesn't sound dodgy at all."

The three of them looked at him, and a while later Hermione asked, "So you haven't found anything on Nicolas Flamel?"

Ron and Harry shook their heads and said, "No, we didn't want to risk getting caught in the Restricted Section again."

Hermione turned to the dozing Neville and shook him. "What about you, Neville? Did you ask your gran?"

Neville looked at her and said, "Huh? Yeah, Nicolas Flamel, yeah. He's an alchemist from France. Dumbledore was his student or something. He's known for creating the Philosopher's Stone," saying that he started dozing off again.

Hermione exclaimed, "That's where I've heard his name before! I had you guys looking in the wrong section. He was the only known maker of the Philosopher's Stone," waking Neville up.

Harry asked, "Wait, what's a Philosopher's Stone?"

Neville, wanting to cut the conversation short, said, "The stone can turn any metal into gold."

Hermione quickly added, "And it can also produce the Elixir of Life, which will make the drinker immortal."

Ron asked, "Immortal?"

Hermione said, "It means you never die."

Ron sounded offended. "I know what it means!"

Hermione shot him a look and said, "That's what Fluffy's guarding on the third floor—that's what's under the trapdoor: the Philosopher's Stone."

Neville said, "I doubt that," yawning. He stood up. "I doubt Nicolas Flamel would give something so valuable to Dumbledore of all people." Standing up, Neville said, "Well, I'm knackered. I'm off to bed. See you lot tomorrow." He slung his bag over his shoulder and paused before digging into his bag and taking out a small album.

Neville handed it over to Harry and said, "Here you go, Harry. I almost forgot—this is for you."

Harry took it and asked, "What's this?" as he opened it.

Neville shrugged and said, "It's pictures of your mum. Apparently, my mum and yours were best friends, and my mum was even your godmother and yours mine. Anyway, I copied some of her pictures for you."

Harry was stunned, looking at the moving pictures of his mother in the album—from when she was their age to when they were adults.

Neville yawned and said, "Well, good night." He was too tired and just wanted to sleep.

Kaito Akaden Chapter 138

Kaito Akaden Chapter 138

Authors note: hey guys, I'm really sorry if the chapter seems Abit off, I'm really having a hard time editing and writing on a phone. This whole chapter took me two days to complete and I'm still not satisfied with it, I hope you understand.

Fugaku, Kakashi, and Tagama nodded. "Understood, Lady Hokage," they said before body flickering away.

Tsunade bit her thumb, drawing blood, and made a few hand signs. "Summoning Jutsu!" she called out, slamming her palm on the ground.

A large puff of smoke appeared and then dissipated, revealing a massive slug. "Lady Tsunade," it said.

"No time to catch up, Katsuyu," Tsunade quickly ordered. "I need you to divide up and help heal the injured civilians and Uchiha clan members."

"Understood," Katsuyu replied before splitting into thousands of little slugs, slithering away to help heal people.

Tsunade sat down cross-legged on the building just as Shikaku arrived with a large squad of ANBU and Hyuga clan members.

Tsunade ordered, "Four of you stand guard over me while I supply Katsuyu with my chakra. The rest of you, spread out and help." They all nodded and body flickered away, while four formed a protective circle around Tsunade as seal markings spread around her.

.....

In a dimly lit cave, a man with long black hair stood beside a rough wooden table. He carefully placed a scroll upon it. An orange mask with black markings concealed his face, and a katana was strapped to his side. He reached over to unfasten the katana, intending to lay it on the table. Just then, something emerged behind him from the ground, but he paid it no mind and continued with his task.

The masked man paused when he sensed a presence. Turning around, he saw a massive green plant rising from the ground. It opened up to reveal a human-like head. One side was black with a white eye, and the other was pale white with a yellow pupil.

The white side of the plant-like being spoke in a cheerful tone, "Obito, there's some interesting news from the Hidden Leaf Village."

Obito turned his full attention to the creature and asked, "Oh? And what might that be?"

With the same lighthearted tone, the white side said, "The Third Hokage is being overthrown as we speak."

Obito raised an eyebrow behind his mask. "Did the Uchiha clan finally launch their coup d'état? Is Fugaku now the Fifth Hokage?"

The black side of the being spoke in a serious voice, "That's just it. It wasn't the Uchiha clan. It was Lady Tsunade, and the Uchiha have given their support to her."

"That's interesting," Obito mused. "So the Uchiha clan has given up on their plans for a coup. Who would have thought they'd back Tsunade of all people to become Hokage? I didn't think she'd return after her history with the village, let alone take up the mantle of Hokage."

White Zetsu chimed in, "That would be Kaito Uzumaki's doing. He somehow convinced her to come back and become Hokage. Not only that, but there are rumors he managed to outpace the Raikage."

Black Zetsu added, "He's turning out to be as troublesome as his father."

Obito paused. "Kaito Uzumaki, huh? I wouldn't expect any less from Sensei's son."

The black half continued, "That's not all. Lady Tsunade also exposed all of the Third's wrongdoings. She's placed the former Third Hokage under house arrest, and the elder council has been disbanded and arrested for further questioning."

White Zetsu said excitedly, "And here's the best part: Danzo found out about it and has planned an attack on the Uchiha clan as a distraction so he can flee the village."

Black Zetsu agreed, "Yes, this would be a great opportunity for you to gather some Sharingan."

Obito nodded and strapped the katana back onto his side. "It's a shame about the Uchiha."

White Zetsu suddenly announced, "The attack has started!"

Obito's body began to warp and was sucked into his eye as he activated Kamui.

---

The moon hung high in the sky, casting a soft glow over the streets of the Uchiha clan's district. Obito stood on a rooftop, observing the chaos unfolding below. White Zetsu emerged beside him. "So it begins," he said, watching as the attack on the Uchiha clan commenced.

The space around Obito's eye hole warped, and his body vanished into it.

Inside the Uchiha Police Force headquarters, things were busy as usual. But unlike the norm of the past few years, there was an air of hope among them that things were going to change for the clan.

An Uchiha man was talking animatedly with another man as they walked out of the police station. He threw his arm around his friend and said, "Oh, come on, cheer up, Takuma! I didn't do it on purpose," he grinned.

Takuma shrugged off his friend's arm. "Get your hands off me, Kazuma! That's the third time this week, and you expect me to believe you?" He pushed him away, shouting, "You made me look bad in front of Izumi-chan!"

Kazuma laughed. "Ah, come on, man! I didn't do that on purpose!"

Just then, they heard an explosion. Both turned in the direction of the Uchiha clan's main district to see smoke rising into the sky.

Takuma's eyes widened. "What's happening? We have to alert the lieutenant!"

Suddenly, the space in front of them warped, and a portal formed in the air. A masked man materialized from it, holding a katana in his hand.

Kazuma pulled out a kunai. "State your name and intentions!" he demanded, holding the kunai defensively.

Takuma also drew a kunai and activated his Sharingan, preparing for a fight.

Before either of them could react, the masked man lunged forward. He slashed down on Kazuma, killing him instantly.

Takuma screamed, "Kazuma!" But before he could do anything, he too was cut down. Both their bodies fell to the ground.

Obito flicked the blood off his katana as he walked toward the entrance of the police station.

Entering the building, Obito began to cut down all the Uchiha police officers, one after another. Before they could react, they were all slaughtered without mercy.

An officer slammed against the window of the station, his body sliding down and staining the glass with blood. The lights flickered ominously.

After killing every police member, Obito flicked the blood off his katana once more and sheathed it.

White Zetsu emerged from the ground. The white half whistled as he looked around. "You did quite a number on them, huh?"

Obito said, "Start collecting the eyes," before walking out of the building.

As he stepped outside, two shuriken were thrown at him. They passed through him harmlessly and embedded themselves into the pillar beside him.

Obito slowly turned in the direction the shuriken had come from. He saw a girl with brown hair, wearing a purple sleeveless top and brown pants.

Seeing her shuriken pass through the masked man, Izumi was shocked. Knowing she couldn't fight someone that powerful, she turned to flee.

But a metal chain suddenly wrapped around her body, binding her arms to her sides and pulling her back.

She was yanked onto the ground as the masked man walked toward her, drawing his katana and lifting it to strike her down.

Izumi closed her eyes and prayed softly, "Itachi, please save me."

The masked man brought down the sword, only for it to pass through her as someone intervened. Itachi appeared, attacking the masked man with his tanto, but his blade went through the masked man's intangible form.

The masked man leaped back as Itachi stood protectively over Izumi, his Sharingan spinning wildly.

Izumi, realizing she wasn't hurt, looked up to see Itachi standing with his back to her. "Itachi!" she exclaimed.

"Are you okay, Izumi?" Itachi asked without turning his gaze away from the enemy.

Izumi nodded shakily. "Yes, thanks to you."

"Good. Now, get to safety and help the others," Itachi instructed firmly.

Izumi hesitated for a moment but then nodded. "Be careful, Itachi-kun." She turned and ran off to assist others.

"I will," he assured her.

As Izumi ran off into the night, the masked man tilted his head slightly. "How noble of you," he said in a cold, mocking tone.

---

Elsewhere, Kaito slashed at a Root operative, decapitating him. Behind him, another enemy lunged, driving a blade toward Kaito's back. The blade passed through him without resistance, and the Kaito they attacked flickered and disappeared—a shadow clone.

The real Kaito appeared above the attacker, holding a swirling ball of chakra in his hand. "Rasengan!" he shouted, slamming it into the operative's back. The ground cratered beneath them, and the enemy was defeated.

Kaito jumped back onto a rooftop, his face covered in sweat. He was slightly winded from taking down around a hundred Root operatives by himself.

He looked around and muttered, "This area is clear." He saw Uchiha genin and some regular chunin helping civilians to safety.

Looking toward where fighting still continued, Kaito stood up, ready to move again. Just then, he froze, his eyes widening. His face contorted into rage, and he disappeared, teleporting away.

---

Back in the Uchiha district, Itachi and the masked man were locked in fierce fight. No matter what Itachi tried, he couldn't land a hit. The masked man's ability to become intangible made it impossible.

After while itachi began to struggle as the masked man was about to strike him down, Itachi In his desperation, activated his mangekyou Sharingan Unconsciously, he unleashed black flames—Amaterasu—onto the masked man, catching him off guard.

Itachi clutched his bleeding eye after using Amaterasu. He watched as the masked man struggled against the relentless flames, staggering back into the alleyway and disappearing into the shadows.

After a moment, the sounds of struggle ceased. Panting heavily, Itachi held his right eye and sighed in relief.

But his respite was brief. He heard the masked man's voice behind him. "I underestimated you. My mistake. I'll fix that now, and your eyes will be a fine addition to my collection."

Itachi's eyes widened. Spinning around, he saw the masked man swinging his blade down, aiming to kill.

Just then, there was a crackling sound and a shout of "Lightning Blade!" Kakashi appeared behind the masked man, his hand enveloped in lightning. He thrust it toward the masked man's body.

But the masked man became intangible at the last second. Kakashi's lightning-covered hand passed through him harmlessly. The masked man jumped back, putting distance between them.

As Kakashi moved past where the masked man had been, their eyes met—Sharingan to Sharingan.

The masked man landed a few feet away. "Seems you're lucky today, Itachi Uchiha. Next time, you won't be so fortunate." His body began to be sucked into a portal that spiraled open from the eye hole of his mask.

Kakashi stood protectively in front of Itachi, thoughts racing. "I wasn't sure when Kaito mentioned it, but now, seeing him up close, I'm certain... it's Obito..." he thought.

Turning to Itachi, Kakashi asked, "Are you okay?"

Itachi nodded, gratitude in his eyes. "Yes. You arrived just in time, senpai."

Kakashi nodded. "Can you still fight?"

"I'll manage," Itachi replied, though he was clearly exhausted.

Kakashi surveyed their surroundings. "Alright, we still have work to do."

Hogwarts: Neville’s Insert chapter 21

Hogwarts: Neville’s Insert chapter 21

Author's Note: Hey guys, I'm sorry if this chapter seems a bit off. My PC just died on me, and had to completely write and edit on my phone, which was a total pain. I hope you all understand.

“Hello, Gran" he replied. "It's good to see you." "Come along, let's get you home," she said, taking charge and holding out her hand for Neville to grasp. When he did, she instructed, "Hold tight, okay? Remember, don't let go." Neville nodded, and Augusta apparated them both out of King's Cross station.

Neville felt a pulling sensation, as if he were being squeezed through a tube, and then it was over. They landed in front of a large gate, and beyond it stood an impressive manor house, the setting sun casting a warm glow behind it.

Seeing the manor, Neville said, "That's huge," as he let go of Augusta's hand.

She straightened her clothes and, with a smile, said, "Welcome to Longbottom Manor, Neville" as the gates opened.

….

Neville woke up to his now familiar room in the Longbottom Manor.

Rubbing his eyes and yawning, Neville swung his legs off the bed and stood up, walking off to the attached bathroom.

It had been a week since Neville had come back for his winter break.

Neville was treated to a feast by his gran on the day of his arrival and was shown to his room.

During the feast, Augusta had been proud of Neville for his academic performance and was happy that her grandson was finally coming out of his shell.

Augusta asked, "So, Neville dear, how are you adapting to Hogwarts after... well, after everything?"

Neville scooped another spoonful of chocolate pudding into his mouth and replied, "It's great, Gran. I've made a few friends." He paused for a second before adding, "All except for the troll incident, everything is well."

Neville had deliberately told her about the troll incident, wanting to know if Dumbledore had told any of the parents about the incident. He wanted to know if Dumbledore was hiding it from the parents.

And as expected, Augusta paused mid-bite. She was happy to hear that Neville was making friends and adapting well to the magical world after he had lost his memories, but hearing about a troll, she paused, placing the spoon back on the plate. She asked, "What troll?"

Neville cocked his head to the side and asked, "Huh? Weren't you told about the troll on Halloween?"

Augusta's eyes narrowed as she asked, "Troll on Halloween? Explain, dear. Why wasn't I informed?"

Neville swallowed his pudding and said, "I don't know. I think the Headmaster would have informed you of the incident, especially with me getting injured by it. Well, a troll was set loose in Hogwarts on Halloween. I wasn't aware of the troll as I was out looking for one of my friends. Earlier that day, she was bullied, and that got to her, and she had been crying in the girls' lavatory for the whole day, she didn't have much friends—she can be a bit much—and I was one of her only friends, so I went looking for her." He paused to scoop a spoonful of pudding and continued, "Well, anyways, when we were heading back to the common room, we came across the troll and I had to kill it, and got injured doing that." He rubbed his ribs and said, "Madam Pomfrey said that I broke my ribs and bruised my spine; had to stay in the hospital wing for the day."

Augusta's face whitened as Neville told the story, and she asked at the end of the tale, "You got hurt” she exclaimed “and managed to kill the troll?" Looking concern and angry at the same time.

Neville paused and said, "Yeah, killed it with a sword and the Depulso charm—blasted the sword into the roof of the troll's mouth. You can ask Harry, Ron, or Hermione about it; they were there when it happened. Oh, thank you for the books you sent me—the spells in that book came in handy."

Augusta looked angry at the very end of it but also looked proud at Neville and told him so, that she was proud of him. And she hadn't heard of a first year slaying a troll before, but told him that it was dangerous and next time to get to a teacher.

---

The next day, Neville woke up to find a note from his gran that she had gone to take care of some business, Neville smiled reading that as he knew that she had gone to Hogwarts to give Dumbledore a piece of her mind for not informing the parents and guardians about the troll incident, and if he remembers correctly, she was part of the Hogwarts Board of Governors.

Neville spent the morning being shown around the manor by his house-elf, Tinkle.

The manor was huge; it was a large castle and castle-like. According to his gran, it was the ancestral home of the Longbottoms and had been in the family for hundreds of years.

According to Augusta, the Longbottoms were very wealthy and made their wealth by selling potion ingredients and even having some potion distilleries; they also exported potion ingredients to other countries.

All in all, the Longbottoms were among the wealthiest families in Britain.

Neville also found out that he was able to practise magic in the manor. According to Augusta, the Trace doesn't work in magical households.

The Longbottoms had a library; it was vast and contained many books on Herbology and Potions. According to Gran, the books she had sent him were part of this very collection. He spent most of his time, when not practising spells, in the library, and there he found something interesting.

While browsing through the numerous shelves, Neville found a book on Occlumency—something he had been eagerly seeking—and he began practising the exercises within.

As Neville had expected, what was written in the book and what he remembered Snape teaching Harry about Occlumency in the Order of the Phoenix were completely different. Neville thought, "So it's true then—Snape was making Harry more vulnerable to Voldemort." He had always suspected that the way Snape taught Harry was somewhat suspicious, and now this confirmed it—it must have been Dumbledore's manipulations.

According to the book, Occlumency is more about organizing thoughts and calming the mind and controlling emotions, and it takes time.

The rest of the week was spent practising spells and his Occlumency, and spending time with Augusta and Augusta teaching him about the Longbottoms and their history.

---

After getting dressed for the day with a red festive sweater and a green scarf around his neck, Neville made his way downstairs to the living room.

Entering the room, he greeted his grandmother Augusta Longbottom, "Merry Christmas, Gran."

Augusta looked up and smiled. "Merry Christmas, Neville. You look quite handsome today."

Neville smiled and said, "You too, Gran."

She then said, "Well, let's eat breakfast then. I'm sure Tinkle made a feast."

After breakfast, Augusta got up off the armchair and said, "We should get going if we are to come back before your Great Uncle Algie comes for dinner."

It turns out that usually on Christmas they would attend one of the Christmas parties hosted by the Ministry or one of the allied houses, but due to him losing his memories she didn't want to overwhelm him and decided to host a small Christmas celebration at home, inviting only Great Uncle Algie.

Walking over to the Floo, Augusta handed him some Floo powder and said, "You remember how to use the Floo, right, Neville?"

Currently, they were going to visit Neville's parents at St Mungo's.

Augusta didn't go into much detail but said that Neville's parents, Alice and Frank Longbottom, were in St Mungo's and were Aurors and heroes of the previous wizarding war.

They were currently in the Permanent Spell Damage ward and had been there for ten years.

Taking a pinch of the powder, Neville stepped into the fireplace. "St Mungo's Hospital!" he declared, throwing the powder at his feet. Green flames enveloped him, and after a dizzying whirl, he stepped out into a grand atrium lined with fireplaces.

Gran appeared moments later, dusting soot from her robes. Placing a gentle hand on his shoulder, she guided him through the bustling corridors. He noticed the respectful nods and greetings from staff and visitors alike as they passed.

"Gran, everyone seems to know you," Neville observed.

She gave a modest smile. "The Longbottoms have long donated to St Mungo's. It's important work they do here."

They reached the entrance to the Permanent Spell Damage ward. Neville's heart pounded in his chest.

Neville was nervous as this would be the first time him seeing the original Neville's parents; he hadn't even seen a picture of them and he wasn't sure if he should see them with him now occupying their son's body.

They approached a room where two patients sat by the window, gazing out at nothing in particular.

"Frank, Alice," Augusta greeted softly. "Look who's here. It's Neville."

 Neville froze upon seeing them—his mother and father. They looked remarkably like the parents he remembered from before. His mind raced, emotions swirling.

Both had vacant expressions, their eyes dull and unfocused. His mother's once vibrant hair was now a lifeless shade of white, thin strands framing a face etched with lines of pain and time. His father sat stoically, hands resting limply in his lap.

Gran moved to Frank's side, recounting stories of Neville's achievements at school, her voice filled with a mix of hope and sorrow.

Neville stood rooted to the spot, tears welling up in his eyes. "Mum? Dad?" he whispered, his voice barely audible.

His mother turned slowly, her gaze drifting past him. For a fleeting moment, a spark seemed to flicker in her eyes. She reached into her pocket and shuffled towards him, extending her hand.

In it was a sweet wrapper.

Neville blinked, a tear escaping down his cheek. "For me?" he asked softly.

She gave a faint smile, one that vanished as quickly as it appeared. Without another word, she returned to her chair by the window.

He clutched the wrapper tightly. "Thank you, Mum," he whispered.

The rest of the visit passed in a blur.

Neville sat silently the whole visit, watching them while Augusta talked about her day to both Alice and Frank—now his mum and dad.

Neville's mind was racing, thinking, "Maybe there is a way to cure them. Think, think, but first I need to know what's wrong with them. If I remember correctly, their minds broke after prolonged exposure to the Cruciatus Curse."

At this, his fist tightened at the thought. He swore, "I will make them pay."

Standing up, he left the room and went up to the reception.

He approached the lady. "Excuse me, ma'am," he said politely.

Not looking up from her work, she asked, "How can I help?"

Neville asked, "Could I have a copy of Frank and Alice Longbottom's medical report, please?"

She paused, looking up. "I'm sorry, but I can't give you that—it's confidential."

Neville pleaded, "Please, ma'am, I need to see them. They're my parents, please." His eyes had tears in them.

The lady hesitated, looking at the crying child. "I'm sorry, I can't," she said gently.

Just then, Augusta walked over. "Neville, there you are. What are you doing here?" she asked.

Neville, wiping his tears away, said, "Gran, can you get me Mum and Dad's medical reports? I... I need to see them."

Augusta paused, seeing Neville in this state. She hesitated and asked, "Why do you want them, Neville?"

Neville grabbed her hand. "Please, Gran, I just need to see them... Maybe there's something I can do. Please, Gran." He looked determined as he said that.

Augusta hesitated but, seeing Neville's determination, she let our a sigh and asked the nurse, "Can we please have a copy of the reports?"

The nurse, not knowing what to say, replied, "I... I need to ask the healers first." With that, she left to find them.

Later that night, Neville lay on his bed, looking at the ceiling. They had returned to the manor after their visit.

The healers agreed to send them the report files.

As Neville lay there, he thought, "Why do Neville's parents look like my mum and dad? Were they transmigrated here too? Or is this a sign that they can be saved?"

Kaito Akaden Chapter 137

Kaito Akaden Chapter 137

Author's Note:

Hey guys, I'm sorry if this chapter seems a bit off. My PC just died on me, and I had to completely write and edit on my phone, which was a total pain. I hope you all understand. 

Kaito moved to the immobilized elders and Hiruzen. Placing his palm on each one, he reinforced the seals, effectively stealing off their chakra and ensuring they couldn't escape. Koharu glared at Tsunade. "You are tearing this village apart!"

Homura struggled against his bindings. "This is an abuse of power!"

Danzo remained silent as Kaito placed a hand on Danzo's chest, grinning. Danzo leaned forward and said, "Don't think you have won," before he puffed into a cloud of smoke, revealing himself to be a shadow clone.

....

Everyone in the room stared in disbelief as Danzo's form dissipated into a puff of smoke—it was just a shadow clone. He'd been one step ahead of them all along.

Tsunade's eyes narrowed, a fierce scowl spreading across her face. "That old bastard!" she snarled, her fists clenching so tightly that she smashed the table in front of her to pieces. "Lock down the village! He's not getting away on my watch!" she ordered everyone in the room.

Shikaku Nara sighed deeply, rubbing his temples. "Troublesome," he muttered under his breath. Turning to the assembled jonin, he issued quick orders. "Spread out and search every corner of the village. Let's track him down!"

Hiruzen sighed and hung his head, knowing this was his doing—that he'd given Danzo too much leeway.

The jonin nodded in unison before disappearing in body flickers.

Tsunade turned her fiery gaze to Ibiki Morino. "Ibiki, take the old man and the other two into maximum security. I don't want any more surprises."

Ibiki gave a sharp nod. "Understood, Lady Hokage." He motioned for his subordinates to secure the former Hokage and the elders, ensuring they were properly detained as they were escorted out of the room.

"Assign all available ANBU to hunt Danzo down," Tsunade continued, her voice leaving no room for argument. "I want every resource we've got dedicated to finding him." Another squad of ANBU left swiftly after her orders.

Fugaku stepped forward. "Allow the Uchiha clan to help with the search, Lady Hokage," he offered.

Tsunade nodded to him. "Your assistance is appreciated."

Meanwhile, Kaito stood with his eyes closed, extending his Mind's Eye of Kagura throughout the village. He was searching for Danzo's chakra signature, hoping to locate the bastard before he could enact any further schemes. Suddenly, his eyes snapped open, alarm flashing across his features.

"The Uchiha clan is under attack!" he announced urgently.

Before Tsunade or Fugaku could question him, Kaito vanished, teleporting away in an instant. Tsunade's expression hardened. "Damn it!" she cursed. "Follow me!" Without wasting another moment, she dashed out of the Hokage Tower, leaping across rooftops with Fugaku hot on her heels.

Shikaku watched them go, shaking his head. "Troublesome," he sighed again, but wasted no time in coordinating the remaining forces. "All available units, prioritize the Uchiha compound! Assist in defense and evacuation!"

---

Kaito reappeared atop a tree branch overlooking the compound—the closest Hiraishin marker he had to the Uchiha clan. What he saw made his blood run cold. Plumes of smoke rose from several buildings, and the sounds of battle echoed through the night. Root operatives swarmed the area, engaging in combat with Uchiha shinobi.

He quickly activated his communication seal, channeling chakra into it. "Itachi, Kakashi—the Uchiha clan is under attack by Root! Get here immediately; I need help!" he called out urgently before body flickering toward the clan.

---

Deep within the forest surrounding Konoha, Team Ro, led by Kakashi, was moving swiftly toward one of Root's known bases. Their mission was to capture and round up Root operatives and rescue any children who had been kidnapped by Danzo's organization. Kakashi had been briefed the previous day about the operation, including the overall plan to dismantle Root.

As they leaped from tree to tree, Kakashi and Itachi both felt a familiar tingling at the back of their necks—the activation of Kaito's communication seal. They halted abruptly on a thick branch, causing the rest of the ANBU squad to stop as well.

"Captain, is something wrong?" one of the ANBU members inquired.

Kakashi raised a hand for silence while tapping the seal on his neck. Kaito's urgent message echoed in his mind: "Kakashi, Itachi—the Uchiha clan is under attack by Root! Come quick!"

Itachi's eyes widened in alarm. He turned to Kakashi, concern etched on his face. "We need to get back to the village immediately."

Kakashi didn't hesitate. "Change of plans!" he announced to his team. "The Uchiha clan is under attack by Root operatives. We're heading back to provide support. Move out!"

Without further delay, the squad pivoted and sprinted back toward Konoha, their urgency renewed.

---

Back at the Uchiha compound, Kaito landed atop a building and assessed the situation. He could sense numerous life forces flickering out, innocent lives being extinguished. His eyes narrowed in anger. He made the cross hand sign and called out, "Shadow Clone Jutsu!" creating fifteen identical copies of himself. "Spread out and take down as many Root operatives as you can! Protect the civilians!"

The clones nodded before body flickering in all directions. Kaito himself dashed forward, arriving just in time to intercept a sword strike aimed at a young Uchiha girl. He blocked the blade with his tanto, sparks flying upon impact. Before the Root ANBU could react, Kaito parried his blade and kicked him in the face, sending the operative flying backward. Kaito flickered behind the attacker and slashed vertically, ending him.

He walked over to the girl. "Are you okay?" he asked gently.

The girl nodded shakily. "Thank you, mister!"

Kaito picked her up and body flickered to safety. He reappeared behind a Root ANBU attacking a middle-aged woman, cutting him down swiftly.

He quickly handed the girl over to the woman. "Find somewhere safe to hide," he instructed before darting off to assist others.

All around the compound, Kaito's clones were engaging Root operatives, their coordinated efforts turning the tide of battle. They assisted civilians, guided them to secure locations, and supported the remaining Uchiha chunin and jonin in their defense.

One of Kaito's clones landed beside a wounded Uchiha chunin who was fending off two Root operatives. Kaito slashed down one, distracting the other and allowing the chunin to hit the Root ANBU with a Fireball Jutsu. "We need to hold them off until reinforcements arrive," the shadow clone urged.

The chunin nodded, wiping blood from his brow. "Got it. We'll do our best."

Elsewhere, the real Kaito arrived at a scene where three squads of Root ANBU were attacking a group of civilians. Without hesitation, he hurled multiple kunai and shuriken in all directions. Using his Flying Raijin technique, he teleported between the projectiles, slicing down the Root operatives with lethal efficiency. In mere moments, the immediate threat was eliminated.

An Uchiha police force member approached him, panting heavily. "What's happening? Why are ANBU attacking us? Has the village decided to finish us off?" he demanded, desperation in his voice.

Kaito shook his head quickly. "No! Danzo has been convicted as a traitor. When the Fifth Hokage tried to arrest him, he went rogue. These aren't ANBU under the Hokage. The village is not behind this attack. Fugaku-sama will explain everything later. For now, focus on defending your clansmen and getting them to safety. I'll continue to take down as many Root operatives as I can."

The officer's eyes hardened with resolve. "Understood. Thank you." They parted ways, each heading toward the next skirmish.

As Kaito moved through the compound, he couldn't help but notice the sheer number of enemies. There were close to a thousand Root shinobi assaulting the Uchiha district—a testament to Danzo's hidden resources. Despite the odds, the Uchiha clan was holding their ground.

---

Meanwhile, Tsunade and Fugaku were racing across the rooftops, the wind whipping past them. "We need to get there faster!" Tsunade urged.

Fugaku activated his Sharingan, scanning ahead. "I can see the flames. They're attacking from all sides."

"Curse that Danzo!" Tsunade spat. "He's willing to destroy the entire village to achieve his twisted goals."

---

Back at the compound, one of Kaito's clones encountered a group of Root operatives performing a combined Fireball Jutsu at two injured Uchiha police force members. Kaito made a single hand sign and called out, "Water Style: Water Dragon Jutsu!" A massive serpent of water gathered from the moisture in the air, colliding against the massive fireball and dousing it before making its way toward the Root operatives.

From behind, another Root shinobi lunged at Kaito's clone, slashing through him—only to reveal it was an afterimage. The clone reappeared behind the operative and slashed through him vertically.

---

Elsewhere, an elderly Uchiha woman and her young grandson were returning home after a lovely outing when they came across a Root ANBU. The woman pushed her grandson behind her as the Root operative lunged forward, slicing at them. But before his blade could make contact, he was cut down.

She looked up to see Itachi standing there. "Bless you, young man," she said gratefully.

Itachi turned to her and nodded. "Please stay inside. Don't come out until someone comes looking for you," he advised before body flickering away.

Kakashi ran through the streets of the Uchiha clan, cutting down Root shinobi as he encountered them. His tanto crackled with lightning as he channeled his lightning chakra into it. Cutting down another Root shinobi, Kakashi looked up to see a squad of Root operatives being engulfed by a massive Fireball Jutsu.

He also watched as a Root shinobi was sent flying by a punch that left him lying in a crater upon impact.

Tsunade and Fugaku landed on top of a building, observing the destruction caused by Danzo.

Just then, a Uchiha jonin landed in front of them. "Fugaku-sama, I'm glad you're here. We need your assistance," he said.

Kakashi landed beside them, making the Uchiha jonin tense and ready to attack, but Fugaku stopped him. "Tagama, he's on our side," Fugaku assured him.

The now-named Tagama relaxed his shoulders a bit.

Looking at Kakashi, Tsunade asked, "Report, Kakashi."

Kakashi nodded. "According to Kaito, the Uchiha clan is being attacked from all sides. He estimates at least a thousand Root operatives. My squad is helping Kaito's clones take them down."

Tagama nodded. "We're being outnumbered. That Uzumaki kid is helping us push them back."

Fugaku turned to Tagama. "Haven't the police force arrived yet?"

Tagama shook his head. "No, we haven't received any backup. They must have been attacked as well."

Tsunade nodded. "Fugaku, take charge and organize the counteroffensive. Kakashi, coordinate the ANBU with Fugaku. Ask all ANBU to remove their masks to help distinguish us from them. Capture some, but don't let any of them escape."

Fugaku, Kakashi, and Tagama nodded. "Understood, Lady Hokage," they said before body flickering away.

Tsunade bit her thumb, drawing blood, and made a few hand signs. "Summoning Jutsu!" she called out, slamming her palm on the ground.

A large puff of smoke appeared and then dissipated, revealing a massive slug. "Lady Tsunade," it said.

"No time to catch up, Katsuyu," Tsunade quickly ordered. "I need you to divide up and help heal the injured civilians and Uchiha clan members."

"Understood," Katsuyu replied before splitting into thousands of little slugs, slithering away to help heal people.

Tsunade sat down cross-legged on the building just as Shikaku arrived with a large squad of ANBU and Hyuga clan members.

Tsunade ordered, "Four of you stand guard over me while I supply Katsuyu with my chakra. The rest of you, spread out and help." They all nodded and body flickered away, while four formed a protective circle around Tsunade as seal markings spread around her.

Hogwarts: Neville’s Insert Chapter 20

Hogwarts: Neville’s Insert Chapter 20

"Any luck?" Harry asked his expression a mix of hope and frustration.

Hermione shook her head. "Nothing. I've looked everywhere. It's as if he doesn't exist."

Neville shrugged as they walked towards the Great Hall. "Maybe you're overcomplicating it. Sometimes the answer is right under your nose."

Ron raised an eyebrow. "What do you mean by that?"

"Just that perhaps you're looking in the wrong places," Neville replied enigmatically.

As they entered the Great Hall, the aroma of roasted meats, fresh bread, and sweet puddings filled the air. The long tables were laden with dishes, and the chatter of students created a lively atmosphere.

They took their seats at the Gryffindor table. Neville helped himself to a generous portion of roasted chicken and mashed potatoes.

….

Neville sat in the Great Hall, finishing the last bites of his hearty breakfast. The aroma of bacon and sausages lingered in the air, mingling with the warm scent of freshly toasted bread. He had opted for a full English breakfast that morning—bacon, sausages, fried eggs, and toast. A glass of orange juice sat beside his plate, the condensation forming tiny droplets that trickled down the sides.

Across from him, Hermione had already polished off her meal and was now engrossed in the pages of the Daily Prophet. Her brow furrowed occasionally as she scanned the headlines, her fingers absentmindedly twirling a strand of her bushy brown hair.

"Anything interesting in there?" Neville asked, taking a sip of his orange juice.

"Just the usual nonsense," Hermione replied without looking up. "Although there's an article about new potion regulations that's quite intriguing."

"Sounds absolutely riveting," Neville said with a wry smile.

Beside him, Seamus was finishing his own breakfast with gusto. Harry sat on Neville's other side, his eyes wide with fascination as Ron animatedly explained something about Quidditch which neville pointedly ignored.

A bit further down the table, Lavender and Parvati were giggling over an article in Witch Weekly, pointing at the latest fashion trends and whispering excitedly.

Neville glanced around the Great Hall. The enchanted ceiling above showed a clear winter sky, flecked with delicate snowflakes that vanished just before they reached the students below. The hall buzzed with chatter, everyone abuzz with plans for the upcoming holidays. Thick sweaters and scarves were the order of the day, warding off the castle's persistent chill.

Finishing his orange juice, Neville set the glass down and wiped his mouth with the back of his hand.

Turning to Seamus, he asked, "Do you remember what time the train leaves today?"

Seamus leaned back, letting out a satisfied sigh. "Not entirely sure, mate," he admitted. "Think it's half nine, same as when we came in September."

Hermione looked up from her newspaper. "It's at half past nine," she confirmed crisply. "But the carriages to Hogsmeade leave at half eight sharp." She glanced pointedly at the large clock mounted on the wall above the staff table. "Which means we should really get a move on."

Neville followed her gaze. "You're right," he said. "I still need to finish packing."

Ron stretched lazily. "Plenty of time," he said dismissively. "What's the rush?"

"Some of us like to be punctual," Hermione retorted

Neville stood up, pushing his chair back. "I should probably check that I've got everything," he said. "Last thing I want is to forget something important."

"Like your toad," Seamus chuckled.

"Exactly," Neville agreed, not entirely sure if Seamus was joking.

He turned to Harry and Ron. "Are you two coming? We're heading back to the common room to grab our things."

"Yeah, might as well," Ron said, finally conceding.

Harry nodded.

Lavender and Parvati gathered their belongings and joined the group. "Wait up!" Parvati called. "We'll come along."

Seamus nudged Dean, who was doodling on a piece of parchment. "Come on, Dean, time to get moving."

The group of first-year Gryffindors made their way out of the Great Hall, their footsteps echoing off the stone floors. The castle was alive with activity, students hurrying to and fro, portraits chattering amongst themselves. managing to reach the Fat Lady's portrait without incident.

"Password?" she asked, eyeing them over the rim of her goblet.

"Fortuna Major," Neville supplied.

"Correct," she said, swinging forward to reveal the entrance to the common room.

Once inside, the group began to disperse. "See you in a bit," Neville said to the others. "Just need to pack a few more things."

"Don't take too long," Hermione cautioned. "We should leave in about fifteen minutes."

"Ten," she added, seeing Ron's complacent expression.

Neville climbed the spiral staircase to the boys' dormitory, Seamus and Dean following close behind. The room was in its usual state of disarray—robes tossed over beds, books piled haphazardly, and the occasional sock lying forlornly on the floor.

Neville began gathering his belongings, checking under his bed and inside drawers to make sure he hadn't missed anything. He carefully placed his Herbology notes into his trunk, followed by a small potted plant—a gift from Professor Sprout.

"Don't forget Trevor," Dean reminded him, nodding toward the toad sitting contentedly on Neville's pillow.

"Right, thanks," Neville said, scooping up Trevor and placing him gently into a ventilated box.

Seamus was wrestling with his own trunk, trying to force it closed. "Why does it feel like I have more stuff now than when I arrived?" he grumbled.

With some effort, they managed to get their trunks secured. Neville wrapped a thick scarf around his neck and pulled on his gloves. "Ready to go?"

"All set," Dean replied, hoisting his trunk.

They made their way back down to the common room, where Harry and Ron were engaged in a heated game of wizard chess near the roaring fireplace.

"Who's winning?" Neville asked, setting his trunk down and taking a seat.

"Pawn to c4," Ron declared, watching as his pawn dutifully moved to the square.

Harry sighed, scratching his head. "I'm rubbish at this," he admitted. "Ron beats me every time."

Ron grinned. "You're not awful, Harry—you just need a bit more practice, that's all."

Neville leaned in, observing the board intently. "Have you played much before, Harry?" he inquired.

Harry shook his head. "Not until I came to Hogwarts."

Just then, Hermione approached, pulling her suitcase behind her. She stood beside them, watching the game unfold.

"Knight to e5," Harry said, and his white knight trotted to the designated spot.

"Queen to e5," Ron countered. His queen slid across the board, then dramatically took the chair the knight was sitting on and slammed it down, shattering Harry's knight into pieces.

Hermione watched as the captured piece exploded into a puff of smoke. "Honestly, wizard chess is so unnecessarily violent," she remarked with a hint of disapproval.

Looking rather smug, Ron added, "That's wizard's chess for you." Then, noticing Hermione's luggage, he said, "I see you've already packed."

"I see you haven't," Hermione retorted, raising an eyebrow.

"Change of plans," Ron explained. "I’m staying, my family's heading to Romania to visit my brother Charlie."

Neville picked up one of the broken fragments, which wriggled slightly in his hand. "Fascinating," he murmured. "I wonder how they're enchanted. Do you suppose they have runes inscribed on them?"

Ron shrugged nonchalantly. "Never really thought about it, to be honest. It's just wizard's chess."

"Well then," Hermione said thoughtfully, "you can help Harry look for Nicolas Flamel while I'm away."

Ron groaned. "But we've searched like a hundred times already!"

"Not everywhere," Hermione leaned in, her voice dropping conspiratorially. "We haven't checked the Restricted Section."

Neville grinned. "Hermione Granger suggesting we break the rules? Whatever next?"

Hermione gave him a playful swat on the shoulder. "Oh, hush. But seriously, we haven't explored there yet."

"Yeah, because it's restricted," Ron pointed out. "Clues in the name."

"What's so important about Nicolas Flamel, anyway?" Dean asked, wandering over to join the conversation.

"Just some extra credit work," Harry said quickly, exchanging a glance with Hermione.

"Extra credit over the holidays?" Seamus chuckled, shaking his head. "You lot are absolutely barking mad."

"Hang on," Ron interjected. "Why can't we just enjoy the holidays without all this sleuthing about?"

"Because it's important," Hermione insisted. "And if you won't help, then I'll have to rely on Harry and Neville."

"Alright, alright," Ron conceded. "But I'm not making any promises."

Hermione turned to Harry. "You'll keep looking, won't you, Harry?" When he nodded, she added, "Send me an owl if you find anything."

"And you could ask your parents if they know who Flamel is," suggested Ron. "It'd be safe to ask them."

"Very safe, considering they're both dentists," Hermione replied dryly.

Harry then turned to Neville. "You could ask your gran, Neville. She might know who he is."

This caught Ron and Hermione's attention. Hermione exclaimed, "Of course! You could ask your grandmother! Why didn't I think of that?"

Neville shrugged. "Yeah, I suppose I could ask her, if I remember."

Hermione grabbed Neville's shoulder and gave him a little shake. "Oh, come on, Neville, please? It's been driving me mad!"

Neville, trying to free himself, said, "Alright, alright, I'll ask her! Just stop shaking me!"

Neville glanced at the clock on the mantelpiece. "We really ought to get going," he said.

"Agreed," Hermione replied, lifting her suitcase with some effort.

Noticing her struggle, Neville tapped his wand on the suitcase, making it float. "Here you go," he offered.

She smiled warmly. "Thank you, Neville."

They gathered their belongings and headed towards the portrait hole. "See you after the holidays," Neville said to Harry and Ron.

"Have a good Christmas," Harry replied.

The corridors were bustling with students making their way to the entrance hall. Their chatter echoed off the stone walls, mingling with the distant sounds of shifting staircases and whispering portraits.

As they stepped outside, the crisp winter air nipped at their faces. The grounds were blanketed in a light layer of snow, the white expanse stretching out towards the Forbidden Forest.

Neville paused as they approached the line of carriages waiting to take them to Hogsmeade Station. His eyes widened at the sight before him. Standing silently were skeletal horses with leathery wings and blank, white eyes.

"Thestrals," he whispered, a chill running down his spine. A knot tightened in his stomach. "Why can I see them?" he thought, his mind racing.

"Is it because I've... I died?" He reached out tentatively, his hand hovering near the muzzle of one of the Thestrals.

"Oi, Neville!" Seamus called from the carriage. "What are you doing over there? Come on!"

Neville snapped out of his reverie. "Right, sorry!" he called back, withdrawing his hand. He decided not to mention the Thestrals; it wasn't something he felt ready to share.

"Everything alright, Neville?" Hermione asked, noticing his sudden stillness.

He blinked, pulling himself back to reality. "Yeah, just... thought I saw something," he said vaguely.

She followed his gaze but saw nothing unusual. "We should get on the carriage," she suggested gently.

"Right," Neville agreed, tearing his eyes away from the creatures.

He climbed into the carriage, taking a seat next to Seamus and across from Hermione, Lavender, and Parvati.

Seamus looked at him quizzically. "You look like you've seen a ghost," he remarked.

"Just a bit chilly," Neville lied, rubbing his hands together.

The carriage began to move, gliding smoothly along the path. Neville couldn't help but steal another glance out the window, catching sight of the Thestrals' eerie forms pulling them forward.

"What were you staring at earlier?" Lavender asked curiously.

"Probably admiring the snow," Parvati suggested.

"Something like that," Neville muttered.

Hermione gave him a thoughtful look but didn't press the matter.

"So, what are everyone's plans for the holidays?" Seamus asked, breaking the silence.

"Visiting family," Lavender said. "My aunt's coming over from France. She always brings the best sweets."

"I'm spending time with my sister," Parvati added. "We might go shopping in Diagon Alley."

"Sounds fun," Dean said. "I'm just looking forward to Mum's cooking. Nothing beats a home-cooked meal."

"What about you, Neville?" Hermione prompted.

"Oh, I'm not sure," Neville replied. "Gran mentioned in her letter that we'll be spending some time together. Other than that, I don't know much."

"What about you, Hermione?" Parvati asked. "Any exciting plans?"

"Nothing out of the ordinary," she said. "Just spending time with my parents. Maybe catch up on some reading."

"Of course," Seamus chuckled. "Wouldn't be a holiday without books, would it?"

Neville leaned back in his seat, trying to push thoughts of the Thestrals out of his mind. Instead, he focused on the rhythmic motion of the carriage and the pleasant chatter of his friends.

Before long, they arrived at Hogsmeade Station. The platform was alive with activity, steam billowing from the Hogwarts Express as students hurried aboard.

"Here we go," Dean said, hefting his trunk.

They found an empty compartment and settled in, stowing their luggage overhead. As the train whistle sounded, they felt the gentle lurch of movement.

A while later, their compartment was interrupted. "Anything from the trolley, dears?" came the voice of the trolley witch.

They all indulged, purchasing a variety of treats to share. Neville bought a few Chocolate Frogs and some Sugar Quills, and Dean bought a packet of Every Flavour Beans. The sweets were met with both delight and disgust, depending on the luck of the draw.

"Ugh, earwax," Seamus grimaced, prompting laughter all around.

"I don't know how anyone could eat this," Neville said, examining a bean between his fingers. He popped it into his mouth and immediately spat it out. "Grass! It tastes like fresh grass."

"At least it's not vomit-flavoured," Dean said, tossing one into his mouth.

They spent the journey playing games, sharing stories, and enjoying each other's company. Neville found himself relaxing, the earlier unease fading away.

As the sky outside began to darken, Hermione pulled out a book and nestled into a quiet corner. Neville watched her for a moment before turning back to the window. The countryside sped past, a blur of snow-dusted fields and distant lights.

"Almost there," Dean observed, glancing at his watch.

Neville felt a mixture of excitement and nervousness. He wasn't exactly looking forward to seeing his gran, but at the same time, he felt sorry for her.

The train finally pulled into King's Cross Station. The platform was bustling with families eagerly waiting to greet their children.

"Well, this is us," Seamus said, standing up and stretching.

They gathered their belongings and made their way onto the platform. Neville spotted his grandmother immediately—her tall figure and distinctive crow hat standing out in the crowd.

"She looks... impressive," Parvati remarked.

"That's one way to put it," Neville said with a small smile.

They exchanged goodbyes, promising to write over the holidays and see each other soon.

"Take care, Neville," Hermione said, giving him a quick hug. "And happy Christmas."

"Happy Christmas," he replied.

"Don't forget to ask your gran," Hermione whispered as they parted.

"I won't," Neville assured her.

As he approached his gran, she greeted him with a warm embrace. "Neville, dear, you look well," she said, her eyes shining.

"Hello, Gran," he replied. "It's good to see you."

"Come along, let's get you home," she said, taking charge and holding out her hand for Neville to grasp.

When he did, she instructed, "Hold tight, okay? Remember, don't let go." Neville nodded, and Augusta apparated them both out of King's Cross station.

Neville felt a pulling sensation, as if he were being squeezed through a tube, and then it was over. They landed in front of a large gate, and beyond it stood an impressive manor house, the setting sun casting a warm glow behind it.

Seeing the manor, Neville said, "That's huge," as he let go of Augusta's hand.

She straightened her clothes and, with a smile, said, "Welcome to Longbottom Manor, Neville," as the gates opened.

Kaito Akaden Chapter 136

Kaito Akaden Chapter 136

Kaito nodded.

He exchanged a glance with Tsunade before continuing. "We're handling it. Lady Tsunade has agreed to become the Fifth Hokage. We've already secured the support of the major clans, and the Uchiha have also agreed to support her. Things are changing."

Relief washed over Shisui's features. "That's... that's good to hear." He smiled weakly.

Tsunade reached into her bag and pulled out a small vial. "Here, drink this. It's medicine to help purge the remaining poison from your system."

She handed the vial to him, and he grimaced at the bitter taste but drank it without complaint. "Thank you, Lady Tsunade."

She patted his shoulder gently. "Get some rest. We'll check on you later."

Shisui fell back into sleep.

As they left the room, Kaito said, "Well, I should go and let Hotaru know about the mission. I'll be back later, Mom." Sighing, he ran a hand through his hair.

….

The sun was setting over Konoha as the day wound down. In the Hokage Tower, many people were gathering in the meeting hall. The jonin, clan heads, and department heads filled the room with chatter as they awaited the arrival of the elders and the Hokage.

Shikaku sat at the Nara clan's designated seat with his arms crossed, leaning on his chair. He was quietly waiting for everyone to arrive. The other clan heads sat in their designated spots.

Fugaku had his eyes closed and arms crossed as he waited for the meeting to begin.

Hiashi, Tsume, Choza, and Inoichi all knew what the meeting was about and maintained stoic faces.

All the major department heads and prominent jonin who had been informed were present.

A while later, the Third Hokage and the elder council took their seats.

Danzo strolled in right after, his cane tapping the ground as he made his way to his seat and sat down.

The Third Hokage leaned back in his chair, puffed out a cloud of smoke, and asked, "Well, now that everyone's here, Shikaku, why have you called for an emergency meeting?"

Koharu asked, "Yes, why have you called us this late?" while Homura nodded.

Danzo just sat there, his face unreadable.

Shikaku leaned forward in his chair, nodded, and said, "Thank you all for coming on such short notice," he began, his voice neutral. "I've called this meeting to discuss an urgent matter concerning the leadership of our village: the appointment of the next Hokage."

Koharu's eyes widened, and she asked, "What are you insinuating, Shikaku? The village already has a Hokage," she said, her tone edged with irritation.

Hiruzen eyes narrowed but raised a calming hand. "Let's hear him out," he said.

Homura adjusted his glasses, leaning forward. "Yes, please explain yourself."

Danzo remained silent, his face as stoic as ever.

Shikaku met their gazes evenly. "What I mean is that the Fifth Hokage has been selected and appointed. It's time for Lord Third to step down."

Those who were not in the know gasped and whispered among themselves. Koharu shot up from her seat. "What are you blabbering about, Shikaku? What you are insinuating is treason!" she exclaimed.

Homura nodded, agreeing with her. "You can't select a Hokage without the approval of the current Hokage and the Council of Elders!"

Shikaku noticed that Danzo was unusually calm and hadn't voiced his opinion. He thought, "That's strange; he's too calm. I have to keep an eye on him."

Shikaku remained unflustered. "After the Fourth sacrificed himself to seal the Nine-Tails, Lord Third resumed his duties as an interim Hokage until a successor was found. Given how occupied we've been with rebuilding the village, perhaps the formal appointment slipped his mind. Therefore, we took it upon ourselves to find a suitable candidate for the Fifth Hokage. Given the current political climate the village is currently facing, we believe appointing the Fifth Hokage would help alleviate the underlying issues and help mend old wounds."

Hiruzen calmly smoked his pipe, his gaze shifting to Fugaku when Shikaku mentioned the village's political climate.

Koharu's eyes flashed with anger. "Even so, acting without the approval of the acting Hokage is treasonous! We must vet and approve any candidate for the position!"

Before Shikaku could respond, Fugaku Uchiha stood. "The approval of the elders is not required," he stated. "All the major clans, including the Uchiha"—he emphasized the word "Uchiha"—"along with the Daimyo, have endorsed the selection and agreed."

Koharu turned to Fugaku, incredulous. "Fugaku, you should know better! This isn't just about formalities; it's about the very fabric of our governance! Bypassing the established order sets a dangerous precedent. Have you thought about the consequences?"

Hiruzen puffed out a cloud of smoke and asked, "Who has been chosen as the Fifth Hokage?"

The large double doors swung open, and Tsunade entered the room with confident strides. Clad in her usual attire—a green haori draped over her shoulders—she exuded authority.

"That would be me," she announced, making her way to the front where Hiruzen and the others sat.

Kaito followed closely behind her, standing beside her.

Hiruzen eyed Tsunade for a moment, then glanced at Kaito.

Those in the know were all silent; they were the ones who had agreed and signed the petition for her appointment. Hiruzen, Danzo, Koharu, and Homura didn't fail to notice their silence either.

Koharu's eyes widened. "Tsunade? You've returned... after all this time?"

Homura adjusted his glasses again. "While your abilities are beyond question, Tsunade, you've been away from the village for years. Do you truly intend to take up the mantle?"

Tsunade nodded, her face calm. "Yes. I've been asked to become the Fifth Hokage, and I've accepted."

Danzo's eyes narrowed, but he remained silent, his expression unreadable.

Hiruzen offered a gentle smile. "It's good to see you, Tsunade."

She inclined her head slightly. "Lord Third," she replied, her voice clipped and short.

Koharu regained her composure, her eyes sharpening. "This hasn't been discussed! Such a significant decision cannot be made without the Council's input!"

Fugaku interjected calmly, "The matter is not up for discussion. The decision was made with the best interests of the village in mind. The major clans and the Daimyo believe Lady Tsunade is the right choice to lead us forward."

Hiruzen nodded, puffing out a cloud of smoke. "Tsunade, if you're willing to accept this burden, then I have faith in you."

Koharu looked at Hiruzen in disbelief. "You're just going to step aside without any deliberation? This isn't like you, Hiruzen!"

Hiruzen turned to Koharu. "The village's welfare is my foremost concern. Tsunade is more than capable, and perhaps it's time for new leadership."

He removed the Hokage hat from his head and held it out to Tsunade.

Tsunade accepted the hat but didn't put it on. "Thank you, Lord Third. But before we get into any ceremonies, there are urgent matters we need to address."

Homura frowned. "What could be more pressing than the proper succession of leadership?"

Tsunade took a step forward. "The matter pertains to the Uchiha clan—specifically, their treatment by the hands of the village higher-ups and, subsequently, the village as a whole," she said, her voice carrying across the room.

A ripple of unease passed through the assembly. Fugaku raised an eyebrow but remained silent.

Koharu glanced at Hiruzen, Homura, and Danzo.

Homura frowned. "Tsunade, shouldn't we discuss such sensitive topics privately first? This hasn't been brought to the council."

Tsunade addressed the room. "It needs to be addressed openly. For too long, the Uchiha have been unfairly treated. I want to apologize on behalf of Konoha. The constant surveillance and mistrust placed upon your clan were unjust and unwarranted."

Fugaku stood and bowed. "Lady Hokage, your words are appreciated."

Tsunade nodded and continued, "Effective immediately, the surveillance of the Uchiha clan will cease, and the Uchiha are free to relocate anywhere in the village as they see fit."

Koharu's face flushed with indignation. "Tsunade, you can't make such declarations without consulting us! The security measures were in place for valid reasons!"

Agitated, Koharu added, "You can't make these changes unilaterally! The implications could affect the entire village's security."

Hiruzen sat calmly, watching the proceedings while puffing on his pipe.

Tsunade ignored them and continued. "Uchiha clan members will be free to join any of Konoha's departments. Fugaku, please provide me with a list of suitable candidates to be trained as medic-nin."

She continued, "Furthermore, I will be creating a new position in the village. This position will be named Shadow Hokage. Their role will be to serve as the right hand of the Hokage and will report directly and only to the Hokage. This position will also take charge of the village if the Hokage is not available, or a suitable candidate hasn't been found to replace them. This position will be given to the Uchiha clan and will be a hereditary position exclusive to them."

Koharu slammed her hand on the table. "This is unprecedented! Such a position doesn't exist!"

Homura interjected, "That is giving too much power to a single clan. This would destabilize the village!"

The other village heads nodded, agreeing with the elders. Granting excessive authority to one clan could lead to more problems.

"Consider it a gesture of goodwill—a gift to one of Konoha’s most loyal clans," Tsunade replied smoothly. "The Uchiha clan is one of the founding clans of Konoha. This position recognizes their contributions and signifies their importance to the village. It's time we honor them properly."

Kaito, standing beside Tsunade, added, "And as for your concerns, the Uchiha clan has agreed to forfeit their right to the position of Hokage, so there won't be any imbalance of power."

This statement garnered nods from the clan heads and department leaders.

Fugaku bowed deeply. "We are honored by your trust. The Uchiha clan accepts this responsibility, Lady Hokage."

He continued, "And as agreed, the Uchiha Police Force will also be opened to all qualified shinobi of Konoha. It will no longer be exclusive to the Uchiha clan. Applications will be open starting tomorrow."

Gasps and murmurs filled the room. Hiashi Hyuga leaned forward, intrigued. He hadn't known that the Uchiha clan would open up the police force to everyone. This made things interesting, as he could see many Hyuga clan members signing up. "What positions will be open to the rest of the village?" he asked.

Fugaku nodded and said, " All positions will be open, except for the Chief of Police, which will be fulfilled by the clan head."

Koharu's patience snapped. "This is unacceptable! You're making sweeping changes without the Council's approval! You're overstepping your authority!"

Homura added, "We cannot support these decisions made on a whim."

Tsunade's gaze swept over them, and she smirked. "I'm not done yet, you old geezers. I am also hereby disbanding the Elder Council, effective immediately."

A deafening silence enveloped the room. Even Danzo's eyes widened slightly.

Koharu's voice trembled with rage. "You can't do that! You don't have the power!"

Homura echoed, "The Council has been an integral part of Konoha's leadership since its founding!"

Tsunade stood firm. "On the contrary, I'm stabilizing the village by addressing the root of our internal conflicts."

She produced a scroll bearing the Daimyo's seal and handed it to them. "This is a signed approval from the Daimyo disbanding the Elder Council," she declared.

Koharu snatched the scroll, her eyes scanning the contents frantically. "This... this can't be!" she stammered.

Homura peered over her shoulder, his face paling. "How did you...?" he whispered.

Hiruzen watched the exchange silently, his expression unreadable.

He stepped forward. "Tsunade, are you certain this is the right course of action?" he asked calmly.

Tsunade met his gaze steadily. "Absolutely. It's necessary," she replied.

She glanced at Hiruzen. "There's more that needs to be addressed," she added.

She nodded to Kaito, who returned the gesture and formed a one-handed tiger seal. Black kanji appeared on Koharu, Homura, Danzo, and Hiruzen, immobilizing them and binding them to their chairs.

"What is the meaning of this?" Koharu exclaimed, struggling against the seals.

Homura looked aghast. "Tsunade, explain yourself!" he demanded.

Danzo's eyes narrowed but remained silent.

Hiruzen remained calm but asked, "Why have you used paralyzing seals on us, Tsunade?" He made no effort to struggle.

The other clan heads were unsure of what Tsunade and Kaito were doing. Only Shikaku knew what was going on, so they waited for her explanation, recognizing her authority as the Hokage.

"As the Fifth Hokage, I am arresting you pending investigation for your involvement in numerous crimes committed during your tenure," Tsunade's voice was cold. "Let's begin with the most recent. Danzo Shimura, you are under arrest for attacking and grievously injuring a Konoha shinobi named Shisui Uchiha."

The room erupted into shocked whispers. Everyone knew of the prodigious Shunshin no Shisui.

Koharu protested, "What nonsense are you rambling about, Tsunade? Shisui was reported dead by the Uchiha clan—he committed suicide!"

Homura added, "Yes, you can ask Fugaku."

Danzo stayed quiet.

Hiruzen closed his eyes and remained silent, aware of the truth.

Fugaku crossed his arms and glared at Danzo.

Tsunade shook her head. "We faked Shisui's death. Kaito and Itachi found him heavily injured and missing an eye. They brought him to me for healing, and he is currently under my care. He has confessed everything. Danzo was responsible for the attack."

Tsunade continued, her gaze never leaving Danzo. "And that's not the only reason you're being arrested."

"We have uncovered evidence of your treasonous activities," Tsunade declared. She signaled with her hand. Kaito grinned, his eyes flickering over Danzo, Hiruzen, and the elders.

Kaito unsealed a stack of copied files, waving them slightly. "Found these in your hideout," he said mockingly to Danzo.

Danzo's expression darkened. "You have no idea what you're meddling with," he warned.

Hiruzen glanced at the files, a hint of concern in his eyes. "Tsunade, are you certain you want to proceed with this?"

She shot him a sharp look. "It's time the village knows about the shady dealings you've allowed, old man."

Kaito began distributing the files among the clan heads. As they read, expressions of shock and anger spread across their faces.

"These documents reveal Konoha's previous higher-ups' involvement in heinous acts," Tsunade stated. "Such as Danzo's collaboration with Orochimaru, supplying children for his twisted experiments."

Gasps echoed throughout the chamber. Shibi Aburame adjusted his glasses. "So those rumors were true," he murmured.

Inoichi Yamanaka looked stricken. "This is... unbelievable."

Tsume Inuzuka growled low in her throat. "Is this true?" she demanded, glaring at the elders and former Hokage.

Choza Akimichi looked ill. "I can't believe what I'm reading."

Shikaku shook his head sadly. "The evidence is too detailed to be fabricated."

Tsunade pressed on. "Danzo manipulated mission files to eliminate Uchiha clan members to harvest their Sharingan eyes. Worse still, Hiruzen knew about these actions and chose to do nothing."

Hiashi Hyuga clenched his fists. "This goes deep."

Tsunade's voice wavered slightly as she continued. "They also orchestrated the downfall of the Uzumaki clan during the Second Shinobi War, selling them out to enemy forces."

Inoichi Yamanaka's eyes were wide. "How could this happen under our noses?"

"And they discredited Sakumo Hatake, the White Fang," Tsunade added. "Because the public favored him as the Fourth Hokage, Danzo leaked classified information to tarnish his reputation."

Kakashi Hatake, who was watching from the shadow among the other ANBU, lowered his head. Kaito had shown him the file, but it was still hard for him to process.

Tsunade's composure cracked as she faced Hiruzen. "That's not all," she said, her voice thick with emotion. "You were responsible for the decline of my clan the Senju. You systematically eradicated us because we never supported your decisions."

She moved, grabbing Hiruzen by the collar. bringing him to her face Tears brimmed in her eyes. "How could you?" she growled.

The room was utterly silent, the weight of her accusation hanging heavy.

Kaito stood calmly and just watched; if it were up to him, he would have just decapitated them and left.

She released Hiruzen, taking a shaky step back. She calmed herself down.

She called out. "Kakashi!"

Kakashi body flickered Infront of her, dropping to one knee. "Hokage-sama."

"Mobilize a battalion of ANBU. Round up all Root operatives still loyal to Danzo. and Secure any children he's kidnapped for his private militia," she commanded.

Kakashi bowed his head. "It will be done," he said before body-flickering away.

Tsunade composed herself. "Ibiki Morino!" she called.

The head of the Torture and Interrogation Force stepped forward. "Yes, Lady Hokage."

"Take Danzo and the elders into custody. Interrogate them thoroughly. Find out everything they're involved in," she ordered. "And place the old man under house arrest under heavy guard until further notice."

Ibiki nodded. "Understood." He motioned for some Jonin to assist.

Kaito moved to the immobilized elders and Hiruzen. Placing his palm on each one, he reinforced the seals, effectively sealing off their chakra and ensuring they couldn't escape.

Koharu glared at Tsunade. "You are tearing this village apart!"

Homura struggled against his bindings. "This is an abuse of power!"

Danzo remained silent as Kaito placed a hand on Danzo's chest, grinning.

Danzo leaned forward and said, "Don't think you have won," before he puffed into a cloud of smoke, revealing himself to be a shadow clone.

Hogwarts: Neville’s Insert Chapter 19

Hogwarts: Neville’s Insert Chapter 19

Hermione glanced at the others. "Well, we'd better get going," she said, standing up. "Thank you for the tea, Hagrid."

"Yeah, cheers," Ron added, getting to his feet.

Neville sighed as he stood up with the others. "Thanks, Hagrid, and don't forget about the Bowtruckles and Mooncalves."

"Won't forget," Hagrid nodded. "I'll let yeh know when we're goin'."

As they made their way to the door, Hagrid called after them, "Now, promise me yeh won't go meddlin' in things that don' concern yeh. That dog's there fer a reason."

"Of course, Hagrid," Harry replied, giving him a reassuring smile.

Once outside, Neville couldn't help but grin. "Can't wait to see Mooncalves and the Bowtruckles!" He was giddy; he'd been wanting to see magical creatures for ages, and now he had the chance. He was over the moon.

"Getting off topic again, Neville," Harry said shaking his head. "We've got to find out who Nicolas Flamel is."

"I've heard the name somewhere," Hermione mused thoughtfully. "I'll have a look in the library."

Ron rolled his eyes good-naturedly. "Of course you will."

…

It was mid-December, and Christmas was fast approaching. Hogwarts was enveloped in a blanket of snow; the once lush green grounds transformed into a vast expanse of white, glittering under the pale winter sun. Neville Longbottom walked down the corridor towards the dungeons, taking a hearty bite of the warm toast he'd snagged from the Great Hall before setting off.

"Ready for Potions, Neville?" Hermione Granger asked, pulling her scarf tighter around her neck as she caught up with him.

Neville turned to face her, adjusting the strap of his satchel. "As ready as I'll ever be," he replied with a slight smile. "Though I wish it wasn't so dreadfully cold down in the dungeons."

Hermione nodded sympathetically. "Tell me about it. It's colder down there than anywhere else in the castle."

Together, they made their way down the moving staircases, joined by Harry Potter, Ron Weasley, and the rest of the first-year Gryffindors. The chatter among the students was a mix of excitement for the upcoming holidays and grumblings about the biting temperatures.

As they descended into the dungeons, the air grew noticeably chillier. Their breaths formed small clouds, and Neville pulled his cloak tighter around himself. The stone walls seemed to radiate cold, and he couldn't help but shiver slightly.

Inside the Potions classroom, Professor Snape stood at the front, his dark eyes surveying the students as they took their seats. Neville and Hermione settled at a workstation near the middle. Today, they would be brewing the Wiggenweld Potion—a healing concoction that, when made correctly, could awaken someone from a magically induced sleep.

"Instructions are on the board," Snape said in his usual monotone. "You have one hour. Begin."

Neville collected the ingredients listed on the board: Wiggentree bark, moly, dittany, horklump juice, flobberworm mucus, seven Chizpurfle fangs, billywig sting slime, a sprig of mint, Boom Berry juice, one stewed mandrake, honeywater, sloth brain mucus, moondew drops, salamander blood, ten lionfish spines, unicorn horn, and wolfsbane.

He carefully brought the listed ingredients back to his table, laying them out neatly.

Hermione glanced over their setup, nodding approvingly.

"Let's start by heating the cauldron to a gentle simmer," she suggested.

Neville looked down at the recipe in his potions book—the instructions for brewing the Wiggenweld Potion were detailed and precise. He felt a bit anxious but was determined to get it right.

They worked together, carefully measuring and adding ingredients. Neville crushed the lionfish spines into a fine powder while Hermione prepared the horklump juice. The familiar sounds of bubbling potions and the murmur of students filled the dungeon classroom.

As Neville was grinding the lionfish spines, Draco Malfoy's loud and obnoxious voice cut through the ambient noise.

"I do feel so sorry," Malfoy drawled loudly during the Potions class, "for all those poor souls who have to stay at Hogwarts for Christmas because they're not wanted at home." He cast a sly glance over at Harry as he spoke. Crabbe and Goyle chuckled appreciatively.

Neville glanced up to see Malfoy smirking in Harry's direction. Harry, who was calmly measuring out his own powdered spine of lionfish, seemed determined to ignore them. Malfoy had been even more unpleasant than usual since the Quidditch match where Gryffindor had triumphed.

Having failed to unsettle Harry with his previous jibes, Malfoy had reverted to mocking him about not having a proper family. It was a cruel dig, even for Malfoy, and it made Neville's stomach churn with unease.

Professor McGonagall had come around the week before, making a list of students who would be staying at the castle over the holidays, and Harry had signed up at once. Neville remembered the look on Harry's face—resigned but not surprised.

As for Neville, he had received a letter from his gran just a week prior, asking him to come back home for the holidays. She had mentioned wanting to spend time with him and thought it would be a good opportunity for Neville to learn more about their family history. Neville wasn't exactly looking forward to it. He felt awkward, knowing that he wasn't the original Neville and had essentially taken his place. A pang of guilt tugged at him, but he decided he should spend time with Augusta since he was her only family left as well.

He was pulled out of his thoughts by Hermione's huff of annoyance. "Honestly, Malfoy is insufferable," she whispered to Neville. "He always has to make a scene, doesn't he?"

Neville shrugged lightly. "Some people are just like that," he replied. "Best to ignore him, really."

Malfoy had long since stopped targeting Neville. After several unsuccessful attempts to bully him—which Neville met with calm indifference—Malfoy seemed to lose interest. There was also that one incident when Malfoy and his cronies tried to hex Neville in the corridor. Without a second thought, Neville had turned his wand on them and cast "Petrificus Totalus," leaving them immobilised on the floor. The memory brought a slight smile to his face.

"Add the moly leaves now," Hermione instructed, pulling Neville's attention back to their potion.

He carefully sprinkled the shredded leaves into the simmering liquid, watching as it turned a soft shade of green.

"Longbottom, less chatting, more brewing," Snape called out sharply. "Ten points from Gryffindor for talking in class."

Neville exchanged a glance with Hermione but said nothing. Snape had been particularly harsh on him ever since the assignment incident. Since then, Neville had lost more than a hundred points—more than Harry and the other Gryffindors combined in that time frame.

"Time's up," Professor Snape's voice sliced through the classroom chatter. "Stop whatever you are doing."

They were among the first to complete their potion. Hermione ladled a sample into a vial, and Neville carried it up to Snape's desk.

Snape held the vial up to the light, scrutinising its colour and consistency. "Acceptable," he said curtly, setting it aside. Neville nodded and returned to his seat.

Neville released a breath he didn't realise he'd been holding. "I think that's the closest to a compliment we'll ever get from him," he whispered.

Hermione chuckled softly. "I'll take it."

As the class ended, Neville and Hermione packed up their materials. Harry and Ron joined them at the door.

Neville glanced over at Harry. "Are you alright?" he asked quietly.

Harry nodded. "Yeah. Malfoy's just being Malfoy."

Neville nodded in understanding. "If you need anything over the holidays, you can always owl me."

"Thanks, Neville," Harry said appreciatively. "I might just do that."

"How did it go?" Ron asked.

"Not too bad," Neville replied. "We managed to get the potion right."

"Better than ours," Ron admitted sheepishly. "Ours was a bit... thick."

They made their way up from the dungeons, the cold air gradually giving way to the slightly warmer corridors above.

They found a large fir tree blocking the corridor ahead. Two enormous feet sticking out at the bottom and a loud puffing sound told them that Hagrid was behind it.

"Evenin', you lot," Hagrid beamed, his face nearly hidden behind a massive fir tree. "Gettin' the last o' the trees up to the Great Hall."

"Hi, Hagrid! Need any help with that?" Ron offered eagerly.

"All sorted, but cheers for asking," Hagrid replied, brushing a bit of snow from his beard.

Neville pulled out his wand. "Here, Hagrid, let me lighten the load for you. Wingardium Leviosa!"

The tree lifted gently off the ground, easing Hagrid's burden. "Much appreciated, Neville," Hagrid said with a grateful grin.

"Would you mind moving out of the way?" came Malfoy's cold drawl from behind them. "Trying to earn some extra pocket money, Weasley? Hoping to become the next gamekeeper when you leave Hogwarts, are you? That hut of Hagrid's must seem like a mansion compared to what your family's used to."

Ron flushed with anger and lunged at Malfoy just as Professor Snape appeared at the top of the stairs. "Weasley!" Snape barked sharply. Ron released his grip on Malfoy's robes.

"He was provoked, Professor," Hagrid said, peering around the tree. "Malfoy was insultin' his family."

"Be that as it may, fighting is against Hogwarts rules," Snape replied silkily. "Five points from Gryffindor, Weasley, and consider yourself fortunate it's not more. Move along, all of you."

Snape's gaze shifted to Ron and then fixed on Neville, who still had his wand out. "Wands away in the corridors," he snapped. "Another five points from Gryffindor."

Malfoy, Crabbe, and Goyle pushed past the tree with smug grins, scattering pine needles across the floor.

Neville calmly lowered his wand, unfazed by Snape's reprimand. Hagrid frowned slightly but said nothing as Snape and Malfoy moved on.

"I'll get him one of these days," Ron muttered through gritted teeth, glaring after Malfoy.

"I can't stand either of them," Harry said, his eyes following Snape's retreating figure.

"Don't let them get to you," Hagrid said reassuringly. "Now, how about you all come and see the Great Hall? It's looking right festive."

They agreed and followed Hagrid toward the Great Hall. The corridors were adorned with garlands of holly and mistletoe, and the warm glow of lanterns cast a cozy light on the stone walls.

Inside the Great Hall, the sight was simply breathtaking. Twelve towering Christmas trees stood majestically around the room, each adorned with shimmering ornaments, enchanted snowflakes, and twinkling fairy lights. Professors McGonagall and Flitwick were adding the final touches, the latter charming golden bubbles to float gracefully onto the branches from his wand.

"It's absolutely beautiful," Hermione breathed, her eyes wide with wonder.

"Couldn't agree more," Neville replied.

"How many days have you got left until your holidays?" Hagrid asked, his eyes twinkling beneath his shaggy eyebrows.

"Just the one," said Hermione. "And that reminds me. Guys, we've got half an hour before lunch; we should be heading to the library."

Neville groaned softly. "Really? Must we?"

Hermione gave him a pointed look. "Yes, we must."

"The library?" said Hagrid, trailing after them as they left the hall. "Right before the holidays? You're a keen lot, aren't yeh?"

"Oh, we're not off to study," Neville decided to explain. "Ever since you mentioned Nicolas Flamel, these three have been trying to find out who he is."

"You what?" Hagrid looked genuinely startled. "Now listen here—I've told yeh before—drop it. It's none of your business what that dog's guardin'."

"We just want to know who Nicolas Flamel is, that's all," Hermione persisted.

"Unless you'd like to tell us and save us the trouble?" Harry added hopefully. "We've combed through hundreds of books already and haven't found a thing—just give us a hint—I know I've read his name somewhere."

"I'm not sayin' another word," Hagrid said firmly.

"Looks like we'll just have to find out on our own, then," Ron sighed.

Hermione seized Neville's arm. "Come on, we need to get a move on." and they left Hagrid looking rather disgruntled as they hurried off towards the library

Neville allowed himself to be dragged along, casting a wistful glance back at the festive hall.

Neville sighed as they reached the library. He already knew who Nicolas Flamel was but had decided not to let the others know. Revealing his knowledge would only lead to awkward questions about how he knew, and he wasn't keen on explaining that. Hermione would undoubtedly press him for details, perhaps even ask which book he'd read it in. Given that she spent so much time with him, she'd find it suspicious that she hadn't noticed him reading any texts on alchemy—which he hadn't. Besides, Neville wasn't even sure which book actually mentioned Nicolas Flamel and besides this kept them occupied.

"Alright, let's split up and search," Hermione instructed, pulling him from his thoughts.

"I'm going to check the Magical History section," Harry said.

"And I'll look into famous alchemists," Ron added.

"Yeah, you do that," Neville muttered, heading towards a quiet table near the back. Instead of joining their fruitless search, he pulled out his holiday assignments. There was an essay for Transfiguration and another for Charms that he needed to finish.

After a while, Hermione returned with a towering stack of books and settled across from him. She eyed his open notebook. "Neville, why aren't you helping us look?"

He glanced up, meeting her gaze. "I've got other things to do," he replied, gesturing to his assignments. "I'd rather finish these now and enjoy my holidays without any homework hanging over me."

Hermione pursed her lips but then nodded. "I suppose you're right. We do have a lot of work due after the break."

They settled into a comfortable silence, each absorbed in their own tasks. The quiet atmosphere of the library allowed Neville to focus, and he found himself making good progress on his essays.

Time passed quickly, and the bell ringing signaled that it was lunchtime. Classes were officially over for the term.

Neville began packing up his things. "Come on, Hermione, I'm starving. " he asked.

She looked up from her book, stretching slightly. She sighed. "sure."

"Here, let me help you with those," Neville offered, stacking her books back onto the trolley.

"Thanks, Neville," she said with a grateful smile.

They left the library and met up with Harry and Ron in the corridor.

"Any luck?" Harry asked, his expression a mix of hope and frustration.

Hermione shook her head. "Nothing. I've looked everywhere. It's as if he doesn't exist."

Neville shrugged as they walked towards the Great Hall. "Maybe you're overcomplicating it. Sometimes the answer is right under your nose."

Ron raised an eyebrow. "What do you mean by that?"

"Just that perhaps you're looking in the wrong places," Neville replied enigmatically.

As they entered the Great Hall, the aroma of roasted meats, fresh bread, and sweet puddings filled the air. The long tables were laden with dishes, and the chatter of students created a lively atmosphere.

They took their seats at the Gryffindor table. Neville helped himself to a generous portion of roasted chicken and mashed potatoes.